TRACTABEL-Distribution System Study PDF

Central Electricity Board
Distribution System Study

Construction Manual
December 2001
1
Table of contents
Page
1. Basic data for design and construction of MV/LV networks ........................................ 1
1.1. General design guidelines............................................................................................................. 1

1.1.1. Maps, drawings and documents ................................................................................... 1
1.1.2. Network layout .............................................................................................................. 2
1.2. Regulations and norms ................................................................................................................. 3
1.3. Local operating conditions ............................................................................................................ 3

1.3.1. Climatic and environmental conditions ......................................................................... 3
1.3.1.1. Temperature and altitude ........................................................................... 3
1.3.1.2. Humidity ..................................................................................................... 3
1.3.1.3. Wind ........................................................................................................... 4
1.3.1.4. Soil thermal resistivity ................................................................................ 4
1.3.1.5. Thunder – Isokeronic level ......................................................................... 4
1.3.1.6. Atmospheric pollution ................................................................................. 4
1.3.2. Factors affecting the choice of electrical equipment .................................................... 4
1.3.2.1. Effect of temperature .................................................................................. 4
1.3.2.2. Tropical outdoor use .................................................................................. 5
1.4. Insulation level of MV/LV network ................................................................................................. 7
1.4.1. MV network ................................................................................................................... 7
1.4.1.1. Outdoor and indoor insulation level ( in air ) .............................................. 7
1.4.1.2. Clearance between live parts ..................................................................... 8
1.4.1.3. Insulation co-ordination .............................................................................. 8
1.4.2. LV network .................................................................................................................... 8
1.4.3. Insulation level for LV equipment ................................................................................. 8
1.5. Short circuit level of MV/LV network ............................................................................................. 9
1.5.1. MV network ................................................................................................................... 9
1.5.2. LV equipment ............................................................................................................... 9
1.6. System earthing of MV/LV network ............................................................................................. 10
1.6.1. MV network ................................................................................................................. 10
1.6.2. LV network .................................................................................................................. 10
1.7. Basic data pertaining to MV/LV lines .......................................................................................... 10
1.7.1. Every Day Stress (EDS) ............................................................................................. 10
1.7.2. Spans under construction ........................................................................................... 10
1.7.3. Data for calculating maximum sag of conductors ...................................................... 10
1.7.4. Clearance between phases ........................................................................................ 11
JMED/4NT/3210/000/01/CM
Final Ed. 01-12-19
2
1.7.5. Data for calculating load due to wind ......................................................................... 11

1.7.6. Safety factors .............................................................................................................. 11
1.7.7. Safety clearances ....................................................................................................... 11
1.8. Distribution System protection .................................................................................................... 11
1.8.1. Requirements for an Outstanding Protective System ................................................ 11
1.8.1.1. Main Protection ........................................................................................ 11
1.8.1.2. Back-up Protection ................................................................................... 11
1.8.1.3. Common Requirements for the Main and Back-up Protection
Functions .................................................................................................. 11
1.8.1.4. Special Topics related to Selectivity ........................................................ 13
1.8.2. System Grounding review of MV Distribution Systems .............................................. 14
1.8.2.1. Generation of the Zero-sequence Current ............................................... 14
1.8.2.2. Impact of the MV Grounding on the HV System ...................................... 15
1.8.2.3. Protection of the Ground Current Limiting Equipment ............................. 15
1.8.3. Autoreclosing .............................................................................................................. 16
1.8.4. 22kV System Grounding............................................................................................. 16
1.8.4.1. 66kV/22kV Injection Transformers ........................................................... 16
1.8.4.2. 6.6 or 11kV/22kV Step-up Transformers ................................................. 16
1.8.5. 22kV System Selectivity ............................................................................................. 16
1.8.6. Selectivity between 22kV Fuses ................................................................................. 16
1.8.6.1. Selectivity between 22kV protection relays .............................................. 17
1.8.7. Fault Indicators ........................................................................................................... 17
1.8.8. Transformer Earth Leakage Protection ...................................................................... 17
1.8.9. Fault Recording Equipment ........................................................................................ 17
2. Design of overhead lines .......................................................................................... 19
2.1. Planning and construction of MV and LV lines ........................................................................... 19

2.1.1. MV overhead lines ...................................................................................................... 19
2.1.2. LV overhead network.................................................................................................. 19
2.1.3. Configuration of MV and LV lines ............................................................................... 19
2.1.4. Poles for MV/LV lines ................................................................................................. 20
2.2. Outlines of MV/LV lines ............................................................................................................... 20
2.3. Topographical work for MV lines ................................................................................................. 20

2.3.1. Routing ....................................................................................................................... 20
2.3.1.1. The preliminary route ............................................................................... 20
2.3.1.2. The actual route ....................................................................................... 21
2.3.2. Pegging of the line route ............................................................................................ 21
2.3.2.1. Angles ...................................................................................................... 21
2.3.2.2. Alignments................................................................................................ 21
2.3.3. Profile.......................................................................................................................... 22
JMED/4NT/3210/000/01/CM
Final Ed. 01-12-19
3
2.3.3.1. Precision................................................................................................... 22
2.3.3.2. Density of level points recorded ............................................................... 22
2.3.3.3. Important points to be recorded on the profile ......................................... 22
2.3.3.4. Complementary data ................................................................................ 22
2.3.3.5. Lines with insulated twisted cable ............................................................ 23
2.3.4. Mapping of topographical data ................................................................................... 23
2.3.4.1. Profile ....................................................................................................... 23
2.3.4.2. Plan view .................................................................................................. 23
2.3.5. Special considerations for inhabited areas................................................................. 24
2.3.5.1. Routing ..................................................................................................... 24
2.3.5.2. Pegging of the line route and profile ........................................................ 24
2.3.5.3. Mapping of topographical data ................................................................. 24
2.4. Spotting of MV line ..................................................................................................................... 24
2.4.1. Basic data ................................................................................................................... 24
2.4.2. Mean span .................................................................................................................. 24
2.4.3. Determination of spotting parameter .......................................................................... 25
2.4.4. Clearance of line above ground ................................................................................. 25
2.4.5. Safety clearance from obstacles ................................................................................ 25
2.4.6. The lengths of sections............................................................................................... 26
2.4.7. Locating of supports along the profile ........................................................................ 26
2.4.8. Information to be shown on the profile ....................................................................... 26
2.4.9. Pegging record ........................................................................................................... 27
2.5. Topographical work for LV lines .................................................................................................. 27
2.5.1. Routing ....................................................................................................................... 27
2.5.1.1. Preliminary route ...................................................................................... 27
2.5.1.2. Actual route .............................................................................................. 27
2.5.2. Pegging of line route.................................................................................................. 27
2.5.3. Survey of line profile ................................................................................................... 28
2.5.4. Mapping of topographical data ................................................................................... 28
2.6. Spotting of LV lines ..................................................................................................................... 29
2.6.1. Basic data ................................................................................................................... 29
2.6.2. Determination of spotting parameters ........................................................................ 29
2.6.3. Safety distances from obstacles ................................................................................. 29
2.7. Pole loading calculation .............................................................................................................. 29
2.7.1. Referenced documents .............................................................................................. 29
2.7.1.1. Electricity regulations - Basic data's ......................................................... 29
2.7.1.2. Code of practice 3 - Chapter V - Part 2 - Wind loads............................... 29
2.7.1.3. Comments on the Electricity regulations .................................................. 30
2.7.1.4. Recommended values for the design of the MV/LV network ................... 31
JMED/4NT/3210/000/01/CM
Final Ed. 01-12-19
4
2.7.2. Calculation of pole loading ......................................................................................... 32

2.8. Calculation of the ampacity of a bare conductor ......................................................................... 33
2.9. Sagging chart for overhead lines ................................................................................................ 33
2.10. Other tools included in the GIPSY software ................................................................................ 33
3. Equipment characteristics for MV/LV lines ............................................................... 34
3.1. Line supports ............................................................................................................................... 34

3.1.1. Concrete poles ........................................................................................................... 34
3.1.1.1. Standards and reference documents ....................................................... 34
3.1.1.2. General appearance ................................................................................ 34
3.1.1.3. Pole burying ............................................................................................. 35
3.1.1.4. Holes ........................................................................................................ 35
3.1.2. Wooden poles ............................................................................................................. 35
3.1.2.1. Norms and reference documents ............................................................. 35
3.1.2.2. Pole burying ............................................................................................. 35
3.1.2.3. Drilling and grooving ................................................................................ 35
3.1.3. Nomenclature and pole characteristics ...................................................................... 36
3.2. Bare MV/LV conductors .............................................................................................................. 37
3.2.1. Standards ................................................................................................................... 37
3.2.2. Technical characteristics ............................................................................................ 37
3.2.3. Packaging ................................................................................................................... 37
3.3. MV insulated twisted cables (overhead and underground) ......................................................... 38
3.3.1. Standards ................................................................................................................... 38
3.3.2. Design and manufacture ............................................................................................ 38
3.3.4. Packaging ................................................................................................................... 40
3.4. Accessories for MV insulated cable ............................................................................................ 40
3.5. LV insulated twisted cables (overhead and service lines) .......................................................... 40

3.5.1. Standards ................................................................................................................... 40
3.5.4. Packaging. .................................................................................................................. 42
3.6. Earthing conductors .................................................................................................................... 42
3.6.1. General characteristics ............................................................................................... 42
3.6.2. Particular characteristics ............................................................................................ 42
3.7. Line fittings and accessories ....................................................................................................... 43
3.7.1. Fittings and accessories for MV lines ......................................................................... 43
3.7.1.1. Cross-arms ............................................................................................... 43
JMED/4NT/3210/000/01/CM
Final Ed. 01-12-19
5
3.7.1.2. Insulators .................................................................................................. 44

3.7.1.3. Line fittings for conductors and cables ..................................................... 46
3.7.1.4. Accessories for torsade cable .................................................................. 50
3.7.1.5. Staying arrangements .............................................................................. 51
3.7.2. Fittings and accessories for LV lines .......................................................................... 51
4. Construction of MV lines .......................................................................................... 54
4.1. Description of works .................................................................................................................... 54
4.2. Pegging 54
4.2.1. Verification of line profile ........................................................................................... 54
4.2.2. Location of supports ................................................................................................... 54
4.3. Tree felling or lopping - creating access ..................................................................................... 54
4.4. Foundation construction .............................................................................................................. 55

4.4.1. Type and choice of foundations ................................................................................. 55
4.4.2. Block concrete foundations ........................................................................................ 56
4.4.2.1. Excavation ................................................................................................ 56
4.4.2.2. Concrete quality (refer also to Chapter 15) .............................................. 56
4.4.2.3. Execution.................................................................................................. 56
4.4.2.4. Calculation of concrete foundations ......................................................... 56
4.4.3. Stoned foundations..................................................................................................... 56
4.4.3.1. Excavation ................................................................................................ 56
4.4.3.2. Construction of the foundation ................................................................. 57
4.5. Earthing of supports and equipment ........................................................................................... 57
4.5.1. What to be earthed ..................................................................................................... 57
4.5.2. Earth resistance value to be respected ...................................................................... 57
4.5.3. Earthing execution ...................................................................................................... 58
4.5.3.1. Installation materials ................................................................................ 58
4.5.3.2. Minimum number of earth plates or rods ................................................. 58
4.5.3.3. Special case - Counterweight .................................................................. 58
4.5.4. Measurement of the earthing resistance value of a support ...................................... 59
4.6. Erection of supports .................................................................................................................... 59
4.6.1. Transport, handling and checking of poles - general ................................................. 59
4.6.2. Concrete poles ........................................................................................................... 59
4.6.3. Wooden poles ............................................................................................................. 60
4.6.4. Marking of poles ......................................................................................................... 60
4.7. Assembly of line fittings, insulators and accessories .................................................................. 61
4.7.1. Installation of fittings , insulators and accessories ..................................................... 61
4.7.2. Assembly and installation of fittings for bare conductors ........................................... 61
JMED/4NT/3210/000/01/CM
Final Ed. 01-12-19
6
4.7.3. Assembly and installation of fittings for twisted cables .............................................. 61

4.7.4. Standard drawings ...................................................................................................... 61
4.8. Pulling, tensioning, adjustment and fixing of conductors and cables ......................................... 61
4.8.1. Pulling and tensioning of cables and conductors ....................................................... 61
4.8.2. Making of joints and anchor clamps ........................................................................... 63
4.8.3. Adjustment of cables and conductors ........................................................................ 63
4.8.4. Making of splices ........................................................................................................ 64
4.8.5. Complementary provisions for erection of twisted insulated cables .......................... 64
4.9. Testing – Measurements - Final inspection - commissioning ..................................................... 65
4.9.1. Testing and measurements ........................................................................................ 65
4.9.2. Inspection of lines - commissioning ............................................................................ 65
4.9.3. Testing and commissioning report ............................................................................. 65
5. Construction of LV Lines .......................................................................................... 66
5.1. General 66
5.3. Pegging 66
5.4. Tree lopping ................................................................................................................................ 67
5.5. Foundation Construction ............................................................................................................. 67
5.6. Earthing 67
5.6.1. What to be earthed ..................................................................................................... 67
5.6.2. Earthing resistance value ........................................................................................... 68
5.6.3. Earthing execution ...................................................................................................... 68
5.6.4. Measurement of resistance value .............................................................................. 68
5.7. Erection of poles ......................................................................................................................... 68
5.7.1. Transport, handling, and checking of poles – General............................................... 68
5.7.2. Concrete poles ........................................................................................................... 68
5.7.3. Wood poles ................................................................................................................. 69
5.7.4. Marking of poles ......................................................................................................... 69
5.8. Assembly of line fittings .............................................................................................................. 69
5.9. Pulling, tensioning and fixing of conductors and cables ............................................................. 69

5.9.1. Pulling and adjustment of cables and conductors ...................................................... 69
5.9.2. Complementary provisions for erection of twisted insulated cables .......................... 69
5.9.3. Complementary provisions for erection of wall mounted lines .................................. 70
5.10. Measurements – Final Inspection – Commissioning .................................................................. 70
5.10.1. Measurements ............................................................................................................ 70
5.10.2. Inspection of lines - commissioning ............................................................................ 70
JMED/4NT/3210/000/01/CM
Final Ed. 01-12-19
7
6. MV/LV underground cables ...................................................................................... 71
6.1. Cable characteristics ................................................................................................................... 71

6.1.1. Standards and recommendations .............................................................................. 71
6.1.2.1. MV power cables ...................................................................................... 71
6.1.2.2. LV power cables ....................................................................................... 71
6.1.3. External sheath, identification of cables and marking of conductors ......................... 72
6.1.4. Cable ends ................................................................................................................. 72
6.1.5. Transport and handling............................................................................................... 72
6.3. Laying of cables .......................................................................................................................... 73

6.3.1. Laying conditions ........................................................................................................ 73
6.3.2. Cable laying in the ground .......................................................................................... 73
6.3.3. Underground pipe network ......................................................................................... 73
6.3.4. Laying and pulling of cables ....................................................................................... 74
6.3.5. Bending radius ............................................................................................................ 74
6.3.6. Works crossing ........................................................................................................... 74
6.3.7. Exit from ground ......................................................................................................... 74
6.3.8. Execution of terminals and joints ................................................................................ 74
6.3.9. Warning slabs ............................................................................................................ 75
6.3.10. Warning tape .............................................................................................................. 75
6.3.11. Backfilling of trench .................................................................................................... 75
6.3.12. Warning sign devices on ground surface ................................................................... 75
6.3.13. Reinstatement of site .................................................................................................. 75
6.3.14. Identifying of cables .................................................................................................... 75
6.4. Earthing of cables ....................................................................................................................... 76
6.4.1. MV / LV armoured cables ........................................................................................... 76
6.4.2. MV twisted cables ....................................................................................................... 76
6.4.3. Earthing system installation ........................................................................................ 76
6.4.4. Earthing resistance value and measurement ............................................................. 76
6.5. Measurements and testing - final inspection - commissioning ................................................... 76
6.5.1. Measurements et testing ............................................................................................ 76
6.5.2. Final inspection and commissioning ........................................................................... 77
7. Transformers ............................................................................................................ 78
7.1. Standards and recommendations ............................................................................................... 78
JMED/4NT/3210/000/01/CM
Final Ed. 01-12-19
8
7.2. Design and manufacture ............................................................................................................. 78

7.2.1. Power transformers .................................................................................................... 78
7.2.2. Distribution transformers ............................................................................................ 95
7.2.3. Earthing trransformers ................................................................................................ 96
7.2.4. Instructions ................................................................................................................. 97
7.3. Technical characteristics ............................................................................................................. 97
7.3.1. Power transformers .................................................................................................... 97
7.3.2. Distribution Transformers ......................................................................................... 100
7.4. Transport and shipping conditions ............................................................................................ 100
7.4.1. Drying out ................................................................................................................. 100
7.4.2. Transport .................................................................................................................. 101
7.5. Installation ................................................................................................................................. 101
7.6. Earthing 101

7.6.1. Power Transformers ................................................................................................. 101
7.6.2. Distribution transformer ........................................................................................... 102
7.6.3. Earthing transformers ............................................................................................... 102
7.7. Measurements and inspections - Commissioning .................................................................... 102
7.7.1. Power transformers .................................................................................................. 102
7.7.2. Distribution Transformers ......................................................................................... 102
7.7.3. Earthing transformer ................................................................................................. 103
7.7.4. Testing and commissionning report ......................................................................... 103
8. Equipment for MT network ..................................................................................... 104
8.1. General 104
8.2. Standards and recommendations ............................................................................................. 104
8.3. Design and manufacture ........................................................................................................... 105

8.3.1. Autorecloser ............................................................................................................. 105
8.3.1.1. Utilisation ................................................................................................ 105
8.3.1.2. Characteristics........................................................................................ 105
8.3.2. Sectionaliser ............................................................................................................. 106
8.3.2.1. Utilisation ................................................................................................ 106
8.3.3. Air breaker isolating switch - Off load / On load (ABIS) ........................................... 107
8.3.3.1. Utilisation ................................................................................................ 107
8.3.3.3. Special Feature ...................................................................................... 109
8.3.4. Fuses and holders .................................................................................................... 109
8.3.4.1. Utilisation ................................................................................................ 109
JMED/4NT/3210/000/01/CM
Final Ed. 01-12-19
9

8.3.4.3. Protection of distribution transformers ................................................... 109
8.3.5. Surge arresters ......................................................................................................... 110
8.3.5.1. Utilisation ................................................................................................ 110
8.3.6. Ring Main Unit ......................................................................................................... 110
8.3.6.1. Definition ................................................................................................ 110
8.3.6.3. Technical Characteristics ....................................................................... 112
8.4. Installation ................................................................................................................................. 112
8.4.1. General ..................................................................................................................... 112
8.4.2. Installation particulars ............................................................................................... 112
8.5. Earthing of equipment and support structures .......................................................................... 113
8.6. Measurements and inspections after installation – commissioning .......................................... 113

8.6.1. Measurements and inspections ................................................................................ 113
9. Ground mounted distribution stations ..................................................................... 114
9.1. General 114

9.1.1. Typical underground LV distribution network ........................................................... 114
9.1.2. Composition of distribution stations .......................................................................... 114
9.2. Design, construction and manufacture ..................................................................................... 115
9.2.1. Masonry walls and cabins ........................................................................................ 115
9.2.1.1. General ................................................................................................... 115
9.2.1.2. Construction specifications .................................................................... 115
9.2.2. MV Distribution boards ............................................................................................. 116
9.2.3. Distribution transformers .......................................................................................... 116
9.2.4. LV equipment for distribution stations ...................................................................... 116
9.2.4.1. Standards and recommendations .......................................................... 116
9.2.4.2. LV Distribution Board ............................................................................. 117
9.2.4.3. Metallic cubicles for LV distribution boards ............................................ 118
9.2.4.4. LV circuit breakers ................................................................................. 118
9.2.5. MV/LV cable links ..................................................................................................... 119
9.2.5.1. Link between MV distribution board and MV/LV transformer ................ 119
9.2.5.2. LV links between Transformer and distribution board............................ 119
9.2.6. MV/LV metering ........................................................................................................ 120
9.2.7. Safety, interlocking and earthing .............................................................................. 121
9.3. Construction masonry walls and cabins .................................................................................... 121
9.4. Installation of electromechanical equipment ............................................................................. 121
JMED/4NT/3210/000/01/CM
Final Ed. 01-12-19
10
9.5. Installation of M/LV cables ........................................................................................................ 121
9.6. Earthing systems ....................................................................................................................... 122
9.7. Measurements, tests and inspections after installation – commissioning ................................ 123
9.7.1. Measurements, tests and inspections ...................................................................... 123
10. Pole mounted distribution stations ......................................................................... 125
10.1. General 125

10.1.1. Composition of distribution stations .......................................................................... 125
10.1.2. Standards and recommendations ............................................................................ 125
10.2. Design, construction and manufacture ..................................................................................... 125
10.2.1. Concrete pole ........................................................................................................... 125
10.2.2. Surge arresters ......................................................................................................... 126
10.2.3. MV fuses and holders ............................................................................................... 126
10.2.4. Supporting devices for transformers ........................................................................ 126
10.2.5. Distribution Transformer ........................................................................................... 126
10.2.6. Protection of LV feeders ........................................................................................... 126
10.2.6.1. General ................................................................................................... 126
10.2.6.2. LV Fuse Switch ...................................................................................... 126
10.2.7. MV/LV cable links ..................................................................................................... 127
10.3. Mechanical calculations ............................................................................................................ 128
10.4. Installation of overhead stations ............................................................................................... 128
10.5. Earthing systems ....................................................................................................................... 129
11. Service lines and cables......................................................................................... 131
11.1. General 131
11.2. Composition .............................................................................................................................. 131

11.2.1. Overhead service line from overhead network ......................................................... 131
11.2.2. Overhead to underground service line from overhead network ............................... 131
11.2.3. Branching installations from underground network .................................................. 132
11.3. Design and manufacture ........................................................................................................... 133
11.3.1. Reference to previous chapters ............................................................................... 133
11.3.2. Energy meters .......................................................................................................... 133
11.3.3. Circuit breakers for limitation and protection of customers’ installations ................. 133
11.4. Installation of service lines and cables ...................................................................................... 134
JMED/4NT/3210/000/01/CM
Final Ed. 01-12-19
11
11.5. Measurements, tests and verifications – commissioning.......................................................... 134

11.5.1. Measurements, tests and verifications ..................................................................... 134
11.5.2. Commissioning report............................................................................................... 134
12. HV/MV substation equipment - MV side ................................................................. 135
12.1. Outside structures and MV accessories ................................................................................... 135

12.1.2. Design and manufacture .......................................................................................... 135
12.1.2.1. Metallic framework ................................................................................. 135
12.1.2.2. Conductors, connectors and accessories .............................................. 136
12.2. Outdoor MV equipment ............................................................................................................. 137
12.2.2. Design and manufacture .......................................................................................... 138
12.2.2.1. General prescriptions (applying to all equipment).................................. 138
12.2.2.2. Circuit breakers ...................................................................................... 139
12.2.2.3. Air breaker isolating switches................................................................. 142
12.2.2.4. Current transformers .............................................................................. 142
12.2.2.5. Voltage transformers .............................................................................. 142
12.2.2.6. Surge arresters...................................................................................... 143
12.2.2.7. Earthing resistances ............................................................................... 143
12.2.2.8. Outdoor capacitor banks ........................................................................ 143
12.3. Indoor MV switchgear panels .................................................................................................... 150
12.3.1. General Requirement ............................................................................................... 150
12.3.2. Standards ................................................................................................................. 150
12.3.3. General arrangements for design and construction ................................................. 150
12.3.3.1. Introduction............................................................................................. 150
12.3.3.2. Panels .................................................................................................... 151
12.3.3.3. Earthing of metal parts ........................................................................... 152
12.3.3.4. Circuit Earthing ....................................................................................... 152
12.3.3.5. Busbar Earthing ..................................................................................... 153
12.3.3.6. Isolating facilities .................................................................................... 153
12.3.3.7. Degree of protection ............................................................................... 153
12.3.3.8. Cable Tests ............................................................................................ 153
12.3.3.9. Circuit Breaker Test ............................................................................... 154
12.3.3.10. Circuit Breaker........................................................................................ 154
12.3.3.11. Tripping and closing ............................................................................... 155
12.3.3.12. Busbars .................................................................................................. 155
12.3.3.13. Cable termination facilities ..................................................................... 156
12.3.3.14. Current transformers .............................................................................. 156
JMED/4NT/3210/000/01/CM
Final Ed. 01-12-19
12
12.3.3.15. Voltage transformers .............................................................................. 156

12.3.3.16. Low Voltage Auxiliaries .......................................................................... 157
12.3.3.17. Circuit Labels.......................................................................................... 158
12.3.3.18. Paint 158
12.3.3.19. Ratings Plate .......................................................................................... 158
12.3.4. Particular Panel Arrangements and Electrical Characteristics. ................................ 158
12.3.4.1. Feeder Panel .......................................................................................... 158
12.3.4.2. Generation Panel ................................................................................... 160
12.3.4.3. Capacitor Bank Panel ............................................................................ 160
12.3.4.4. Incoming Transformer Panel .................................................................. 160
12.3.4.5. Outgoing Transformers Panel ................................................................ 161
12.3.4.6. Auxiliary Transformers Panel ................................................................. 162
12.3.4.7. Bus Coupler Panel. ................................................................................ 162
12.3.4.8. Inter Switchboard Coupler Panel ........................................................... 163
12.3.4.9. Off-load Isolating Link Panel .................................................................. 164
12.3.5. Protection Relays ..................................................................................................... 164
12.3.5.1. General ................................................................................................... 164
12.3.5.2. Static definite time, non directional, over-current and earth fault
relay........................................................................................................ 164
12.3.5.3. Static inverse/definite time, non directional, over-current and
earth fault relay....................................................................................... 165
12.3.5.4. Static definite time, directional, over-current and earth fault relay ......... 166
12.3.5.5. Static tank leakage relay ........................................................................ 166
12.3.5.6. Master tripping relay ............................................................................... 167
12.3.5.7. Static six pole auxiliary relay .................................................................. 167
12.4. Installation of equipment ........................................................................................................... 168
12.4.1. Assembly of framework and installation of equipment ............................................. 168
12.4.2. Installation of MV conductors ................................................................................... 168
12.4.3. Installation of electromechanical equipment ............................................................ 168
12.4.4. Identification and painting ......................................................................................... 168
12.5. Earthing grid .............................................................................................................................. 169
12.5.1. Standard and recommendations .............................................................................. 169
12.5.2. General design ......................................................................................................... 169
12.5.3. Composition .............................................................................................................. 169
12.5.3.1. Buried grid (base network) ..................................................................... 170
12.5.3.2. Internal and external loops (protective network) .................................... 170
12.5.3.3. Limiting of the step voltage .................................................................... 171
12.5.3.4. Particular location of earth electrodes .................................................... 171
12.5.4. Connections .............................................................................................................. 171
12.5.5. Measuring terminal ................................................................................................... 171
JMED/4NT/3210/000/01/CM
Final Ed. 01-12-19
13
12.5.6. Fencing ..................................................................................................................... 171

13. Power and control cables ....................................................................................... 173
13.1. General 173
13.2. Standards and recommendations ............................................................................................. 173
13.3. Functional specifications ........................................................................................................... 173

13.3.1. Working Conditions .................................................................................................. 173
13.3.2. Permanent current .................................................................................................... 173
13.3.3. Short-circuit withstand of power cables .................................................................... 174
13.3.4. Volt drop ................................................................................................................... 174
13.3.5. Nominal voltage ........................................................................................................ 174
13.3.6. Minimum cross-section of conductors ...................................................................... 174
13.3.7. Standardisation ......................................................................................................... 174
13.4. Design and manufacture .......................................................................................................... 175
13.4.1. MV Power cables ...................................................................................................... 175
13.4.2. LV Power cables ....................................................................................................... 175
13.4.3. Control and Sign cables ........................................................................................... 175
13.4.4. Outside cover, cable identification and conductor marking ...................................... 175
13.4.5. Transport and handling............................................................................................. 176
13.5. Laying and connection of cables. .............................................................................................. 176
13.5.1. Laying of cables ........................................................................................................ 176
13.5.1.1. Laying conditions ................................................................................... 176
13.5.1.2. Laying in the ground ............................................................................... 176
13.5.1.3. Concrete conduit .................................................................................... 177
13.5.1.4. Underground pipe network ..................................................................... 177
13.5.1.5. Cable trays ............................................................................................. 177
13.5.2. Connection of cables ................................................................................................ 178
13.5.2.1. Terminals for MV cables ....................................................................... 178
13.5.2.2. Terminals for LV cables ......................................................................... 178
13.5.2.3. Watertightness and sealing .................................................................... 178
13.5.3. Cables exit from ground - wall crossing ................................................................... 178
13.5.4. Identifying of cables and conductors ........................................................................ 178
13.6. Inspection and testing after installation- commissioning ........................................................... 179
13.6.1. Inspection and testing after installation .................................................................... 179
JMED/4NT/3210/000/01/CM
Final Ed. 01-12-19
14
14. Tests and inspections during and after installation ................................................. 180
14.1. General 180
14.2. Tests and inspections during installation .................................................................................. 180
14.3. Tests and inspections before commissioning ........................................................................... 180
14.4. Inspection after commissioning ................................................................................................. 181
14.5. Particular specifications ............................................................................................................ 181

14.5.1. Measurement of insulating resistances .................................................................... 181
14.5.2. Dielectric test of oils .................................................................................................. 182
15. Civil engineering works associated in the construction of networks and

stations ................................................................................................................... 183
15.1. General 183
15.2. Construction materials in general ............................................................................................. 183

15.2.1. Standards ................................................................................................................. 183
15.2.2. Quality and workmanship ......................................................................................... 183
15.3. Ground preparation ................................................................................................................... 183
15.3.1. General levelling and clearing .................................................................................. 183
15.3.1.1. General ................................................................................................... 183
15.3.1.2. Compaction ............................................................................................ 184
15.3.1.3. Shaping of slopes ................................................................................... 184
15.3.2. Demolition ................................................................................................................. 184
15.4. General technical specifications for civil engineering works ..................................................... 185
15.4.1. Different types of works ............................................................................................ 185
15.4.2. Calculation and working plans .................................................................................. 185
15.4.3. Nature of ground ....................................................................................................... 186
15.4.4. Measurement of water table depth ........................................................................... 186
15.4.5. Types of foundation .................................................................................................. 186
15.4.6. Site facilities .............................................................................................................. 187
15.4.7. Setting out of foundations ......................................................................................... 187
15.4.8. Earthworks ................................................................................................................ 187
15.4.8.1. Work conditions ...................................................................................... 187
15.4.8.2. Excavation works ................................................................................... 188
15.4.8.3. Backfilling and compaction ..................................................................... 188
15.4.9. Concrete ................................................................................................................... 189
15.4.9.1. General ................................................................................................... 189
15.4.9.2. Materials used in concrete - quality criteria ............................................ 189
15.4.9.3. Concrete mix proportions ....................................................................... 193
15.4.9.4. Preparation and placing of concrete ...................................................... 194
JMED/4NT/3210/000/01/CM
Final Ed. 01-12-19
15
15.4.9.5. Inadequate concrete quality - Remedial action to be taken ................... 195

15.4.10. Formwork 196
15.4.10.1. General ................................................................................................... 196
15.4.10.2. Materials for formwork ............................................................................ 196
15.4.10.3. Preparation and stripping of formwork ................................................... 196
15.4.11. Reinforcement .......................................................................................................... 197
15.4.11.1. General ................................................................................................... 197
15.4.11.2. Reinforcement materials ........................................................................ 197
15.4.11.3. Fixing reinforcement ............................................................................... 198
15.4.12. Protection of constructions in contact with the soil ................................................... 199
15.4.13. Pocket bases ............................................................................................................ 199
15.4.13.1. Implantation ............................................................................................ 199
15.4.13.2. Construction of pocket bases ................................................................. 199
15.4.13.3. Filling and sealing .................................................................................. 200
15.4.13.4. Placing and sealing of metallic accessories ........................................... 200
15.4.14. Diamond shapes ....................................................................................................... 200
15.4.15. Foundation for power transformers .......................................................................... 201
15.4.15.1. General ................................................................................................... 201
15.4.15.2. Longitudinal concrete beam ................................................................... 201
15.4.15.3. Oil retaining structure ............................................................................. 201
15.4.15.4. Firewall ................................................................................................... 202
15.5. General site landscaping and services ..................................................................................... 202
15.5.1. Landscaping ............................................................................................................. 202
15.5.2. Sewer network .......................................................................................................... 202
15.5.2.1. General ................................................................................................... 202
15.5.2.2. Earthworks ............................................................................................. 202
15.5.2.3. Pipes and accessories, couplings, bends, tees, etc. ............................. 203
15.5.2.4. Inspection chambers .............................................................................. 203
15.5.3. Drainage network ..................................................................................................... 204
15.5.4. Cable ducts ............................................................................................................... 204
15.5.4.1. Purpose .................................................................................................. 204
15.5.4.2. General ................................................................................................... 204
15.5.4.3. Description and placing / construction ................................................... 205
15.5.5. Fencing works .......................................................................................................... 206
15.5.5.1. General ................................................................................................... 206
15.5.5.2. Description of materials and installation ................................................ 206
15.6. Complementary specifications for the construction of masonry walls and cabins for
LV/MV distribution stations........................................................................................................ 207
15.6.1. Preliminary note ........................................................................................................ 207
15.6.2. Calculation notes and working plans ........................................................................ 207
JMED/4NT/3210/000/01/CM
Final Ed. 01-12-19
16
15.6.3. Walls ......................................................................................................................... 208

15.6.4. Wall finishes ............................................................................................................. 208
15.6.5. Paint.......................................................................................................................... 209
15.6.6. Roof slab .................................................................................................................. 210
JMED/4NT/3210/000/01/CM
Final Ed. 01-12-19
17
Index of Tables
Table 1.4.1-1 : Insulation levels .......................................................................................................... 8

Table 1.5.1-1 : Short-circuit levels on MV network ........................................................................... 9
Table 1.5.1-2 : Short-circuit levels on MV network ........................................................................... 9
Table 3.1.3-1 : Nomenclature and characteristics of supports .......................................................... 36
Table 3.2.2-1 : Bare conductors – Technical characteristics ............................................................. 37
Table 3.3.3-1 : MV insulated twisted cable – Technical characteristics ........................................... 39
Table 3.5.3-1 : LV insulated twisted cable – Technical characteristics ............................................ 42
Table 7.3.1-1 : Power transformers– Technical characteristics ........................................................ 99
Table 8.3.4-1 : Distribution transformer protection ........................................................................ 110
Table 9.2.4-1 : Circuit breaker - Nominal rating for protection ...................................................... 119
Table 9.2.5-1 : LV links between transformer and distribution board ............................................ 119
Table 9.2.7-1 : MV/LV distribution stations - Minimal earthing resistance values ........................ 122
Table 10.2.7-1 : Links between transformer and LV protection devices ........................................ 128
Table 12.3.3-1 : Metalclad switchgear panel maximum width ....................................................... 151
Table 14.5.1-1 : Measurement of insulating resistances – Equipment to be used. ......................... 181
Table 14.5.1-2 : Measurement of insulating resistances – Minimal values ................................... 181
Table 15.4.9-1 : Composition and quality criteria for cements ....................................................... 190
JMED/4NT/3210/000/01/CM
Final Ed. 01-12-19
18
Index of Appendices
A.1.8/1 : Distribution System Protection - Figures and Diagrams

A.2.7/1 : Pole Load Calculation - Calculation Method
A.2.7/2 : Program POLO (Pole‟s head Load) - Users Manual
A.2.8/1 : Program AMP (Ampacity) - Users Manual
A.2.9/1 : Program SACHA (Sagging Chart) - Users Manual
A.3.1/1 : Reinforced Concrete Poles - Specifications and Recommendations regarding
Manufacture
A.3.1/2 : Wooden Poles - Specifications and Recommendations regarding Manufacture
A.3.4/1 : MV Insulated Cable Accessories - Technology
A.3.7/1 : Cross Arms and Gantries of the Controlled Distortion Type - Documentation
A.3.7/2 : Insulators - Detailed Technical Data
A.4.2/1 : Program FOCAL (Foundation Calculation) - Users Manual
JMED/4NT/3210/000/01/CM
Final Ed. 01-12-19
1
1. Basic data for design and construction of MV/LV networks
1.1. General design guidelines

1.1.1. Maps, drawings and documents
Generally, maps, drawings and documents required for the design of networks consist
of the following (however, additional information that may be required for specific
works and equipment will be pointed out later in this manual):
a) MV underground cables :
- cable routes on maps of scales 1/2500,
- layout drawings on a 1/200 scale, showing the nature of soil surface, protective
sleeves, cable joints, earthing of other ducting systems, and sections on a 1/20
scale,
- detailed drawings of specific works such as crossing of roads, rivulets, drains,
etc.
b) MV overhead lines :
- line routes on maps of scale 1/25000,
- spot level details and their representation in the form of longitudinal line
profiles (including location of supports), and pegging schedules,
- as built network drawings, showing location of poles, equipment and earthing
points,
- construction drawings for foundations ( for typical and specific works ),
- construction drawings for layout of equipment and fittings for suspension,
anchorage and protection of conductors ( for typical and specific works ),
- construction drawings for earthing system (for typical and specific works ).
c) LV overhead lines :
- same as for MV overhead lines, but without 1/25000 line route maps; spot level
details are represented in the form of longitudinal line profiles and pegging
schedules only for specific cases.
d) Distribution transformers – Electromechanical equipment :
- construction drawings for frames for pole mounted distribution transformers
and other overhead fittings,
- arrangements of pole-mounted transformer, ground-mounted transformer and
electromechanical equipment ( typical drawings ),
- typical drawings of metallic enclosures together with installation instructions,
JMED/4NT/3210/000/01/CM
Final Ed. 01-12-19
2
- civil engineering drawings of concrete enclosures or bases on a 1/20 scale,

- detailed layout drawings for distribution transformers or electromechanical
equipment ,
- electrical diagrams for each type of transformer mounting or electromechanical
equipment :
 single line diagram for power network,
 type and characteristics of equipment,
 schematic diagrams.
e) HV/MV Substations
- spot level drawings,
- layout of equipment and earthing network,
- construction drawings for civil engineering works,
- drawings of metallic enclosures together with installation instructions,
- electrical wiring diagrams,
- schematic diagrams for power and control circuits,
- bill of quantities.
f) In general :
- all necessary design calculations,
- calculations on selectivity of protection gears,
- construction drawings for earthing system ( for typical and specific works ),
- construction drawings for civil engineering works, including form work and
steel work,
- testing and commissioning procedures for new, modified or rehabilitated
installations,
- assembly or maintenance instructions for the installed equipment.
1.1.2. Network layout
The layout of fixed structures shall be according to local norms for public utility works.
Moreover, the following are to be satisfied:
 structures erected must be fit for the equipment to be installed,
 the layout of network components must not create indirect inconveniences to
existing installations ;
JMED/4NT/3210/000/01/CM
Final Ed. 01-12-19
3
 the supported equipment shall not be subject to abnormal exposure, such as damage
due to traffic for example.
When site conditions for erection works are not favourable or when there is a risk of
indirect inconveniences, all reasonable additional works deemed necessary to prevent
troubles at a later stage shall be undertaken.
1.2. Regulations and norms

In this manual, design, supply of materials and works shall be generally in accordance
with IEC (International Electrotechnical Commission) regulations and publications,
except where stated otherwise, such as:
 Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers (IEEE)
 British standard specifications (BS)
 American National Standard Institute (ANSI)
 South African Standards (SABS)
 French norms edited by the AFNOR (NF)
 German norms (VDE)
 Belgian norms (NBN)
1.3. Local operating conditions

1.3.1. Climatic and environmental conditions
Generally, the saline atmosphere, tropical climate (hot and humid) and cyclonic
conditions must be considered.
1.3.1.1. Temperature and altitude
The following conditions of temperature and altitude must be considered:

 Maximum temperature: 40°C
 Minimum temperature : 5°C
 Daily mean temperature: 30°C
 Annual mean temperature: 20°C
 Maximum sunshine exposure: 1100 W/m²
 Maximum soil temperature at 1 m depth : 28°C
 Altitude: 0 to 550 m
1.3.1.2. Humidity
The effect of humid conditions on enclosed equipment is of concern here.
JMED/4NT/3210/000/01/CM
Final Ed. 01-12-19
4
The following values are assumed:

 the mean relative humidity, measured over a 24 hour period, does not exceed 95%,
 the mean relative humidity, measured over a one-month period, does not exceed
90%.
It is understood that daily temperature fluctuations, as well as the rapid changes in
temperature resulting from sudden and heavy rainfall, may give rise to a relative
humidity of 100 % and to condensation inside enclosures at times.
1.3.1.3. Wind
Wind conditions are critical in the design of overhead lines and have a serious impact
on outdoor network structures.
The following wind speeds shall be considered:
 0,55 m/sec minimum (affects the thermal rating of bare conductors),
 70,8 m/sec maximum (affects the mechanical strength of structures).
1.3.1.4. Soil thermal resistivity
The following mean values, expressed in K.m/W, shall be considered for the following
types of soil:
- Marshy : 0,4
- Very humid : 0,4 à 0,5
- Humid sandy : 0,5 à 0,7
- Chalky – clayey ; from normal to dry : 0,7 à 1,2
- Very dry : 1,5
- Dry sandy : 2 à 2,5
- Ash :3
A general mean value would be 1.5
1.3.1.5. Thunder – Isokeronic level
The isokeronic level is weak (< 2)

1.3.1.6. Atmospheric pollution
Based on IEC 71-2 - insulation co-ordination, for saline atmosphere and heavy
pollution, a mean value of 4 to 5 cm/kV for creepage distance shall be considered.
1.3.2. Factors affecting the choice of electrical equipment
1.3.2.1. Effect of temperature
The operating conditions are according to IEC; however, precautions must be taken
because of peak temperatures, which may even be worsened by sunshine exposure.
JMED/4NT/3210/000/01/CM
Final Ed. 01-12-19
5
Outdoor equipment
The safety factor to be taken in selecting the continuous current carrying capacity for
each equipment shall be minimum 10 % with regard to the maximum expected current.
Indoor equipment
In case of installation, which does not allow sufficient natural ventilation, a reduction in
the rise of temperature of oil and windings of at least 10°C, as compared to IEC, must
be catered for.
Specific case of pole-mounted MV/LV transformers
Due to their mode of installation, these transformers are subject to sunshine exposure.
Combined to their poor natural cooling capacity, it results in a significant rise in
temperature.
For these reasons, the rise in temperature must be reduced by 10oC, as compared to IEC
regulation.
1.3.2.2. Tropical outdoor use
a) Protection against humidity and condensation

Electrical equipment shall be protected against risk of condensation:
 by natural or forced cooling;
 by heating of air if necessary.
Each heater shall consist of a resistor insulated for 220 Volts 50 Hz, controlled by
thermostat. The panels‟ aeration louvres are internally lined by an easily removable
frame fitted with mosquito screen (wire mesh of maximum size 0.75 mm² and of
plastified brass).
If the equipment dimensions do not allow the use of louvres (such as small cubicle),
the latter must be replaced by a set of small elbow pipes consisting of a nickel-
plated brass cable gland of minimum internal diameter of 15 mm and fitted with
wire mesh as above.
b) Protection against corrosion
The electrical equipment shall be appropriately protected so as to avoid corrosion of
parts. Such protection, which includes protection against electrolytic corrosion,
applies to the frame as well as the screws, bars, conducting parts, connections and
all components of the equipment: contacts, springs, etc… The following
precautions must above all be observed.
 Machined metal parts
Machined parts (screw-cutting, cutting, injection moulding, etc) must be given
the appropriate treatment against corrosion.
The following electrolytic protections apply to corresponding metals:
JMED/4NT/3210/000/01/CM
Final Ed. 01-12-19
6
- steel: cadmiated, bichromated.

- brass : nickel-plating
- aluminium and aluminium alloy ( except conductors ) : anodic oxidation
- zinc alloy ( zamak ) : cadmiated, bichromated
- bronze (except nozzles and similar parts, which are to be greased) : nickel -
plated
 Metals that do not require treatment
The following metals may be left untreated:
- gold;
- platinium;
- silver;
- nickel-silver;
- stainless steel 18/8.
 Protection of metal parts
- Painting
Non- machined steel parts to be painted must be free from grease before a
layer of primer is applied. The final coating must be an appropriate paint
oven-dry.
All surfaces, which will be ultimately impossible or difficult to maintain by
painting, must be in stainless steel, brass, bronze or galvanised steel.
- Galvanising
Galvanising is to be carried out according to BS 729.
- Moving metal parts
The same chemical compound to be used in the corrosion protection shall be
used as lubricant.
Means should be provided to lubricate bearings and other movable parts.
The greasing points should be conspicuous and of easy access.
Entry of rainwater into the mechanisms through bearings, line shafts, bolts,
etc, shall be prevented by stuffing.
- Other means
In general, non-accessible parts of the equipment (near the sides of panels,
tanks, etc) must be adequately protected against corrosion.
JMED/4NT/3210/000/01/CM
Final Ed. 01-12-19
7
No stagnating water at any place must be allowed.

- Screw
Steel screws must be cadmiated-bichromated and brass screws must be
nickel-plated.
- Springs
All springs must be of stainless steel grade 18/8.
c) Electrolytic corrosion
Bimetallic material shall be used for normally conducting parts and even for parts
which may accidentally conduct electricity.
d) Choice of solid insulators
Solid insulators shall be non hygroscopic, stable and of homogeneous structure
(porcelain, glass, cast epoxy resins, etc). Materials with laminated structure are
prohibited.
e) Winding Protection
After drying in oven, each winding is to be impregnated with synthetic varnish
which has been baked in furnace and whose characteristics are unaltered in the
range of operating temperatures, whatever be the fluctuation in the hygrometric
degree.
f) Protection against insects, small animals, etc.
All equipment must be protected against short-circuits which may be due to
animals, birds, insects or fallen objects. Typically, all openings in panels must be
fitted with mosquito screen with small wire mesh of plastified brass or nylon.
Cable entries must necessarily be fitted with glands, cable boxes or equivalent.
Underground cables must have an outer sheath, which repels rodents, termites and
other harmful animals.
1.4. Insulation level of MV/LV network

1.4.1. MV network
1.4.1.1. Outdoor and indoor insulation level ( in air )
All equipment (transformers, panels, ABIS, capacitors, etc….) which is to be operated

at 6.6 kV or 22 kV must have an insulation level of 24 kV.
The table below gives values, which shall apply:
JMED/4NT/3210/000/01/CM
Final Ed. 01-12-19
8
Rated voltage Impulse level Short duration withstand

voltage at industrial
frequency
kV eff kV peak kV eff
24 125 50
Table 1.4.1-1 : Insulation levels
1.4.1.2. Clearance between live parts
The minimum clearance to be observed at medium voltage between live parts (i.e.
between phases), between live parts and earth, and between live parts of the same phase
(e.g. when they are apart in an open position of an equipment) may be derived from the
following formula:
d  50  6,75(U N  1)
d = minimum clearance in mm
UN = system rated voltage in kV, rounded up to the nearest unity
1.4.1.3. Insulation co-ordination
Insulation co-ordination must be established by the use of surge arresters of non-linear

resistor type.
The latter must be located at least at the following points of the MV network:
 as close as possible to the MV bushings of pole-mounted transformers,
 upstream pole mounted reclosers and sectionnalisers,
 at overhead line - underground cable transition, namely in the following cases :
- incoming of overhead lines at substations,
- supply of a ground-mounted transformer by an underground cable.
The surge arresters should be selected at a nominal voltage sufficiently high to
resist over voltages at 50 Hz produced in the network.
1.4.2. LV network
1.4.3. Insulation level for LV equipment
The maximum working voltage shall be 440 V; the corresponding dielectric strength is
2500 V for one minute.
JMED/4NT/3210/000/01/CM
Final Ed. 01-12-19
9
1.5. Short circuit level of MV/LV network

1.5.1. MV network
The following table applies for underground and insulated overhead networks and their
corresponding MV/LV distribution transformers.
Nominal voltage (kV eff.) 6.6 & 22

Insulation voltage (kV eff.) 24
Maximum service voltage Um (kV eff.) 24
Short duration current (kA eff -1 sec) 12.5
Nominal peak current permissible (kA peak) 31.5
Short-circuit breaking capacity ( circuit breakers, (kA eff.) 12.5
fuses ) at Um
Short-circuit making capacity ( ring insulating (kA peak) 31.5
switch, earth switch ) at Um
Table 1.5.1-1 : Short-circuit levels on MV network
The following table applies for bare overhead line, pole-mounted, or ground-mounted
transformers supplied from bare overhead network, and isolating switches for overhead
lines:
Nominal voltage (kV eff.) 6.6 & 22

Insulation voltage (kV eff.) 24
Maximum service voltage Um (kV eff.) 24
Short duration current (kA eff -1 sec) 12.5
Nominal peak current permissible (kA peak) 31.5
Short-circuit breaking capacity ( circuit breakers, (kA eff.) 12.5
fuses) at Um
Short-circuit making capacity ( ring isolating (kA peak) 31.5
switch, earth switch ) at Um
Table 1.5.1-2 : Short-circuit levels on MV network
N.B.: The figures indicated in the above two tables may be modified by the
prescriptions in the following chapters.
1.5.2. LV equipment
a) Outgoing LV feeders
The characteristics depend on the nominal rating of the transformer; nominal values
are given in the related chapters.
JMED/4NT/3210/000/01/CM
Final Ed. 01-12-19
10
b) Consumer connections
The Utility installations located beyond the energy meter must withstand for 0.5
second thermal effects of short-circuit of minimum value of 5 kA eff.
1.6. System earthing of MV/LV network

1.6.1. MV network
The neutral point of 22 kV networks must be earthed via a impedance to limit the zero
sequence current to 300 A in overhead and mixed networks.
1.6.2. LV network
The LV distribution is either in 4-wire (3 phases + 1 neutral) or 2-wire (1 phase + 1

neutral).
The earthing system of the LV network must be according to the TT system.
The neutral point on the LV side of the MV/LV transformers is always directly earth,
but separated from the protective earthing (MV and LV frame earthing).
Earthing on LV consumer side is carried out beyond the consumer‟s distribution box,
without a link to the supplier‟s neutral.
1.7. Basic data pertaining to MV/LV lines

1.7.1. Every Day Stress (EDS)
Recommended values for conductors generally of use for line construction and for the
spans stated below are given in section 2.7.2.
1.7.2. Spans under construction
The following minimum, mean and maximum spans are considered:

- MV bare line 50 – 60 – 70 m
- MV bare line + LV bare or torsade 35 – 40 – 45 m
- MV torsade 35 – 40 – 45 m
- MV + LV torsade 35 – 40 – 45 m
- LV bare or torsade 35 – 40 – 45 m
1.7.3. Data for calculating maximum sag of conductors
- Cable temperature 550C

- Air temperature 350C
- No wind.
JMED/4NT/3210/000/01/CM
Final Ed. 01-12-19
11
1.7.4. Clearance between phases
The clearance between phases corresponds to the distance between holes drilled in
wooden or metallic cross arms for supporting the conductors (see section 3.7.1.1 and
“Standard Drawings”: Section9 – Folios 10 to 12 & 20 to 24).
1.7.5. Data for calculating load due to wind
The data applicable for the calculation of maximum load on conductors and on poles
due to wind are given in section 2.7.2.
1.7.6. Safety factors
The safety factors applicable for poles, stays and foundations are also given in section
2.7.2.
1.7.7. Safety clearances
Safety clearances are dealt with in section 2.4.5.
1.8. Distribution System protection

1.8.1. Requirements for an Outstanding Protective System
1.8.1.1. Main Protection
All faults that may occur in an electrical distribution system should be detected and
removed automatically by protective devices, generally MV fuses or protection relays.
Faults must be cleared:
 as fast as possible, to avoid thermal and dynamic constraints to the equipment,
 selectively, to remove as minimum consumers as possible.
1.8.1.2. Back-up Protection
It must be checked that a back-up protection function is always ensured by some other
protective device should the main protection relay fail to operate or the circuit-breaker
fail to trip.
Refer to the sketch on Fig.1.8.1.2/1 in Appendix A.1.8/1.
1.8.1.3. Common Requirements for the Main and Back-up Protection Functions
Sensitivity
Both the main and back-up protection relays must be set sensitive enough to pick-up
during a fault. This criterion has to be checked for the minimum expected short-
circuit level.
For two-or three-phase faults, the short circuit current will generally be large enough
for the relays to start, but it should be checked to ensure that:
 the starting level is sufficiently high to avoid pick-up during temporary overload of
the feeder,
JMED/4NT/3210/000/01/CM
Final Ed. 01-12-19
12
 the pick-up/drop-off ratio is as close as possible to 1, to ensure that the relay will
reset after a start operation (the relay could remain energised by the presence of the
load current after clearance by a downstream protection relay).
Single-phase to ground faults (1phF) are generally reduced in distribution systems
(see hereafter): therefore the setting of earth faults relays must be carefully examined so
as to remain sensitive enough at these low current levels. This is normally possible
since earth fault relays may be set regardless of the load current, however, high enough
to avoid miss-operation from the CT's spill currents (magnetising current unbalance,..).
In case of very low earth fault currents (e.g. broken conductor fallen on the ground) the
relay pick-up level might not be reached. The fault must then be detected by a sensitive
earth relay (trip or alarm) usually placed in the connection to the earth of the neutral
bushing of the supply transformer.
Selectivity
The selectivity plan is generally examined separately for 1 ph and 3 ph faults.
When dealing with inverse time relays (IDMTL types, with normal, very or extremely
inverse characteristic) the selective operation has to be ensured up to the maximum
expected short-circuit current flowing through the relays. The diagram D.1.8/1, in
Appendix A.1.8/1, shows that relays 1 and 2 are selective at the current level of 1000A
but not any more at 5000A.
The selectivity interval between two relays is generally selected as follows:
 300 to 400 ms in case of electromechanical relays (depending on relay overshoot
time and breaker opening time),
 200 to 300 ms in case of static (analogic) relays,
 200 to 250 ms in case of digital relays.
Selectivity between fuses is normally possible if the largest fuse has a rated current of
at least 2 times the rating of the lowest (a 100A fuse will be selective with a 50A fuse,
but certainly not with a 63A fuse). This simplified rule applies only to fuses pertaining
to the same curve category (e.g. both of the HRC, "T" type). If the fuses are of
different category curve, selectivity will be ensured by checking that the pre-arcing
value I2t of the fuse with the highest rating is always larger than the total arcing I2t
value of the fuse with the lower rating.
Selectivity between fuses and over-current relays is generally considered effective
when the minimum relay operating time tR satisfies the following formula:
TR = 0.4xtF + 0.15 sec, with a minimum of 200…250 ms.
Where tF is the nominal operating time of the fuse.
The available standard relay curves (normal, very and extremely inverse time types)
show that the extremely inverse time curve gives the best match with the fuse
characteristic.
JMED/4NT/3210/000/01/CM
Final Ed. 01-12-19
13
In the diagram D.1.8/2 in Appendix A.8.1/1, the operating characteristics of a standard

inverse time relay (curve 16) and of an extremely inverse time relay (curve 15) have
been plotted, with the same values of current and time settings. It clearly appears that
the extremely inverse time relay operates faster than the standard relay for all current
levels. Although remaining selective with the fuse characteristic as shown by curve 3.
It is generally accepted that, in distribution systems, selectivity might not be ensured in
case of fault clearance through a back-up protection relay.
1.8.1.4. Special Topics related to Selectivity
Selectivity associated to relays protecting the power transformers

The over-current protection relay protecting the HV side of a step-down transformer
should include an instantaneous unit (or a shortly time-delayed unit) for fast clearance
of the faults on the HV side. The setting rules can be summarised as follows:
 the instantaneous unit must be insensitive to the maximum short-circuit current for a
fault at the secondary side,
 the instantaneous unit must operate on the minimum short-circuit current for a fault
at the primary side,
 the IDMTL unit must operate on the minimum short-circuit current for a fault on
the secondary side.
~ Note: the instantaneous element must not be set too low not too fast in order to avoid
operation on the inrush current during magnetisation of the transformer.
The diagram D. 1.8/1, in Appendix A.1.8/1, shows a transformer equipped with a
normal inverse time delayed relay, supplying a feeder protected by a LV fuse (curve 3
on the diagram). The maximum 3ph fault currents on the LV amounts to 2500A (LV
side), and on the HV side to 2000A.
Curve 4 shows a typical relay setting for the transformer without the instantaneous
element: the relay trip time for a HV fault amounts to 200 ms, whilst it would operate
in 50 ms (curve 5) with the use of an instantaneous unit.
Parallel operation of feeders or of power transformers

When several injection transformers are operating in parallel, the fault current is shared
between the units.
In case of feeder fault, whilst the faulty feeder carries the total fault current, the
supplying transformers carry only part of it: this sharing of the currents must be taken
into account when setting the relays. It must then be checked that selectivity is still
ensured when the system is operated with one unit only.
This is illustrated in the sketches of Diagrams D.1.8/2 & 3, in Appendix A.1.8/1,
showing typical transformer relay trip time curves for two different schemes (two or
one transformer in service):
JMED/4NT/3210/000/01/CM
Final Ed. 01-12-19
14
 Curves 8 and 9 (Diagrams D. 8.1/3) refer to normal system operation, i.e. with 2
transformers in service. In our example, the total feeder fault current is 370 A (trip
time = 70 ms), i.e. each transformer carries 185 A (trip time = 430 ms). The
selectivity interval amounts to 360 ms, which is acceptable.
 Curves 6 and 7 instead (Diagrams D.1.8/2) refer to operation with one transformer
only. The total fault current is 200A, for both the feeder (trip time = 240 ms) and
for the transformer (trip time = 370 ms). The selectivity interval is now reduced to
130 ms and is no more acceptable.
Filtering effects of the power transformers on the zero-sequence currents

Considering that the MV/400V distribution transformers are of the delta/wye vector
group, all phase to ground faults on the 400V side are transformed into two-phase faults
on the MV side, without earth current. This also means that the ground relays on the
MV system may be set irrespectively of the ground faults on the 400V system.
1.8.2. System Grounding review of MV Distribution Systems
The policy of single-phase to ground short-circuit current limitation in distribution

system is a compromise:
 it should be large enough to limit the over voltages on the healthy phases,
 it should be large enough to allow the main and back-up protection relays to
operate,
 it should be lower than the short-circuit capability of the weakest equipment
encountered in fault current path (MV cable screens, amongst other).
A good practice in MV distribution systems, is to limit the ground fault current to
300…. 1000A, the latter value being used in large cable networks.
1.8.2.1. Generation of the Zero-sequence Current
As a rule of thumb, the single phase to ground fault currents should be generated at the
same place where the three-phase fault currents are generated, i.e. at the injection
transformers stations and generating plants.
In case of voluntary limitation of the 1 ph faults, care must be taken to ensure that the
amount of zero sequence injectors will not give an unreasonable rise of the fault
current. It is therefore highly recommended that the earth current be generated at
specific places of the MV transmission system, so as to control its magnitude.
This place is generally the HV/MV injection transformers.
All remaining network transformers (including possible generation step-up units)
should have the MV neutral free from earth.
Refer to the Fig. 1.8.2.1/1 in Appendix A.1.8/1.
JMED/4NT/3210/000/01/CM
Final Ed. 01-12-19
15
1.8.2.2. Impact of the MV Grounding on the HV System
The upstream system must present a negligible impedance in the zero sequence path
compared to the impedance of the limitation device, to ensure that the amplitude of the
earth current will be governed only by the limiting device (the grounding resistor).
This can be achieved through several schemes:
 use of a delta winding in the injection transformer (Yynd or Dyn vector group),
 use of a grounding transformer associated to each injection transformer, or
connected to the MV busses,
 use of a direct connection to the ground of the HV neutral of the injection
transformer (Ynyn vector group),
 if the limiting device has a high impedance, a Yyn vector group is also acceptable if
the transformer is of the core type (the most frequent type), the value of the zero
sequence impedance of the transformer being approximately 10 times the positive
sequence impedance.
The disadvantage of the third scheme is that the 1ph fault on the HV system will be
increased due to the zero sequence contribution from the transformer. It is therefore
advisable that this grounding method be limited to the places where the 1ph current on
the HV level is not critical.
1.8.2.3. Protection of the Ground Current Limiting Equipment
The limiting equipment (resistor or reactance) must be protected against damages due
to excessive earth currents: these currents can be permanent or of a short duration.
Short duration currents: the limiting equipment must be designed to withstand the
maximum ground fault current during the time taken by the slowest earth fault
protection relay to remove the fault.
Permanent current: the limiting equipment must be designed to withstand the highest
permanent ground fault current not detectable by the less sensitive ground fault
protection relay. Since this value can be rather high, it is common practice to monitor
the ground current flowing through the limiting device by a sensitive relay (stand-by
earth fault relay).
The following example illustrated a typical case:
 300A limiting resistor
 maximum earth fault relay clearing time (e.g. ground O/C relay in the incoming of
the injection transformer): 2 sec.
 maximum expected unbalance current in the MV neutral connection: 5 A
 minimum expected earth fault current (e.g. in case of broken conductor on a line
feeder): 10 A
 minimum expected earth current detectable by the ground protection relays: 50 A
JMED/4NT/3210/000/01/CM
Final Ed. 01-12-19
16
The resistor could then be specified as follows:
 permanent continuous through current: 10 A

The protection relays in the ground connection to the resistor could be selected as
follows:
 inverse time relay, set to match the characteristic of the thermal curve of the resistor
(to be obtained from the manufacturer); this relay should pick-up as near as possible to
10 A and must trip the transformer,
 constant time relay, set to …9 A…This relay should only give an alarm, to allow the
operation staff to switch off/on all outgoing feeders successively to remove the fault.
Refer also to the diagram D.1.8/4 in Appendix A.1.8/1.
1.8.3. Autoreclosing
In overhead transmission lines the majority of faults are transient, which means that a
short interruption of the supply is generally enough to clear the fault. For this reason
the outgoing feeders are generally equipped with autoreclosing (AR) relays which will
take care of breaker reclosing after a trip initiated by the protection relays.
In distribution systems, AR is frequently multi-shot in order to leave the opportunity to
line reclosers or to automatic sectionalizers to disconnect a faulty spur.
In some application, the scheme is arranged so the AR relay is triggered only from the
high set of element of the over-current relay (which means that the fault is on the main
line) and not by the time delayed element (which supposes a back-up operation).
1.8.4. 22kV System Grounding
1.8.4.1. 66kV/22kV Injection Transformers
A limiting resistor has to be installed on the 22 kV side of the injection transformer, so

as to standardise the ground current to 300 A.
The value of the grounding resistor should be 40 ohms (max. ground current for the 22
kV system voltage = 318 A).
1.8.4.2. 6.6 or 11kV/22kV Step-up Transformers
The 22kV transformer neutral has to be isolated in all the substations (the
corresponding 22kV 1 ph short-circuit current is taken care of by the upstream
66/22kVinjection transformer supplying the area).
1.8.5. 22kV System Selectivity
1.8.6. Selectivity between 22kV Fuses
As mentioned here above, selectivity between fuses will cause problems unless the fuse
ratings are very different from each other; spurs equipped with a set of group fuses
protecting several transformers will also cause problems.
Therefore, reclosers and sectionalizers have to be installed in place of group fuses in
critical places as shown in Fig. 1.8.5.1/1 in Appendix A.1.8/1.
JMED/4NT/3210/000/01/CM
Final Ed. 01-12-19
17
1.8.6.1. Selectivity between 22kV protection relays
All protection relays of the injection stations and intermediate substations have to be
established on the base of the selectivity guidelines described above.
1.8.7. Fault Indicators
For optimum efficiency of fault location, fault indicators should be used on the MV line
circuits.
Experience has shown that hand reset fault indicators are never quite restored, which
can be troublesome for a correct location of the next coming faults. It is therefore
advisable that these indicators be either
 self-reset, after several hours,
 self-reset, on definite restoration of the voltage (built-in time delay to avoid
resetting in case of reclosing onto a permanent fault).
Autonomous equipment is always preferable than battery powered equipment. The use
of more sophisticated indicators (e.g. indicators equipped with radio emitter for signal
reception in a car) can be an interesting alternative for installation at places of difficult
access.
On MV circuits carrying large currents (near to the maximum 1 ph fault current - 200A
to 300A -) only zero-sequence fault detectors can be used.
1.8.8. Transformer Earth Leakage Protection
A correct operation of the earth leakage relay requires that the transformer tank be
connected to the earthing grid only through one link (passing through the current
transformer supplying the earth leakage relay). All necessary measures have to be
taken in order to avoid that no other paths to the earth are present through any other
equipment installed on the transformer (as an example, the screens or steel belts of the
LV cables must be earthed at the transformer side only, or remain free from earth).
It can be seen from the sketch in Fig. 1.8.7/1 that due to the incorrect connection to
earth at the remote end of the LV cable, part of the fault current (IB) will not flow
through the CT. The remaining current (IA) might not to be large enough for the delay
to operate.
1.8.9. Fault Recording Equipment
A proper analysis of network incidents will help to improve the overall protection
system. Digital fault recorders should be provided at some strategic places of the
network to record the voltage and currents of the system.
Such information is mandatory to examine the fault clearing process and the behaviour
of the protective relays (main and back-up relays).
The fault recording equipment should be a stand-alone equipment, i.e. independent
from the protection relays, for several reasons:
JMED/4NT/3210/000/01/CM
Final Ed. 01-12-19
18
 it is good practice that the behaviour of protective relays be monitored by devices

other than themselves,
 the fault analysis work is simplified since the software is common for all
substations (this is not the case when fault recording function is built in the
protection relay, for which the software is specific to any relay manufacturer),
 remote transmission of the fault data (e.g. to the dispatch centre) is easier to
perform with equipment independent from the protection relays (generally from
different manufacturers).
The following analogue signals should be recorded:
 6 bus-bar voltages (66kV)
 4 currents, for each 66kV line
 1 neutral current of each transformer, 66 kV and 22 kV sides
 1 neutral current of each 22 kV feeder
Digital signals as follows:
 distance relay start L1
 distance relay start N
 distance relay TRIP
 distance relay higher zones
 autoreclosing signal
 teleprotection receive signal
 circuit-breaker position
 back-up protection start
 back-up protection trip
JMED/4NT/3210/000/01/CM
Final Ed. 01-12-19
19
2. Design of overhead lines
2.1. Planning and construction of MV and LV lines

2.1.1. MV overhead lines
The MV overhead lines generally consist of:

 bare conductors (aluminium alloy) in rural areas or in sparsely populated regions
(i.e. where the eventual risk of having clearance problems between lines and
buildings is low) ,
 insulated twisted cables in moderately or densely populated regions, or where the
line passes close to vegetation.
Bare conductors are horizontally arranged; the conductors are supported on wooden or
metallic cross-arms by means of three pin insulators (on intermediate supports), or by
three anchoring sets (at strain points).
In specific cases (such as where there are clearance problems between lines and
buildings), either a vertical or a flag arrangement of conductors may be adopted. The
conductors are then supported by insulators mounted on separate metallic consoles; the
consoles are fixed to the pole either directly or by means of an outrigger arrangement
(metallic frame, for example).
Bare conductor lines are always in single circuit per pole, with single conductor per
phase.
MV insulated cables are supported on poles by means of appropriate suspension or
anchor clamps.
2.1.2. LV overhead network
LV overhead network consists mainly of insulated twisted cables. However, in case of

extension, reinforcement or reconstruction of an existing network, bare conductors may
be used.
LV lines or cables may either be supported on MV or LV poles, or supported from
building facades.
The bare conductors of LV lines have generally a vertical or “flag” arrangement. The
conductors are fixed to poles using LV insulators.
The LV insulated twisted cables are fixed to poles or facades by means of suspension
or anchor clamps and by other appropriate fittings for such construction.
2.1.3. Configuration of MV and LV lines
Depending on pole characteristics, the following line configurations may exist on the
same pole:
 1 MV + 1 LV , both with bare conductors
 1 MV with bare conductors + 1 MV with torsade
JMED/4NT/3210/000/01/CM
Final Ed. 01-12-19
20
 1 MV with bare conductors + 2 LV with torsade

 2 MV + 1 LV, all with torsade
 1 MV + 2 LV, all with torsade
2.1.4. Poles for MV/LV lines
Intermediate, angle and terminal poles in moderately/densely populated regions, as well

as intermediate poles in sparsely populated regions, are self-supporting.
The angle and terminal poles may be stayed in sparsely populated or uninhabited
regions, provided that the stays can be properly erected, otherwise the poles remain
self-supporting.
However, it is advisable to progressively construct in only self-supporting poles.
Recommended types of pole:
 Reinforced concrete pole for MV line and/or MV/LV combination; single or double
pole may be used. In the latter case, the two poles are either braced or in H-pole
arrangement. They may even be braced in an H arrangement, depending on network
configuration.
 Wooden pole or reinforced concrete pole for separate LV lines; single wood poles
are always used; reinforced concrete poles may be single or double (braced) for
certain lines configurations.
2.2. Outlines of MV/LV lines

Outlines of MV/LV lines are given in “Standard Drawings” (Sections 1 to 7).
2.3. Topographical work for MV lines

2.3.1. Routing
2.3.1.1. The preliminary route
The preliminary route is determined by the Planning and Design section. This route is
represented as far as possible as a straight line but obstacles known at this stage have to
be avoided.
The preliminary route is then submitted to surveyors on a 1/25000 map.
It is then the duty of the surveyor to verify and amend the route by taking into
consideration obstacles noted on site such as:
 areas under special cultivation;
 exploited woods ,
 marshy regions,
 flood prone regions,
 classified zones ,
JMED/4NT/3210/000/01/CM
Final Ed. 01-12-19
21
 private properties,
 protected zones,
 restricted zones ( airports, radar‟s, military grounds , etc ),
 telecommunication installations,
 existing or future constructions,
 proximity of drains and ducts,
 zone subject to industrial or saline pollution,
 zones subject to landslides…
It is then the wayleave officer‟s responsibility to secure the necessary permissions
along the line route.
2.3.1.2. The actual route
The actual route is obtained after amendments are brought to the preliminary route
following site surveys and wayleave acquisition.
The actual route consists of straight sections, which are as long as possible, and avoids,
wherever possible, large angles ( 60). Angle positions, particular on hill crests and at
special locations, must be carefully examined so as to optimise the location of poles.
As far as possible, the crossing of major obstacles such as motorways, rivers, etc…
must be effected at right angle so as to minimise the length of conductors that crosses
above.
2.3.2. Pegging of the line route
2.3.2.1. Angles
A lasting peg must be driven into the ground at each intersection of two alignments, i.e.
at each angle point. Moreover, in each alignment, pegs of a different kind are fixed at
about ten metres from the angle peg.
These three items are located with respect to fixed obstacles such that they can easily
and precisely be replaced in case of loss.
A record is kept of all these 3-item sets on a scale of at least 1/200.
Pegs used are of the following types: concrete marks, rods fixed in concrete cast on
site, etc….
Each peg is numbered in a clear and permanent way. This numbering is also recorded
on the pegging schedule and on drawings.
2.3.2.2. Alignments
On aligned sections, pegs of type similar to above are fixed every 250m maximum in
such a way that two adjacent pegs are always visible from each other.
Pegs are also fixed where necessary and close to major obstacles (roads, rivers, etc).
JMED/4NT/3210/000/01/CM
Final Ed. 01-12-19
22
The alignment pegs are numbered in a similar manner to angle pegs and are also
recorded on the pegging schedule and on drawings.
2.3.3. Profile
2.3.3.1. Precision
The profile is established and recorded following the final pegging.

It is to be done with a maximum of precision, particularly when the ground is very
uneven:
- The maximum permissible error in length is 10cm/100m.
- The maximum permissible error in level is 1cm/100m.
2.3.3.2. Density of level points recorded
On more or less flat ground, one level is taken on the centre line every 25m.
For grounds with a gradient equal or exceeding 5 %, it is necessary to take counter-
levels located 10m on either side of the centre line.
The density of counter-level taken is more or less equal to that taken along the centre
line.
On uneven grounds, apart from the above-described levels, every change in gradient
must also be recorded.
The recording of the bottom of narrow ravines, which are crossed, may be indicative
only.
2.3.3.3. Important points to be recorded on the profile
All obstacles on the ground and above the ground, as well as identifiable underground
ducts, which are less than 20m from the centre line, must be recorded in X, Y and Z.
Particular attention must be paid to obstacles, which rise above the ground level such as
masts, antennas, top of structures, overhead conductors and poles, etc.
For HV and MV overhead lines crossing the proposed route, it is necessary to record at
least five level points, in XYZ, for the highest and lowest conductors.
In case the tower of an HV line being crossed falls in the zone to be recorded, the tower
footing is to be recorded.
2.3.3.4. Complementary data
It is necessary to record all technical or administrative data related to the route being
surveyed or to obstacles encountered, which may be of interest to the study.
For instance: identification of roads, electric lines (as well as their voltages in case they
are HV), soil utilisation, etc….
JMED/4NT/3210/000/01/CM
Final Ed. 01-12-19
23
2.3.3.5. Lines with insulated twisted cable
In principle, it is not necessary to establish the profile of lines built with insulated
twisted cable except when the line crosses specific obstacles, such as rivers, main
roads, buildings, etc, and when such crossing mandate a special survey (choice of pole
to be utilised, use of overhead or underground crossing…).
2.3.4. Mapping of topographical data
2.3.4.1. Profile
Topographical data are recorded on line profile drawings with a horizontal scale of
1/2000 and a vertical scale of 1/200.
The profile must show in full line all obstacles recorded in the centre line, and dotted
line will represent all obstacles found on either side of the centre line in the zone
mentioned in section 2.3.3.3 above.
The counter-profiles recorded on the left and on the right as indicated in 2.3.3.2 above
are represented in different line types.
The profile indicates the following useful information:
 the numbering of marks and / or pegs fixed along the route,
 the individual and cumulative distances of recorded points per straight sections,
 the level of each recorded point and obstacle,
 the level of obstacles above ground level.
2.3.4.2. Plan view
The profile is accompanied by a plan view, which shows:

 the line route ;
 the angles;
 the obstacles encountered ( crossed or passed along) such as :
- buildings,
- roads, rivers , HV , LV lines,
- marshy regions, ponds ,
- visible boundaries of cultivated lands, woods, orchards,
- rocks, quarries, landslides, floods,
- etc.….
 a brief note on the type of soil, its utilisation and obstacles encountered.
Plan views contents the following annotations:
 the section identification (from angle n…. to angle n …..),
JMED/4NT/3210/000/01/CM
Final Ed. 01-12-19
24
 the land occupation,

 the angles between the alignments,
 the length of each section,
 the X and Y co-ordinates of each angle point.
The profile and the corresponding plan view are represented on the same drawing.
2.3.5. Special considerations for inhabited areas
2.3.5.1. Routing
All the clauses of section 2.3.1 above apply.

In addition, the route must be as far as possible along existing roads and must not cross
over built up areas.
Angle positions must be carefully selected.
2.3.5.2. Pegging of the line route and profile
All the clauses of sections 2.3.2 and 2.3.3 above apply.

Moreover, the profile must be established with maximum precision as regard the centre
line, walls, houses, existing overhead lines, roads, etc.
In these areas, the density of points recorded along the centre line is determined by the
obstacles encountered, with a minimum of one point every 10m.
Similarly, all obstacles on ground or above ground are recorded on a strip 8m wide (4m
on each side of the centre line). Underground ducts are recorded on a strip 6m wide
(3m on each side of the centre line).
2.3.5.3. Mapping of topographical data
See section 2.3.4 above.
2.4. Spotting of MV line

2.4.1. Basic data
Basic data related to conductors and/or cables (type, cross-section, E.D.S), spans, poles
(dimensions, height above ground, load on top,…) and design conditions are given in
this manual in corresponding chapters and sections.
2.4.2. Mean span
Taking known factors into consideration, an economic or mean span must be

established.
Long spans may also be used provided safety factors are guaranteed, even under
extreme site conditions.
JMED/4NT/3210/000/01/CM
Final Ed. 01-12-19
25
2.4.3. Determination of spotting parameter
The spotting parameter is determined from the E.D.S at maximum conductor or cable
temperature without wind and for a well-defined equivalent span...
The spotting parameter for given conditions of temperature, wind and equivalent span
is the ratio between the tension (daN) in the conductor and its unit weight (daN/m)
under these conditions.
The spotting parameter is calculated for each section based on equivalent spans and or
specific spans.
For bare conductor lines, this parameter will be used for drawing the chainage on the
profile if the latter is implemented by mean of a graphic system.
For lines with insulated twisted cable, the parameter is used to calculate sag.
2.4.4. Clearance of line above ground
The clearance above ground depicted on the line profile as regard angle supports (with
strain insulators) or intermediate supports (with pin type insulators) is the clearance of
the lowest cross-arm to ground.
When locating supports along the profile, one terminal point must be catered for every
15 spans.
2.4.5. Safety clearance from obstacles
Locating supports on the profile must be done according to regulatory safety clearances
with respect to crossed-over obstacles. For vertical clearances, the maximum conductor
temperature with no wind must be considered, while for horizontal clearances, the
maximum temperature with maximum wind at right angle to the span must be
considered.
When MV conductors pass over LV or communication lines, the latter are assumed to
be at the same temperature as the former.
The following minimum safety clearances must be maintained for a service voltage
below 50 kV.
 Vertical clearances :
- agricultural land 6m
- land subject to fire (sugar cane fields) 8m
- roads 8m
- buildings 3m
- overhead lines ( MV, LV, communication) 1,2m
- antennas, lighting posts and street lighting structures 2,5m
 Horizontal clearance
- All obstacles 2m
JMED/4NT/3210/000/01/CM
Final Ed. 01-12-19
26
2.4.6. The lengths of sections
When locating the supports, at least one terminal point for every 15 spans must be
provided.
These supports are expected to bear at maximum wind all the conductors in one
section, assuming the conductors in the neighbouring section to be non-existent.
2.4.7. Locating of supports along the profile
The location of the supports starts from a necessary point A to another necessary point
B, by optimising the soil profile, that is, by trying to make conductor sag coincide with
hollows in the profile, so as to keep ground clearances as uniform and close to the
minimum as possible.
After the support location has been done from A to B, a crosscheck is made by locating
supports on the same section of profile but from B to A. There may be several options,
but the most economical one is to be selected.
During the support location exercise, the following basic rules must be followed:
 to avoid as far as possible locating supports on steep longitudinal slopes,
 to avoid locating supports on grounds which are subject to or prone to landslide,
 obstacles are to be crossed-over with preferably normal supports,
 at sensitive areas, complementary profiles are to be established so as to make all
necessary checks,
 supports are to be located close to obstacles so that the lowest point of the
conductor is not above the obstacles,
 supports are to be located in such a way that each alignment support has spans of
similar lengths on both sides.
During the course of locating supports on the profile, more importantly on uneven
grounds, it is also necessary to check that the swing due to transverse winds does not
bring the conductors dangerously close to the lateral obstacles.
Once the support location is completed, it should be checked that the real line
parameter for the section is at least equal to the theoretical value. If, however, the
theoretical value is exceeded by more than 2.5%, the profile must be reviewed taking
into account the real equivalent span.
2.4.8. Information to be shown on the profile
The following information must appear on the profile:

 support number,
 distance between supports (span),
 the angle at each angle point,
 the type of support,
JMED/4NT/3210/000/01/CM
Final Ed. 01-12-19
27
 the ground clearance of the lowest cross arm at each support,

 the height above ground of the fixing point of the conductor,
 the type of fittings ( suspension = S ; anchor = A),
 the equivalent span of each section,
 the line parameter of each section,
 the obstacles encountered at each span.
Moreover, at the top left corner of the drawing, the type of conductor used, its cross-
section and E.D.S, as well as its maximum temperature, must be indicated.
2.4.9. Pegging record
The profile is to be complemented by a pegging record, which will contain the

following details:
 support numbers,
 the spans,
 angles at angle point,
 types of support,
 line fittings,
 type of conductor and cross-section,
 foundation types,
 locations of cable/ conductor joint,
 obstacles encountered at each span.
2.5. Topographical work for LV lines

2.5.1. Routing
2.5.1.1. Preliminary route
Same as section 2.3.1.1

2.5.1.2. Actual route
Same as section 2.3.1.2 except second clause.

2.5.2. Pegging of line route
Pegging of line route is in fact the placing of durable landmarks, fixed in the soil, at
each angle points and at each ends.
Each landmarks are numbered in a legible way and this numbering is recorded on the
pegging schedule and on drawings.
JMED/4NT/3210/000/01/CM
Final Ed. 01-12-19
28
2.5.3. Survey of line profile
Same as section 2.3.3.5

2.5.4. Mapping of topographical data
The recorded topographical data are restored on layout plans of the LV networks with a
scale of 1/2500;these plans are complemented by line profiles of particular ways, by
pegging records and by topologic files.
The following should be shown
 on layout plans:
- the line routing,
- the location of the poles along the route,
- the numbering of landmarks,
- the numbering of poles,
- the cable types and cross-sections.
 in the pegging records:
- the spans,
- the angles
- the pole types,
- the cable fitting,
- the cable lengths.
 on topological files (listed per distribution transformer)
a) for each LV feeder:
- the schematic representation of the feeder topology and associated tapes-off,
- for each section identified on this topological schema (section here means
part of the LV network of constant cable cross-section and found between
two tapes-off, ends or change of cross-section)
 the length of the section,
 the cable type,
 the total distance between LV fuses and the far end of the section,
 the number of single and three-phase service lines.
b) Per LV feeder and distribution transformer
JMED/4NT/3210/000/01/CM
Final Ed. 01-12-19
29
- the length of the section,

- the number of poles per type,
- the number of single and three-phase service lines.
2.6. Spotting of LV lines

2.6.1. Basic data
Same as section 2.4.1

2.6.2. Determination of spotting parameters
The spotting parameters should be determined from the E.D.S tension at maximum
temperature of cables, without wind and for a well-define span. This parameter will be
used for sagging calculation.
2.6.3. Safety distances from obstacles
Same as section 2.4.5.
2.7. Pole loading calculation

2.7.1. Referenced documents
The design of pole loading for the MV/LV lines has to be based on:
 Electricity regulations - document dated from 21 July 1939.
 Additionally, the design shall be completed by the values of "Code of Practice 3 -
Chapter V: part 2 dated 1972".
2.7.1.1. Electricity regulations - Basic data's
On the basis of chapter X - "Strength of support" - the wind pressure value on a cable is
equal to 20 pds/sq. foot or 958 N/m2 at right angles to the line, temperature of the
cables being 50° F= 10° C. The safety factors for structures are:
 steel structure 2.5
 wood poles 4.5
 reinforced concrete pole 3.5.
The safety factor for line conductors is: 2
2.7.1.2. Code of practice 3 - Chapter V - Part 2 - Wind loads
Wind on cables
For :
 a topography factor S1 =1
 a conductor height above ground = 10 m
JMED/4NT/3210/000/01/CM
Final Ed. 01-12-19
30
 rural area S2 = 0.83

 urban area S2 = 0.69
 a statistical factor S3 =1
 a basic wind speed 3 sec. gust = 70.8 m/sec
(cyclonic wind - Hollanda for a return period of 50 years)
 a flow regime of the air = supercritical flow
 a force coefficient Cf = 0.9
(More details of those coefficients are given in appendix A.2.7/1)
The dynamic wind pressure on cables is equal to:
 (70.8 x 0.83)² x 0.613 x 0.9 = 1 905 N/m2 in rural area
 (70.8 x 0.69)² x 0.613 x 0.9 = 1 317 N/m2 in urban area
Safety factors = no value is proposed in this code
Wind on pole
For a pole height of about 10 m
S2 = 0.88 rural area
= 0.74 urban area
Cf = 1.4 for I concrete
1.75 for • concrete
0.5 for  wood pole
The dynamic wind pressure is equal to (N/m2) :
Concrete Wood
Type and section
of pole    
I H • 
Rural area 3330 3805 4164 1190
Urban area 2355 2691 2945 841
2.7.1.3. Comments on the Electricity regulations
Wind pressure of 958 N/m2 corresponds to a wind speed of 48.45 m/sec. (174 km/hour)
which could be considered as a high speed wind.
Such a high wind combined with a safety factor of 2.5 to 4.5 is very severe.
JMED/4NT/3210/000/01/CM
Final Ed. 01-12-19
31
2.7.1.4. Recommended values for the design of the MV/LV network
Wind pressure value on the cables

 E. D. S. (Every Day Stress)
Recommended value for :
 AAAC cables MV/LV
 ALMOND 25 / 30.1 mm2 70 daN
 OAK 100 / 118.9 mm2 300 daN
 ASH 150 / 180.7 mm2 450 daN
 MV twisted cables
 6.6 kV – 3 x 50 mm2 750 daN
 6.6 kV – 3 x 150 mm2 900 daN
 22 kV – 3 x 35 mm2 650 daN
 22 kV – 3 x 95 mm2 850 daN
 22 kV – 3 x 150 mm2 900 daN
 LV twisted cables
 3 x 35 + 54.6 + 1 x 16 mm2 190 daN
 3 x 50 + 54.6 + 1 x 16 mm2 250 daN
 3 x 95 + 54.6 + 1 x 16 mm2 280 daN
 Maximum wind conditions
 Temperature 10° C
 wind pressure 96 daN/m²
 safety factor :
 concrete pole 1.5
 wood pole (1) 1.8
 conductors 2
 stays 2.5
 pole foundation :
 concrete 1.65
 wood (2) 2
JMED/4NT/3210/000/01/CM
Final Ed. 01-12-19
32
 Exceptional wind conditions

 Temperature 10° C;
 wind pressure :
 in rural area 190 daN/m²
 in urban area 132 daN/m²
 safety factors :
 concrete pole 1
 wood pole (1) 1.2
 conductors 2
 stays 1.5
 pole foundation :
 concrete 1.1
 wood (2) 1,32
(1) safety factor of concrete pole x 1.2 due to the fact that wood is a live material
(2) safety factor of the pole x 1.2
Wind pressure value on the support

 Maximum wind conditions for concrete or wood pole : 96 daN/m²
 Exceptional wind conditions (daN/m²):
Concrete pole Wood pole

Type and section
of pole    
I H • 
Rural area 330 380 420 120
Urban area 230 270 300 85
2.7.2. Calculation of pole loading
The calculation method of the transmitted efforts via the cables to the poles and the
efforts due to wind on the poles is dealt with in Appendix A 2.7/1.
A software for the calculation of efforts transmitted by the cables on top of the poles is
available (Program Polo.xls); the users manual for this program is dealt with in
Appendix A.2.7/2.
JMED/4NT/3210/000/01/CM
Final Ed. 01-12-19
33
2.8. Calculation of the ampacity of a bare conductor

A software is available for the calculation of admissible current (ampacity) in a bare
conductor, taking into consideration the ambient temperature, sunlight exposure, wind
speed and the maximum admissible temperature in the conductor (Program AMP.xls);
the users manual for this program is dealt with in Appendix A.2.8/1
2.9. Sagging chart for overhead lines

A software is available for the set up of a chart giving tensions and sags to apply to an
overhead conductor or cable, during its installation, for different conductor or cable
temperatures (Program SACHA.xls), the users manual for this program is dealt with in
Appendix A.2.9/1.
2.10. Other tools included in the GIPSY software
Some other computerised tools are available in the GIPSY software, as:
 Regulations for installing and dimensioning distribution facilities.
 Short circuit current calculation.
 Estimate of power and energy losses on distribution network.
JMED/4NT/3210/000/01/CM
Final Ed. 01-12-19
34
3. Equipment characteristics for MV/LV lines
3.1. Line supports

3.1.1. Concrete poles
3.1.1.1. Standards and reference documents
The standards and reference documents used for design calculation and manufacturing
of poles are:
 MCF 67-200 Reinforced concrete pole
 MCF 67-250 Pre-stressed concrete pole
 BSI - CP110 - Part 1 - 1972 The structural use of concrete
 BSI - CP3 - Part 2 – 1979 Chapter 5
 CEB specifications Specifications for reinforced concrete poles
(see Appendix A3.1.1)
Moreover, the following Belgian norms are recommended for the use of steel and
concrete:
 NBN B15-101 Concrete, reinforced concrete and pre-stressed concrete –
General;
Materials;
Calculation;
Production;
 NBN A24-301 Steel for reinforced concrete;
 NBN A24-302 Steel for reinforced concrete;
 NBN 110-001 Pre-stressed steel;
 NBN 110-002 Pre-stressed steel;
 NBN 110-202 Pre-stressed steel.
Complementary recommendations pertaining to the manufacturing, handling,
tolerances and testing of concrete poles are given in appendix A 3.1.1.
3.1.1.2. General appearance
Particular attention is to be paid to the general appearance of concrete poles upon

delivery and before their erection.
JMED/4NT/3210/000/01/CM
Final Ed. 01-12-19
35
The surface of the pole must be smooth; no gravel nesting, plastering (particularly at
opening of holes); crack or damaged edge is allowed.
Poles having any one of the aforesaid defects shall not be accepted.
3.1.1.3. Pole burying
The depth of burying should be at least equal to 1/10 of the total length of the pole plus
0.50m.
This depth is independent of the type of soil, whereas the type and dimensions of the
foundation are governed by the type of soil and by the forces expected to act on the
pole (see section 4.4).
3.1.1.4. Holes
All the holes necessary for fixing of line fittings must be provided for right during the
pole manufacture. The standard position of holes on the various types of poles are
given in the Standard Drawings (Section 9 – Folio 1).
3.1.2. Wooden poles
3.1.2.1. Norms and reference documents
The norms and reference documents pertaining to calculations, conditioning and

erection are:
 SABS 753 and 754 - 1982
 BS 1990 - Part 1 - 1984
 MFC 67-100
Complementary recommendations pertaining to wood, poles and their conditioning,
impregnation procedures, execution details, handling, tolerances and testing are given
in Appendix A.3.1.2.
3.1.2.2. Pole burying
The depth of burying should be at least equal to 1/10 of the total length of the pole plus
0.50m.
This depth is independent of the type of soil, whereas the type and dimensions of the
foundation are governed by the type of soil and on the forces expected to act on the
pole (see section 4.4).
3.1.2.3. Drilling and grooving
All drilling necessary for fixing of line fittings must be carried out before treating the
pole as per details given in annex A.3.1.2.
The standard positions of holes on the various types of poles are given in the Standard
Drawings ( Section 9 – Folio 2).
JMED/4NT/3210/000/01/CM
Final Ed. 01-12-19
36
3.1.3. Nomenclature and pole characteristics
Based on different distribution network configurations and on the mechanical forces

exerted on the poles, different types of poles, characterised by their height and head
strength, have been selected; table 3.1.3-1 below gives the nomenclature and the main
characteristics of these supports.
Total Dimensions (mm) Depth of Head

Item Type height foundation strength
(m) S Bottom Top (mm) (daN)
16.3 Wood 11  210 160 1800 541

16.3 Wood 11  225 160 1800 541
16.4 Wood 11  250 200 1800 919
16.4 Wood 11  265 200 1800 919
16.5 Wood 9  200 160 1650 602
16.5 Wood 9  210 160 1650 602
16.6 Wood 13  300 225 2100 1057
16.10 Wood 15  300 210 2400 900
16.20 Wood 7  130 100 1200 228
16.20 Wood 7  140 100 1200 228
13.32 Concrete 9  402/334 190/190 1650 560

16.33 Concrete 11  435/370 195/175 1800 650
16.34 Concrete 11  435/350 190/190 1800 800
16.42 Concrete 13  477/600 250/270 2300 2160
16.43 Concrete 14  477/600 250/270 2300 2160
Table 3.1.3-1 : Nomenclature and characteristics of supports
N.B. :
- for wood pole, the head strengths given in the table are those which cause a
stress of 55 Mpa in the wood.
- For concrete pole, the head strengths given in the table are the maximum
forces due to wind (extreme conditions) which are exerted on the pole by the
conductors only.
JMED/4NT/3210/000/01/CM
Final Ed. 01-12-19
37
3.2. Bare MV/LV conductors

3.2.1. Standards
The conductor is of homogeneous aluminium alloy (AAAC), according to BS 3242-

1970 or NCF 34-125.
3.2.2. Technical characteristics
Table 3.2.2-1 below gives the nomenclature and the main technical characteristics of
conductors used for MV and LV distribution networks.
Code name of conductors
Technical Characteristics ALMOND OAK ASH
Nominal cross-section (mm2) 25 100 150

Effective cross-section (mm2) 30.1 118.9 180.7
No. of strands (p) 7 7 19
 of strands (mm) 2.34 4.65 3.48
 of conductor (mm) 7.02 13.95 17.40
Weight of conductor (daN/m) 0.083 0.330 0.508
Nominal breaking strength (daN) 844 3330 5065
Modulus of elasticity (daN/ mm2) 5900 5900 5600
Coefficient of linear x10-6 23 23 23
expansion
Table 3.2.2-1 : Bare conductors – Technical characteristics
3.2.3. Packaging
The conductors are packaged and delivered on wooden drums (treated against termites)
or metallic drums (treated against corrosion), in the following minimum lengths:
ALMOND 25 mm2 5000 m
OAK 100 mm2 3000 m
ASH 150 mm2 2500 m
JMED/4NT/3210/000/01/CM
Final Ed. 01-12-19
38
3.3. MV insulated twisted cables (overhead and underground)

3.3.1. Standards
Generally, the cable shall be according to the following standards:

 IEC 228 for cable with homogeneous aluminium core
 Canadian CSA C40 for galvanised steel messenger
 IEC 502/94
 Technical specifications EDF - H33 - S 23.
3.3.2. Design and manufacture
The cable consists of three single core cables, each having its own protection sheath,
twisted around an insulated galvanised steel messenger for overhead network, or
around an earth conductor in case of underground network. The assembly must have a
lay ranging between 1.2 and 1.5 m for all cross-sections.
Each single core cable is made up as follows:
 aluminium stranded circular core;
 extruded semi-conductor screen to equalise the electric field;
 XLPE insulation ( steam or dry reticulation);
 extruded semi-conductor screen (removable and fluted);
 watertight seal to prevent entry of moisture under the metallic covering;
 taped screen, of aluminium or copper;
 hard, outer black PVC sheath;
The messenger is made up as follows:
 galvanised steel stranded core;
 hard, black PVC insulating sheath;
It is essential to have a fusion between the semi-conductor screen on the core and the
XLPE insulation.
The cables must be resistant to long sun exposure, fire propagation, oil, water entry and
small animals as well as insects and termites.
The outer PVC sheath must be homogeneous and made up of a single layer.
Approximately every 5 m, the following marks must stand out in relief on the PVC
insulation of each cable core:
 type of cable;
 operating voltage;
JMED/4NT/3210/000/01/CM
Final Ed. 01-12-19
39
 cross-section of conductor;
 phase identifier.
A mark at 5m interval shall always indicate the remaining length of cable on the drum;
this marking may be substituted by another system but having the same purpose.
Each component (phase conductor, earth conductor or messenger) must be adequately
equipped to prevent moisture entering from the ends during storage and delivery.
The main cables used for MV distribution network are:

 For service voltage Uo/U = 3.8/6.6 kV
- 3x1x50 mm2 Al + 50 mm2 Steel (1)
- 3x1x150 mm2 Al + 50 mm2 Steel (2)
 For service voltage Uo/U = 12.7/22 kV
- 3x1x35 mm2 Al + 50 mm2 Steel (3)
- 3x1x95 mm2 AL + 50 mm2 Steel (4)
Table 3.3.3-1 below gives the technical characteristics of the above-mentioned cables.
Type of cable
Technical Characteristics
(1) (2) (3) (4)
Service voltage (U0/U) (kV) 3.8/6.6 3.8/6.6 12.7/22 12.7/2

2
No. of conductors (p) 3 3 3 3
Cross-section (mm2) 50 150 35 95
Cross-section of messenger (mm2) 50 50 50 50
 of cable (mm) 64 74 59 69
Weight of cable (daN/m) 2.40 3.35 2.30 3.25
Breaking strength of (daN) 6 470 6 470 6 470 6 470
messenger
Modulus of elasticity of (daN/ mm2) 18 800 18 800 18 800 18 800
messenger
Coefficient of linear x10-6 12 12 12 12
expansion of messenger
Table 3.3.3-1 : MV insulated twisted cable – Technical characteristics
JMED/4NT/3210/000/01/CM
Final Ed. 01-12-19
40
3.3.4. Packaging
The cables are packaged and delivered on wooden (treated against termites) or metallic
(treated against corrosion) drums, with a maximum diameter of 2400 mm and
maximum weight of 5000 kg.
3.4. Accessories for MV insulated cable

Cables with synthetic insulation have specially designed jointing and termination kits
which are light, compact and easily assembled.
These accessories may be grouped in four main categories:
 Shrinkable accessories
They use materials which shrink when heated or pre-extended materials. Such
accessories have the advantage that a given type may be used on a range of cross-
sections. They are more frequently used for cable termination.
 Compound accessories
These are straight-through and branch-off joints, which are easy to execute, and
which use a cold polymer compound for filling purposes.
 Taped and injected accessories
These are straight-through and branch-off joints in which the insulation is
reconstructed. Watertightness and mechanical protection are achieved by injecting a
cold polymer resin. Such accessories allow easy jointing between cables with paper
and synthetic insulation.
 Slip-on accessories
These are elastomer accessories for terminations, plug-in assemblies, straight-
through and branch-off joints. As they are slipped directly on the cable insulation,
the cable diameter has to be adapted accordingly.
However, some accessories such as terminations consist of components which are
sufficiently elastic to allow them to fit cables of different cross-sections.
The technologies (principles, design and utilisation) pertaining to the above four
categories of accessories for cables with synthetic insulation are detailed in Appendix
A3.4/1.
3.5. LV insulated twisted cables (overhead and service lines)

3.5.1. Standards
Generally the cable shall be according to the following standards:

 IEC 228 for cable with homogeneous aluminium core
 NFC 33-209
JMED/4NT/3210/000/01/CM
Final Ed. 01-12-19
41
a) Twisted cable for distribution network

The cable consists of three single core cables, each having its own protection
sheath, twisted around an insulated Almelec messenger, which also serves the
purpose of the neutral.
One or two aluminium conductors of cross-section 16 mm2 may also be integrated
in the cable for street lighting purposes.
Each single core cable is made up as follows:
- Aluminium stranded circular core;
- Outer black PVC insulation, with high weathering resistance.
The messenger is made up as follows:
- Stranded Almelec core, with cross-section 54.6 or 70 mm2;
- Black PVC outer sheath.
b) Twisted cable for branch-off
This cable may consist of two or four aluminium conductors each having its own
PVC sheath of same characteristics as (a) above.
Due to its insulation, the cable must resist well to prolonged exposure to sunlight,
ozone, bad weather and abrasion.
The phase conductors of the LV twisted cable must be marked, at one metre interval at
least, by the digits 1,2 or 3.
The cables used for LV distribution network and service lines are:
 Torsade for distribution network
- 3 x 70 + 54.6 + 1 x 16 mm2 (1)
- 3 x 50 + 54.6 + 1 x 16 mm2 (2)
- 3 x 35 + 54.6 + 1 x 16 mm2 (3)
 Torsade for service lines
- 2 x 25 mm2 (4)
- 2 x 16 mm2 (5)
Table 3.5.3-1 below gives the technical characteristics of the above-mentioned cables.
JMED/4NT/3210/000/01/CM
Final Ed. 01-12-19
42
Type of cable
Technical Characteristics
(1) (2) (3) (4) (5)
Cross section of phase (mm2) 70 50 35 25 16

conductors
Cross section of street (mm2) 16 16 16 - -
lighting conductor
Cross section of (mm2) 54.6 54.6 54.6 - -

neutral messenger
 of cable (mm) 40.5 36.0 33.5 18.0 14.5
Weight of cable (daN/m) 1.05 0.81 0.7 0.21 0.135
Breaking strength (daN) 1 660 1 660 1 660 >500 >500
of messenger
Modulus of elasticity (daN/ mm2) 6 000 6 000 6 000 - -
of messenger
Coefficient of linear x10-6 23 23 23 - -
expansion of messenger
Table 3.5.3-1 : LV insulated twisted cable – Technical characteristics
3.5.4. Packaging.
The cables are packaged and delivered on wooden (treated against termites) or metallic
(treated against corrosion) drums, with the following minimum lengths:
- Torsade for LV distribution network - 1000 m
- Torsade for service lines - 1500 m
3.6. Earthing conductors

3.6.1. General characteristics
The earthing conductor consists of a stranded copper core, which is

 bare for the earthing of MV/LV lines and for protective earthing of substations and
distribution stations;
 insulated for system earthing in substations and distribution stations (earthing of the
neutral of transformers).
3.6.2. Particular characteristics
The cross-sections to be utilised for earthing purposes and the insulation level are
explained in subsequent chapters, in sections that deal with earthing specifications.
JMED/4NT/3210/000/01/CM
Final Ed. 01-12-19
43
3.7. Line fittings and accessories

3.7.1. Fittings and accessories for MV lines
3.7.1.1. Cross-arms
 Wooden cross-arms
Bare conductors are normally supported on poles by means of wooden cross-arms,
which have the following specifications:
- Square cross-arms sawn from hard wood and of grade „Select and Better‟ in
accordance with the Malaysian Timber Industry Board grading rules.
- The cross-arms must be sawn straight and square and the grain of the timber
should run as nearly as possible parallel with the length of the cross-arms.
Maximum slopes of the grain should not exceed one in fifteen.
- The cross-arms shall be suitable for tropical climate and shall comply with the
relevant sections of above rules or any other equivalent standard.
The standard dimensions of wooden cross-arms are:
- Square section 100 x 100 mm
- Lengths 1800 – 2400 – 3000 mm
Wooden cross-arms details, as well as the standard positions of holes necessary to
fix the cross-arm to the pole, and the conductors to the cross-arm are given in the
Standard Drawings (Section 9 - Folios 1, 2, 4, 10, 11 & 12).
 Metallic cross-arms
In order to protect the pole in case its minimum strength is exceeded, metallic
cross-arms and gantries may be used to fix the conductors.
These cross-arms will serve the purpose of mechanical fuses for lines, that is to say,
they will resist forces transmitted to the poles by the conductors (see previous
section 2.3), multiplied by a safety factor which is less than the one used for the
design of the poles. Thus, in case of accidental mechanical overload, the cross-arm
will give way instead of the pole.
The Standard Drawings (Sections 1 & 4) give the main configurations of MV lines
with metallic cross arms and gantries; metallic cross-arms details are given in The
Standard Drawings (Sections 9 – Folios 20 to 24)
Terminal cross-arms and gantries, termed as „ controlled deflection‟, are also used;
a documentation on this type of cross-arms is given in Appendix A3.7/1.
JMED/4NT/3210/000/01/CM
Final Ed. 01-12-19
44
3.7.1.2. Insulators
 Type of insulators
They may be of ball and socket type (disc type), rigid type with spindle (pin type)
or post insulator type.
The ball and socket type is mainly used at strain points, the spindle type for
alignments and the post type for specific configurations (e.g. suspended conductor).
 Material
The various parts of the insulators are made up of the following list of materials:
- Insulating part: toughened glass or porcelain
- Socket (disc insulator): galvanised malleable cast iron
- Ball (disc insulator): hot-dip galvanised wrought iron
- Base (post insulator): galvanised malleable cast iron
- Fixing bolts (post-insulator): galvanised steel
- Cementing: cement with appropriate thermomechanical
properties
- Pin (disc insulator): phosphated bronze or stainless steel
(brass is prohibited)
 Standards
The insulators shall be according to BS 137-1973; however, the following norms
are also applicable:
a) toughened glass or porcelain disc type insulator
- IEC 305/1978 for technical characteristics and main dimensions;
- IEC 120/1977 for dimensions of ball and socket;
- IEC 372-1/1977 for characteristics of lock pin;
- IEC 383/1983 for testing of disc strains;
- IEC 575/1977 for thermomechanical and mechanical destructive testing of
components of disc strains;
- IEC 797/1984 for residual resistance of components of strain glass or
ceramic discs of overhead lines following a mechanical or dielectric stress.
b) Rigid porcelain post type insulators:
- ANSI C29.7/1983 for mechanical characteristics and main dimensions;
- ANSI C29.1/1982 and IEC 383/1983 for testing of insulators.
JMED/4NT/3210/000/01/CM
Final Ed. 01-12-19
45
c) Toughened glass or porcelain pin type insulators:

- ANSI C29.6/1984 for mechanical characteristics and main dimensions of
porcelain insulators;
- IEC 305/1978 for mechanical characterictics and main dimensions of
toughened glass insulators;
- ANSI C29.1/1982 and IEC 383/1983 for testing of insulators.
 Construction details
The insulating part is made of either toughened glass or porcelain, which must be
sound and free from defects that would otherwise reduce the lifespan of the
insulator.
The exposed surface of the insulator must be smooth and free form defects.
Vitreous porcelain, having excellent mechanical and dielectric properties, is to be
used.
It should also be dark brown coated and glazed.
The disc insulator is to be supplied complete with pin. It shall be possible to remove
the insulator without the need to completely retrieve the pin from its seat.
The pin-type insulator is to be supplied complete with spindle, nut and lock nut.
The post insulator is to be supplied with fixing bolts complete with Grower washer,
or with nut, lock nut and flat washer for fixing on a metallic cross arm.
Each insulator must bear the manufacturer‟s name, the year of manufacture, the
guaranteed mechanical or electromechanical breaking load for disc insulators, and
the guaranteed cantilever strength for pin or post type insulators.
 Selection of an insulator
The following parameters should be determined in the selection process:
- total creepage distance,
- the cantilever strength,
- the basic impulse level (1),
- the short-time withstand voltage at power frequency (1)
(1) see previous section 1.4.1
Total creepage distance
Based on IEC-71-2- Insulation co-ordination, high pollution level (seaside), the
creepage distance / phase-to-earth voltage is between 4 and 5 cm/kV eff.
JMED/4NT/3210/000/01/CM
Final Ed. 01-12-19
46
For 20 kV network – maximum system voltage 24 kV – the minimum creepage

distance would be 4 x (24/3)=55.4 cm, and the maximum creepage distance
would be 5 x (24/3)=69.3.
The creepage distance should be maintained whether the conductor is fixed in
the central groove (alignment) or in the side groove (small angle).
Cantilever strength
- The minimum cantilever strength of the pin type insulator must be greater
than the force exerted by the conductor on the insulator (see previous
chapter 2.3) multiplied by a safety factor.
- The force exerted by an ASH conductor is about 3.7 kN for a wind span of
70 m and an angle of 5°, under normal wind and temperature conditions;
taking into consideration a safety factor of 2.5, the minimum cantilever
strength of the insulator would be 3.7 x 2.5 = 9.1 KN.
- The minimum cantilever strength of the ball and socket type insulator must
be always greater than the guaranteed minimum breaking load of the
conductor to which it is fixed (for example, 50.65 kN for ASH conductor -
see previous section 3.2).
 Recommended insulators
The following insulators are recommended for MV network:
- Porcelain pin-type insulator (NGK) - ref. HAA - 302 Q
- Toughened glass pin-type insulator (SEDIVER) - ref. VHT 36
- Toughened glass disc insulator (SEDIVER or VICASA) - ref. F70/127
Drawings and technical details of these insulators are given in appendix A 3.7/2.
3.7.1.3. Line fittings for conductors and cables
 Fitting main characteristics

1) General
The parts should be of first class material, well constructed and free from
pointed and sharp edges. The surfaces to be in contact with the conductor must
be sufficiently smooth so as not to damage the latter. The assembly consist of a
minimum number of parts and should be supplied complete with bolts, nuts,
washer, pins, etc… so that the assembling process is easy, quick and safe.
The current carrying parts shall be so conceived as to maximise the contact
surfaces between adjacent parts in order to reduce the assembly resistance to
short circuit current.
JMED/4NT/3210/000/01/CM
Final Ed. 01-12-19
47
2) Assemblies
Drawings of different assemblies are given in the Standard Drawings (Section
11 - Folios 1 to 4, 10 to 12 & 20 to 22); these drawings has to be considered as
indicative.
3) Insulating disc strain for bare conductor
These are fixed to the poles by means of a hook and an eyebolt.
4) Fixing of bare conductor on pin/post insulators.
The conductors are fixed to the insulators using either binding wire or preformed
ties, the characteristics of which are given in the Standard Drawings (Section 11
- Folios 2,3 & 4) together with construction drawings.
5) Anchor clamp for bare conductor
The anchor clamp is of the in-line and bolted type.
6) Joints for bare conductor
- Joints shall be crimped. Marks for placing the crimping die shall on all parts
to be crimped. The mode of crimping (continuous or discontinuous), the
location of the first crimp and the number of crimps shall be indicated on the
joint.
- For each conductor dimension, the same crimping die shall be used for
crimping at anchor clamp, at joints and at taps off.
7) Extension straps
Extension straps shall be used at large angles. The strap is to be inserted between
the eyebolt and the hook of the insulating strain.
8) T-connectors
T-connectors shall be of bolted type, with in-line and transverse grooves to
accommodate conductors with similar or different diameters.
9) Suspension clamp for insulated twisted cable
The suspension clamp assembly consists of a suspension clamp freely supported
from a bracket, which is to be fixed to the pole.
The pole bracket, which is hot-dipped galvanised, shall hold the cable at a
minimum distance of 250 mm from the pole. Its insulating part shall have a
dielectric strength of 6 kV/1min at industrial frequency.
The connection between the bracket and the clamp must allow both a
longitudinal and a transverse degree of freedom for the clamp.
The suspension clamp shall hold the insulated messenger. It shall consist of:
JMED/4NT/3210/000/01/CM
Final Ed. 01-12-19
48
- a cradle whose internal groove widens at both ends; the cradle shall be of
hot-dip galvanised cast-iron or aluminium alloy, then plastic coated; the
plastic coating, reinforced by glass fibre, shall act as a protective sheath for
the insulation of the messenger;
- a cap of the same material as the cradle, and also plastified;
- a tightening screw with brake nut;
- an oblong hole for anchoring.
The opening of the clamp should face the pole.
On either side of the suspension clamp, to prevent untwisting, the phase
conductors are tied to the messenger by cable ties, which are either insulated or
of insulating material.
The suspension assembly may be fixed by means of stainless steel straps or may
be bolted to the pole, according to the type of support used.
10) Anchoring fittings for insulated twisted cable
The simple or double anchor consists of a pole-bracket, a shackle and one or two
anchor clamps.
The assembly shall have an insulating part with dielectric strength of 6 kV/1min
at industrial frequency.
The pole bracket and the shackle, made of hot-dipped galvanised steel, must
ensure a minimum clearance of 100 mm from the pole.
The twisted cable is anchored in the clamp from the messenger, after removal of
the messenger insulation. The components of the anchor clamp are:
- a tapered wedging sleeve;
- a stirrup, to facilitate tensioning;
- an insulator, made of synthetic material;
- a shackle.
The watertightness of the insulated messenger must be ensured by a plastic
stopper, without the use of heat-shrinkable sleeve.
The phase conductors are fixed to the messenger by means of straps or anti-
untwisting devices made of or coated with insulating material. Moreover, a
plastic chain, fixed at one end to the insulator and at the other end to the anti-
untwisting device, keeps the twisted cable in place.
The fixing of assembly to the pole is carried out in a similar way as described for
the suspension clamp above.
JMED/4NT/3210/000/01/CM
Final Ed. 01-12-19
49
11) Materials
Copper and its alloys are prohibited, except for parts used to hold copper
conductors.
Non-magnetic parts are made from aluminium alloy. This alloy has to be
guaranteed as perfectly adapted to local conditions and is rustproof.
Pins are of stainless steel, special aluminium alloy or exceptionally, tin plated
bronze.
12) Galvanising
All ferrous parts, except the stainless steel ones, should be hot-dipped galvanised
to BS 729 and particularly to the following ASTM norms:
A 123: zinc (hot galvanised) coatings on products fabricated from rolled, pressed
and forged steel shapes, plated, bars and strip.
A 153: zinc coating (hot dip) on iron and steel hardware
A 239: locating the thinnest spot in a zinc (galvanised) coating on iron or steel
articles by the preece test (copper sulphate dip).
13) Labelling of components
Each component of the assembly carries a reference number corresponding to
the stock number or the detailed drawing number; this number is cast or stamped
on the component in a clear and permanent manner; the size of crimping die to
be used is also indicated on joints and clamps.
 Mechanical properties
1) Breaking strength
All the components of a suspension clamp must have a breaking strength, which
is not less than the force exerted on the suspension assembly, multiplied by a
safety factor of 2.5.
All the components of an anchoring clamp must have a breaking strength, which
is not less than the breaking load of the conductor or cable.
NB: See previous section on choice of insulators.
2) Slip
- Anchor clamp and compression joint
The clamps and the compression joints for bare conductors must hold the
cable without slip for a pulling force in the cable which is not less than 95%
of the minimum breaking load of the latter.
Similarly, anchor clamps for twisted cables must hold the messenger without
slip for a pulling load in the cable not less than 95 % of the breaking load of
the latter.
JMED/4NT/3210/000/01/CM
Final Ed. 01-12-19
50
- Parallel groove connector

The connector located in a anchoring jumper must hold the cables without
slip for a pulling force in the cables which is not less than 25% of the
minimum breaking load of the latter.
- Fixing of cables on rigid insulators
Pre-formed ties for fixing cables in the top or lateral groove of the rigid
insulators must resist a pulling load due to cable not less than 15% of the
breaking load of the latter.
3.7.1.4. Accessories for torsade cable
 Metallic support for joint and branch-off

The metallic support consists of a cradle made of galvanised metal sheet, with
rounded-off borders and with a minimum width of 185 mm, and a galvanised base
metallic made of U-bars, adapted to the type of pole to which it will be fixed.
Junction boxes are to be fixed on the support by means of synthetic straps.
 Compression joint for insulated steel messenger
This compression joint is suitable for a messenger of 50 mm² cross-section.
It is covered with an insulating envelope having a dielectric strength of 6 kV/1min at
industrial frequency. It must ensure the watertightness of the messenger.
 Continuity jumper for insulated steel messenger
This continuity jumper is used for double anchoring assembly (with or without
joint); it consists of a copper conductor, 25 mm2 cross-section, PRC insulated with
PVC external sleeve.
 Grounding and continuity connector for insulated steel messenger
This connector is of the same type as for the earthing of LV neutral (see section
3.7.2).
 Fixing and mechanical protection devices for cables
1) Fixing
For underground-to-overhead transitions, the cables are fixed to the poles by
means of clamps specially adapted to prevent damage to the insulation and
stainless steel straps with blocking device. The tightening of the straps around
the pole is carried out using appropriate tools.
2) Mechanical protection
The cables which rise above ground level are protected by means of aluminium
alloy ducts, in a U-shape form; lateral slots allow fixing to the pole by means of
stainless steel strops (see above).
JMED/4NT/3210/000/01/CM
Final Ed. 01-12-19
51
When pole foundations are in concrete, the cables passing through the concrete
are protected by means of curved PVC sleeves of appropriate diameter and
bending radius.
3) Anti-untwisting devices
To prevent slipping or untwisting, cable ties or straps must be installed on either
sides of suspension and anchoring devices; ties or straps are either insulated or
of insulating material.
Assembly details are given in the Standard Drawings (Section 11 - Folios 40 & 41).
3.7.1.5. Staying arrangements
Dimensioning, material to be used and the different methods of installation for staying
arrangements are given in the Standard Drawings (Section 10 – Folios 1 to 5 & 10
to 13).
3.7.2. Fittings and accessories for LV lines
 General
The parts should be of first class material, well constructed and free from pointed
and sharp edges. The surfaces to be in contact with the conductor must be
sufficiently smooth so as not to damage the latter. The assembly consist of a
minimum number of parts and should be supplied complete with bolts, nuts,
washer, pins, etc… so that the assembling process is easy, quick and safe.
 Assemblies
Drawings of different assemblies are given in the Standard Drawings (Section 11 -
Folios 30 to 33); these drawings have to be considered as indicative.
 Connectors for line tap-off, service line connection or neutral messenger earthing
1) Main and tap cable : insulated aluminium
 insulation piercing connector type, allowing live line work;
 insulating body highly climatic and mechanically resistant;
 watertight withstanding 6 kV flashover in water;
 tightening shear head screw treated against corrosion; once shear head is
broken, removal remains possible;
 set formed by parts that can't be lost.
2) Main cable : bare aluminium / tap cable : insulated aluminium
 tightening connector type equipped with pressure plates ensuring the quality
of electrical contact; insulated conductors of tap cable should be stripped of.
 single piece body, treated against corrosion and formed by parts (namely the
screws) that can't be lost.
JMED/4NT/3210/000/01/CM
Final Ed. 01-12-19
52
3) Main cable : insulated aluminium / tap cable : bare aluminium or copper

 insulation piercing type for main cable and tightening type, equipped with
pressure plate ensuring the quality of electrical connection, for tap cable;
 single piece body, treated against corrosion and formed by parts that can't be
lost.
 allowing bimetallic connection;
 tightening shear head screw treated against corrosion; once shear head is
broken, removal remains possible;
 protection of connection by shroud made of flexible weather resistant PVC,
neutral grease filled.
 Anchoring and suspension assemblies for insulated twisted cables
1) Assemblies characteristics
 suspension clamp assembly consists of a bracket, a movable link system and
a suspension clamp for the neutral messenger; the suspension clamp is fitted
with a locking and clamping device; the movable link system allows a
transversal and longitudinal movement of the suspension body clamp;
 simple or double anchoring assembly consists of a bracket, one or two
removable articulated ring(s) and one or two strain clamp(s) of conical
wedging type for the neutral messenger; articulated rings are fitted with
locking device on the clamp body;
 movable parts and the parts in contact with insulating sheath of conductors
or neutral messenger, should either be made of insulating material of high
mechanical, climatic and ageing resistance, or be fitted with a sheath made
of insulating plastic material of high climatic and ageing resistance;
 parts of suspension or anchoring clamps in contact with insulating sheath of
conductors or neutral messenger should ensure tightening without any risk
of sheath damage;
 fixed parts, as suspension or anchoring brackets, should be made of
aluminium allow or hot-dipped galvanised steel;
 suspension or anchoring assemblies may be fixed by means of stainless steel
straps or may be bolted to the pole, according to the type of support used.
2) Mechanical strength
The safety factor must always be at the minimum 2, with regard to the
maximum strain exerted by the cable on the suspension or anchoring assembly.
JMED/4NT/3210/000/01/CM
Final Ed. 01-12-19
53
3) Dielectric strength
When supports are used both for MV and LV lines, anchoring and fixing
devices of twisted cables should withstand 6 kV between metallic part of fixing
device and insulated part of the same, in contact with the insulating sheath of
the cable.
 Fixing and mechanical protection devices for insulated twisted cables
1) Lines fixed up between poles
The clauses of paragraph 3.7.1.4 above, regarding fixing and mechanical
protection of MV twisted cables, are also applicable to LV insulated twisted
cables.
2) Lines fixed up on façade walls
Installation of cables on walls is realised by means of supporting plugs made of
very high mechanical strength insulating material, eventually reinforced with a
steel rod; plugs are hammered (directly in case of soft material or in drilled
holes in case of hard material) or sealed in the walls; one or two cables are
locked on supports by removable notched straps.
 Anti-untwisting devices for insulated twisted cables
The clauses of paragraph 3.7.1.4 above, regarding anti-untwisting devices for MV
twisted cables, are also applicable to LV insulated twisted cables.
 Compression joints for insulated twisted cables
Pre-insulated aluminium sleeves for phases, aluminium alloy for neutral messenger,
covered inside with contact grease; insulation continuity of cable is ensure by a
sheath resistant to compression and water-tightness joints withstanding 6 kV for
one minute in water.
 End caps for insulated twisted cables
Ends of insulated twisted cables should be fitted with heat shrinkable caps, covered
inside with water-tightness compound.
 Vertical fittings for bare lines
This fitting consists of five anchoring or suspension devices directly fixed on the
line support; drawings of mainly used assemblies are given in the Standard
Drawings (Section 2 - Folios 1 & 2).
 Galvanising
The clauses of paragraph 3.7.1.3 - 12 above are applicable to all ferrous parts,
except the stainless steel ones.
JMED/4NT/3210/000/01/CM
Final Ed. 01-12-19
54
4. Construction of MV lines
4.1. Description of works
The works comprise mainly:

 pegging of lines,
 tree felling or lopping and bush clearing,
 preparing and maintaining of access tracks,
 soil testing (if necessary),
 construction of foundations,
 erection of poles,
 de-coiling, pulling, tensioning, adjusting and fixing of conductors or cables,
 earthing works and measurements,
 clearing of site
 tests and measurements after completion of line construction and final inspection,
 commissioning of the lines.
4.2. Pegging
4.2.1. Verification of line profile
It is to be ensured that while pegging the setting out which has been previously
established is correct and if need be corrected.
After verification, the location of all the supports is finalised.
4.2.2. Location of supports
The location of the supports is done on site by means of numbered wooden pegs.
In-line supports are located with a centre peg, yellow coloured, and with two red
coloured pegs in the direction of the line axis (one on each side of the centre peg at
around 10 m); in similar way, angle supports are oriented with a yellow peg in the
middle and with two red pegs indicating the two directions of the line.
4.3. Tree felling or lopping - creating access
a) Lines outside built-up areas

The works comprise:
JMED/4NT/3210/000/01/CM
Final Ed. 01-12-19
55
- bush clearing, weeding and trees felling, without stub removal, on either side of
the line axis, on a width which depends on the sag of each span and on the
swinging angle of the conductors; outside this trench, any tree whose height
+ 2 m is equal to the distance between the feet of the tree and the vertical plane
passing through the nearest conductor should be felled down to at least 10cm
above the soil and burnt or put away at least 15 m of the line axis.
- necessary lopping in plantations (see b hereafter).
In cultivated areas, damage to the cultivation should as far as possible be avoided.
Tree stubs and bushes may be left on site as long as they do not hinder the normal
progress of work.
If necessary, access tracks to the supports shall be created, then maintained such as
to be suitable for motor vehicles until commissioning of the line. These tracks
should be sufficiently levelled and cleared of vegetation.
b) Lines inside built-up areas
Tree felling is principally limited to lopping to allow free hanging zones around the
line conductors in the most unfavourable wind conditions.
Tree branches overhanging in the security zone are systematically cleared. The
rubbish from the tree lopping should be carted away outside the site.
4.4. Foundation construction

4.4.1. Type and choice of foundations
Two different types of foundation have to be considered for the MT/BT network
supports:
 block concrete foundations of the "cast" type (calculated up to earth abutment -
concrete directly poured in the soil, without formwork),
 stoned foundation (support fixed by means of two rings of stones).
The following choices are recommended:
 LV network - wooden or concrete pole
- good soil : stoned foundation
- bad soil : concrete block foundation
 MV network - Concrete pole
- all type of soil : block concrete foundation.
JMED/4NT/3210/000/01/CM
Final Ed. 01-12-19
56
4.4.2. Block concrete foundations
4.4.2.1. Excavation
Excavations for pole foundations are made to the sizes shown on the foundation
drawings. The excavation walls are as vertical as possible, though in certain cases a
certain slope may be acceptable in order to prevent wall crumbling or collapse.
For excavations in rocky soil (i.e. soil in place that cannot be attacked manually), picks
or pick hammers shall be used), and any loose rock shall be removed.
In case, there is accumulation of mud in the excavations, the former should be removed
and replaced by a stabilised layer of sand, compacted gravel or low density concrete.
4.4.2.2. Concrete quality (refer also to Chapter 15)
 850 1 of washed gravel (4/16 or 4/32), or crushed porphyry rock;

 400 1 of medium-grained sand;
 350 kg of blast-furnace HK cement, resistance class 40.
4.4.2.3. Execution
These foundations being calculated to abut directly against the soil walls of the
excavation, the concrete will be placed directly against these walls. If necessary the
excavation shall be shored up in order to avoid excavation wall collapse. The concrete
block shall always extend beyond the bottom of the pole.
Using forms is forbidden
The upper surface of the bloc is to be properly smoothed and raised to the inside such
as to prevent stagnation of water.
4.4.2.4. Calculation of concrete foundations
A software is available for the calculation of block concrete foundations for MV/LV
line support (Program Focal.xls);
The users guide of this software is given in appendix A.4.2/1.
4.4.3. Stoned foundations
4.4.3.1. Excavation
Excavations are carried out with an auger, or with a digging machine. In case an auger
is used, the diameter of the hole should be greater than or equal to 2,5 times the
diameter of the pole at the base, with a minimum distance of 0,2 m between the pole
and the border of the excavation in order to have a proper fixing of the stones at the feet
of the pole.
In case a digging machine is used, the hole should be done in the direction of the line
with a width equal to the diameter of the pole + 0,4 m.
JMED/4NT/3210/000/01/CM
Final Ed. 01-12-19
57
4.4.3.2. Construction of the foundation
In any case, the excavation should be done at a depth equal to the depth of burial of the
pole + 0,10 m; to allow the laying of a concrete slab at the bottom of the hole.
This 10 cm thick concrete slab will have a minimum dimension of the diameter of the
pole + 10 cm.
Wooden poles should be solidly wedged with stones. A ring of stones should be made
at the poles feet and a second at one third of the excavation hole from the top.
The height of the ring should be at least equal to 1,5 times the diameter of the pole.
Stones to be used for the construction of the ring should have a minimum diameter of
5 cm and a maximum diameter of 10 cm.
They should be wedged with a 10 cm diameter steel beetle.
Between each stone layer, the interstices will be filled with a concrete grout until it
overfills.
Once the ring of stone is constructed at the feet of the pole, the excavation should be
filled up to the upper third. This filling will be made with stone powder or 0 to 14 mm
crushed stone, firmly compacted with the beetle which was used for the construction of
the base ring.
The second ring of stone, in the upper third of the hole, will be made as for the base;
the interstices will also be filled with a concrete grout until it overfills.
4.5. Earthing of supports and equipment

4.5.1. What to be earthed
The following should be earthed:

 all metallic poles and towers,
 metallic consoles of line mounted on wooden or concrete pole,
 metallic support of every types of equipment, such as isolator switches, overhead
distribution stations, etc…,
 all metallic accessible parts normally non conducting, including downstream
terminals of surge arrestors installed on earthed support,
 for insulated twisted cables, the messenger should be earthed at each extremities of
the line; the screens of the phase cables should be earthed at line extremities and at
least every kilometre (right from a junction).
4.5.2. Earth resistance value to be respected
a) for the supports with no special equipment, no minimal individual resistance value
is needed.
b) For supports with distribution transformer, ABIS, isolating switch, surge
arrestors,… the earth resistance should be at most 30 Ohms.
JMED/4NT/3210/000/01/CM
Final Ed. 01-12-19
58
4.5.3. Earthing execution
4.5.3.1. Installation materials
Earthing electrodes are carried out with galvanised cross-rods or steel plates with
adequate bi-metallic connections, or with Copperweld type rods (or similar rods) fitted
also with adequate connections. The rod should have a minimum sectional diameter of
19 mm and the sectional area of the copper should be at least equal to 20 % of the steel
section. Standard dimensions are 600 x 600 x 5 mm and 900 x 900 x 5 mm for steel
plates.
The steel plates are vertically mounted in the soil. The rods are directly buried in the
soil, in a vertical position and at about 0,5 m of the foundation; the head of the rods
should be at least at 0,5 m below soil level.
Care should be taken that the head of the rods is well protected against any deformation
during hammering of the earth rods.
Each plate or rod are linked underground to the neighbouring element or to the support
by a copper conductor of at least 25 mm² cross-section.
The supports and mass formed by the equipment are linked down to the earthing
electrodes by a copper conductor of at least 25 mm² cross-section, mechanically
protected at least 2 m above and 0,5 m under the soil level; the mechanical protection
device is fixed to the support with stainless steel tapes; the descending conductor is
fixed every 0.5 m along the support, above the mechanical protection device, with
adequate ties and stainless steel tapes.
The standard drawings deal with the principles and details of support or mass earthing
on concrete or wooden poles (Section 12).
4.5.3.2. Minimum number of earth plates or rods
The minimum number of earth plates or rods per earthing unit, is fixed as follows:
 steel galvanised plate : 1
 earth rod : 2
4.5.3.3. Special case - Counterweight
When the nature of the soil (presence of compact rocks for instance) do not favour the
use of earth plates or rods, or when the resistivity of the soil is very high, earthing of
the support is made or enhanced by means of counterweight formed of copper wire of
25 mm² minimum cross-section or tape, Copperweld type or similar, of 40 % minimum
conductibility and 50 mm² minimum cross-section.
Generally, two counterweights are installed per support; they are laid in trenches
parallel to the axis of the line, at minimum depth of 0.5 m under soil level. The 0,5 m
depth can be reduced to 0.3 m in rocky soils. In agricultural lands, this depth should be
1 m.
The length of the counter weights is related to the earth resistance to be achieved.
JMED/4NT/3210/000/01/CM
Final Ed. 01-12-19
59
4.5.4. Measurement of the earthing resistance value of a support
After installation of the theoretical number of plates, rods or counter weights,

measurement of the earthing resistance is carried out.
If the measured value exceeds the prescribed one, the earth resistance should be
improved by adding of rods and/or counterweights.
Measurement of earthing resistance, even after enhancement, should be carried out
before cable installation.
4.6. Erection of supports

4.6.1. Transport, handling and checking of poles - general
Transport and handling of support will be exclusively made with special engines
adapted to these operations; before use, these engines should be verified and tested.
At reception of the support on site, it should be verified that they are supplied in perfect
state; all support showing any signs of defect following transportation or handling,
should be systematically refused. All necessary measures should be taken to prevent the
support from staying in water and in mud on site.
During handling on site, all necessary protective measures should be taken to prevent
any damage to the supports.
The supplier of the poles should forward precise information relative to the handling
and erection of the poles. These instructions should be strictly followed and all useful
precautions should be taken to prevent any damage to the poles, especially cracking.
Particularly when a pole is laid on the ground, it is always a narrow surface, which is
exposed to the ground; in this position, no rotation of the pole should be made about its
axis.
The poles should be handled with a crane or pulley and raised by a sling. The slings
should be recovered with polyester or nylon.
Unless special circumstances, poles should be erected such that the plane of highest
resistance to rupture is perpendicular to the axis of the line for alignment poles and
should be perpendicular to the bisector of the angle formed by the line axis for angular
poles.
After staying, if needs be, and anchoring of cables, in no wind conditions, the deviation
between the centre of the top of the pole and the vertical through the centre of the base
of the pole, in the soil, should not go beyond:
- for alignment poles
 0,25 % of the height above ground, in the direction perpendicular to the line
 0,50 % of the same height, in the direction parallel to the line
JMED/4NT/3210/000/01/CM
Final Ed. 01-12-19
60
- for angular and end poles

 1 % of the height above ground, in the direction of the resultant of the forces
due to the cables
Angular and end poles will be erected with a counter sag in the direction of the
resultant of the forces due to the cables, in order to compensate adequately for the
elastic deformation due to forces in the cable.
4.6.3. Wooden poles
During erection, poles should in no case be allowed to be dragged on the soil; it is also
forbidden to dump the poles directly from the coach or tow; the poles should be
handled with a crane or pulley and raised by a sling; the slings should be of large band
polyester; forklifts should not be used, unless using an intermediate plank.
If the poles are to be temporarily stored, the following measures should be respected:
 the poles should never be laid directly on the soil,
 the poles should be laid such as to allow air to flow between them,
 the pole should not be exposed to direct sunlight.
 The poles should be erected with their fittings (cross arm, consoles, …) to allow a
perfect positioning of the pole.
After staying, if needs be, and anchoring of cables, in no wind conditions, the deviation
between the centre of the top of the pole and the vertical through the centre of the base
of the pole, in the soil, should not go beyond:
- for alignment poles
 0,5 % of the height above ground, in the direction perpendicular to the line
 0,5 % of the same height, in the direction parallel to the line
- for angular and end poles
 1 % of the height above ground, in the direction of the resultant of the forces
due to the cables.
For the different alignment supports, the fittings should be as far as possible
perpendicular to the axis of the line; the maximum deviation should not go beyond
 1 % of the length of the fitting from the axis of the pole.
Angular poles and terminals poles are erected with counter sag in order to adequately
compensate for the elastic deformation due to the forces in the cables.
4.6.4. Marking of poles
Each support should be marked with a feeder identification and a support number.
These reference marks can be painted using stencils, or realised by means of signal
plates, fixed to the support with stainless steel tapes or with screws for wood.
JMED/4NT/3210/000/01/CM
Final Ed. 01-12-19
61
4.7. Assembly of line fittings, insulators and accessories

4.7.1. Installation of fittings , insulators and accessories
Fittings, insulators and accessories are installed according to the instructions of the
pegging record.
4.7.2. Assembly and installation of fittings for bare conductors
The fittings are assembled according to the supplier‟s assembly plans and instructions.
No defective material should be used. Any insulator showing slightest flake should not
be used in the chain or console. All the insulators should be free of traces of mud or
other spots, on installing.
The galvanised fitting material are handled and installed such as to maintain this
material in perfect state and to prevent any deformation of the any parts.
Bolts are to be tightened with dynamometric keys adjusted according to the
manufacturer instructions.
4.7.3. Assembly and installation of fittings for twisted cables
The fittings used for fixing twisted cables should be installed according to the
supplier‟s instructions.
Special care should be taken during assembly of the materials, particularly for the
plastic parts.
Generally, the opening of the suspension clamps is oriented towards the face of the
support.
All bolts are to be tightened with a dynamometric key.
Between the insulated cable and the anchor clamp, water-tightness should be ensured as
per manufacturer‟s instructions.
4.7.4. Standard drawings
Guidelines for construction of lines in relation to the use of different types of fittings
for the fixing of the lines are given in the Standard Drawings (Sections 1 to 11).
4.8. Pulling, tensioning, adjustment and fixing of conductors and cables

4.8.1. Pulling and tensioning of cables and conductors
Protection of drums during storage, handling and transport should be such that, at the
moment of pulling, the drums are not spoilt and the conductors or cables are not
damaged.
If necessary protective gantries would be installed for the passage above habitations,
roads, medium and low voltage lines and other obstacles; arrangements to be taken
during work (clearance, supervision, modification, etc…) should be made according to
the administration authority or to the concerned private client.
JMED/4NT/3210/000/01/CM
Final Ed. 01-12-19
62
Decoiling and pulling of conductors or cables should be made with braked winch
(decoiling under tension).
During all the pulling operation, the conductors or cables should be constantly held
above the soil, or other surfaces and obstacles, with an appropriate tension applied to
these conductors or cables when decoiling under tension.
At the supports, the conductors or cables lie on pulleys with ball bearings, having an
effective diameter of 25 times the diameter of the conductor or cable; the form, the
width, the nature of the metal and the state of the surface of the groove are such that the
cables or conductors are efficiently protected against potential factors causing scratch.
It is forbidden to use pulleys with aluminium groove for the pulling of steel cables or
connections.
Use of pulleys containing copper, or which have been used for pulling copper
conductors, is forbidden for decoiling of conductors with an outer layer containing
aluminium or aluminium alloy.
For pulling of insulated twisted cables, the traction effort should be only tied on the
messenger via a sock. The three conductors should be tied to the messenger via a
second sock independent of the one transmitting the traction effort. Decoiling is made
using pulleys which are specially designed for this type of cables, principally as
concern to the diameter of the groove and the radius of the pulleys, which should be
superior to the bending radius of the twisted cable.
Tension in the conductors or cables at drum's outlet should not be beyond that specified
by the supplier. The tension should be able to be controlled from a permanent indicator
of the braker.
Unless tightened at the ends of conductors to be sacrificed, the pulling clamps should
be of the parallel jaws type and of smooth contact surface without undulation; they
should be long enough to ensure tensioning of the conductor without folding, notching
or sliding of the cables wires, as well as without relative sliding of the steel core
embedded with grease.
Cables or conductors are not to be picked up with tools witch have a low bending
radius or witch are of the nature to hurt the cables; the curvature of the contact surfaces
should be at least equal to those used for the pulleys.
For the insulated twisted cables, any section showing any sign of damage should be
eliminated.
For the bare conductors also, any section showing any sign of damage should be
normally eliminated; however, if there is less than 3 wires damaged, the conductor may
be repaired with an appropriate sleeve.
Remnants of bare conductors of less than 100 m are not used in between lines; they
may be used for splicing in case of compression anchor clamps. As far as possible,
splicing is done with the first layers of conductors of a drum, which has not been
through the braker.
JMED/4NT/3210/000/01/CM
Final Ed. 01-12-19
63
4.8.2. Making of joints and anchor clamps
Joints and anchor clamps, of compression type or bolt tightened, are made according to
the suppliers instructions such as to ensure the guaranteed electrical conductivity and a
mechanical resistance of the stressed parts at least = 95% of the cables or conductors
theoretical breaking load.
There should not be more than one joint per cable and per span, and there should not be
a joint at less than 5 m of the closest anchoring set. There should neither be any joint in
important crossings such as motorway, lakes, ravine, rivers, etc…
4.8.3. Adjustment of cables and conductors
Adjustment is made separately for each laying section, separated by supports fitted with
anchor chains following a predefined sagging chart. Intermediate adjustment are
needed each time it is not possible to guarantee uniformity in the horizontal component
of the tension between each span due to unevenness or due to a large number of spans
in the section.
In each adjustment, it should be ensured that all the conductors are managed as
uniformly as possible, so that they have further the same creep.
Pulling operations under mechanical tension and adjustment should be done without
never overload the supports. In this sense, it should become necessary to stay
temporarily some support and/or support console, which was not designed for such
stresses to be met during erection. However, this type of operation should be limited to
a strict minimum to essential cases.
Besides, tension applied to conductors or cables should not be beyond what is specified
in the sagging chart; in fact the latter is calculated by taking into consideration that the
cable undergo some creep due to the stresses it undergoes after laying.
The conductors or cables are adjusted according to their temperature. To find out this
temperature, the following should be set up:
 a thermometer should be inserted at the end of the conductor or cable to find out the
internal temperature,
 the whole equipment should be sufficiently far from the soil to prevent thermal
radiation from the soil to affect the results; the sample should be horizontally set,
parallel to the cables or conductors and sufficiently far from the support.
The sagging charts should give the horizontal component of the tension to be applied in
the cables or conductors, as well as the maximum sags, according to the mean span and
the temperature. The mean span for each adjusting section is calculated on the bases of
the real spans measured and recorded previously. The adjusting span in a section is the
closest span to the mean span.
It is advisable to end all adjustment operations on the same day, for all cables or
conductors of the same laying section.
After adjustment, the cable or conductors are maintained under tension for 48 hours at
least. After that, the adjustment is verified and the cables or conductors are definitely
fixed to the support after possible correction to the sag.
JMED/4NT/3210/000/01/CM
Final Ed. 01-12-19
64
The sag of the cables or conductors should be verified with a theodolite, in two span at
least per laying section, sufficiently separated from each other to be able to check the
uniformity of the tension.
4.8.4. Making of splices
Splices of anchor equipment are made with sections of conductors, which have not
been through a decoiling-braker equipment.
They are designed to respect the following distances:
- the depth of the splice, at rest, with respect to the console is between 1,5 and 1,6 dm
(dm being the minimum clearance to the mass),
- the minimum clearance between the splice and the mass and between the ball of the
first isolator located on the side of the mass is at least 1,1 dm.
4.8.5. Complementary provisions for erection of twisted insulated cables
 On aligned poles, the cable is suspended by its messenger, still insulated, by means of
an appropriate suspension set.
 At terminal or angle positions, the cable is maintained in position by its messenger, still
insulated, by means of a simple or a double anchoring set; continuity of the messenger
is ensured by an insulated copper bridge.
 Untwisted cable ties (cable straps) are placed at both sides of suspension and anchoring
sets, at joints and at any other location where necessary.
 Joints and tap-off boxes should necessarily be done at poles fitted with anchoring sets;
they are set and fixed on a specially designed cradle, which is fixed to the support at a
height less than the anchor point.
 Joints and tap-off boxes are made with great care by specialised personnel and strictly
according to the supplier‟s instructions.
 Fixing and protection: the descending conductors are fixed to the support every 30cm
with appropriate ties and stainless steel tapes; the cables are furthermore protected by a
metallic protection as it enter into the ground; this protection extend from at least 50 cm
below the soil level to at least 2 m below soil level and is fixed to the support with
stainless steel tapes; in the case of a concrete foundation, a elbowed tube is embedded in
the concrete and extend below the foundation into the soil and above the ground level
where the end of the tube is covered by the metallic protection.
 Connections to a distribution transformer, connections to bare conductors and overhead
to underground connections are to be made according to the Standard Drawings
(Section 4 – Folios 1 & 2 / Section 6 – Folios 20 to 26).
JMED/4NT/3210/000/01/CM
Final Ed. 01-12-19
65
4.9. Testing – Measurements - Final inspection - commissioning

4.9.1. Testing and measurements
At the end of the work the following measurements and electric tests are carried out:
 Measurement of line insulation (with Megger 5000 V).
 Measurement of line resistance to dc current.
 Measurement of line resistance to ac current.
 Measurement of operation reactance and impedance.
 Measurement of phase to earth reactance and impedance
 Dielectric test for the twisted insulated cables.
4.9.2. Inspection of lines - commissioning
Before commissioning of lines, a final inspection, consisting in a general examination

of lines and a thorough examination of a limited number of poles, is carried out.
4.9.3. Testing and commissioning report
The measures (including earthing measurements), tests, checks and verifications, and
the commissioning, form part of an official testing and commissioning report.
JMED/4NT/3210/000/01/CM
Final Ed. 01-12-19
66
5. Construction of LV Lines
5.1. General
The LV overhead lines can be presented on three different ways depending on their
nature and the way they are supported:
 bare cables installed between poles,
 insulated twisted cables installed on walls,
 insulated twisted cables installed between poles.
The lines shall generally be installed between poles; however, at certain places, the
insulated twisted cables can be installed on walls whenever the following conditions are
met:
 the walls are regularly situated abreast roads or at no more than 2 m recessed from
the road,
 the distance in between the neighbouring walls do not exceed 10 m,
 the height of the walls is such that the twisted cables can be fixed at a minimum of
4 m above the natural ground level.
The works comprise mainly:

 pegging of lines,
 tree lopping,
 soil testing (if needed),
 construction of foundations,
 erection of poles,
 decoiling, pulling, adjusting, tensioning and fixing of cables,
 clearing of site,
 tests and measurements after completion of line construction and final inspection,
 commissioning of the lines.
5.3. Pegging
It should be ensured that while pegging the setting out which has been previously
established is correct and if need be corrected.
JMED/4NT/3210/000/01/CM
Final Ed. 01-12-19
67
After setting out, the definite position of the poles are established; the angle and end
poles are localised on the field with the help of numbered timber pegs; the aligned
poles are spotted by painted marks.
5.4. Tree lopping

The works comprise tree lopping to allow free hanging zones around the cable in the
most unfavourable wind conditions.
Felling of trees is limited to strict minimum necessary and this required approval from
the concerned authorities; besides, damage to cultivation and plantations should as per
as possible be avoided.
The rubbish from tree lopping should be carted away.
5.5. Foundation Construction

See 4.4
5.6. Earthing
5.6.1. What to be earthed
The following should be earthed:

a) protective earthing (or frame earthing)
- all metallic equipment enclosures,
- all metallic structures supporting other than mentioned below (1).
b) system earthing
- the neutral of LV lines.
The neutral is earthed as per rules below:
 each 300 m at least,
 at every termination of LV main or branch feeders, whose length exceed 150m,
 at distribution transformers or on the first pole of each LV outgoing feeder,
 as stated before, earthing of LV neutral is not allowed on common MV/LV poles;
when a neutral earthing is theoretically located on a common MV/LV pole,
earthing should be effectively done on the following LV pole,
 if the last feeder pole is common to networks coming out from two different
distribution transformers, earthing should be done on the last but one poles.
Mass formed by metallic structures such as suspension devices, brackets, etc… should
not be earthed (1).
JMED/4NT/3210/000/01/CM
Final Ed. 01-12-19
68
Except in cases where both the values of earthing resistances are less that 1 0hm,
protective earthing and system earthing should always be separated: the minimum
authorised distance between earthing plates or rods of protective and system earthing is
10 m.
5.6.2. Earthing resistance value
No minimum individual value of earthing resistance is imposed; however it is essential

to obtain a global resistance less than:
 5 Ohm for soil of normal resistivity.
 20 Ohm for soil of high resistivity.
5.6.3. Earthing execution
All the clauses of paragraph 4.5.3 are applicable; they are however completed or
modified by the provisions hereunder:
 Principles and details of LV earthing are given in the “Standard Drawings”
document (Section 12).
 The minimum number of earth plates or earth rods is reduced to unity.
 For twisted insulated cables, the connection between the neutral and the descending
conductor is done by means of the following type of connector: drilling of main
cable (neutral) and tightening of branch cable (descending conductor).
 For bare conductors, the connection between the neutral and the descending
conductor is done by means of the following type of connector: tightening of main
and branch cables allowing bi-metallic connection.
5.6.4. Measurement of resistance value
Global earthing resistance measurements are carried out after complete installation of
LV lines.
Value of the global LV neutral earthing resistance means the value resulting from the
connection of all the earthing electrodes of all the feeders coming from the same
distribution transformer.
If the global measured value exceeds the prescribed one, the earthing system should be
improved by adding of rods and/or counterweights.
5.7. Erection of poles

5.7.1. Transport, handling, and checking of poles – General.
See 4.6.1
See 4.6.2
JMED/4NT/3210/000/01/CM
Final Ed. 01-12-19
69
5.7.3. Wood poles
See 4.6.3
5.7.4. Marking of poles
Each pole comprises a reference mark giving line identification and pole number.
These reference marks can be painted, using stencils, or realised by means of signal
plates fixed to the support with stainless steel tapes or by screws for wood.
5.8. Assembly of line fittings

The principle of line assembly in relation to the use of different types of fittings for the
fixing of lines are given in the “Standard Drawings” (Sections 2, 3, 4 & 11).
The material intended to be used for the fixing of insulated cables shall be installed as
per suppliers‟ instructions. A particular care should be taken while installing this
material.
5.9. Pulling, tensioning and fixing of conductors and cables

5.9.1. Pulling and adjustment of cables and conductors
All the clauses of the paragraphs 4.8.1 and 4.8.3 regarding pulling and adjusting of MV
twisted insulated cables, are applicable to LV twisted insulated cables.
All the clauses of paragraph 4.8.1 to 4.8.3 pertaining to pulling and adjustment of bare
conductors are also applicable wherever they are applicable.
5.9.2. Complementary provisions for erection of twisted insulated cables
 On aligned poles, the cable is suspended by its messenger, still insulated, by means
of an appropriate suspension set.
 At terminal or angle positions, the cable is maintained in position by its messenger,
still insulated, by means of a simple or a double anchoring set.
 Tap-off cables are connected to the main cable by means of connectors of the
drilling insulation type. Installation of the connectors is carried out as per supplier
instructions and with a particular care.
 Untwisted cable ties (cable straps) are placed at both sides of suspension or
anchoring sets, of connectors and at any other location where necessary.
 Joints in line shall whenever possible be avoided.
 The ends of cables are fitted with heat shrinkable end caps.
 Fixing and protection : see 4.8.5
JMED/4NT/3210/000/01/CM
Final Ed. 01-12-19
70
5.9.3. Complementary provisions for erection of wall mounted lines
 At anchorage and suspension points, cables shall always be at least 5 cm from

walls.
 The distance in between the suspension points is at a maximum of 5 m.
5.10. Measurements – Final Inspection – Commissioning

5.10.1. Measurements
At the end of the works and before commissioning, the following measurements and
verifications are carried out:
 Measurement of insulation of lines.
 Verification of electrical continuity of lines.
5.10.2. Inspection of lines - commissioning
Before commissioning of lines, a final inspection, consisting in a general examination

of lines and a thorough examination of a limited number of poles, is carried out.
the commissioning, form part of an official testing and commissioning report
JMED/4NT/3210/000/01/CM
Final Ed. 01-12-19
71
6. MV/LV underground cables
6.1. Cable characteristics

6.1.1. Standards and recommendations
Generally, the cables should comply with the latest recommendations of the IEC and
their complements, namely:
 28 Standards for copper resistance.
 60 HV testing techniques.
 183 Guide for the choice of HV cables.
 228 Conductors for insulated cables.
 230 Surge test techniques for cables and their accessories
 287 Calculation of permanent admissible currents in cables.
 391 Identification of insulated conductors.
 446 Identification by colours of insulated cables.
 502 1 to 30 kV power cables with extruded insulation.
 540 and 811 Test methods for the insulation and screens of electrical cables.
6.1.2.1. MV power cables
MV power cables should be of XLPE insulation type

- single-core, stranded copper or aluminium conductor, semi-conductor screened,
cross-linked polyethylene insulated, semi-conductive core-screen, copper tape
earth screened, and PVC overall insulated,
- three-core, stranded copper or aluminium conductor, semi-conductor screened,
earth screened, armoured with galvanised steel wires or tape and PVC overall
insulated.
The structure of the cables shall comply with IEC 502 recommendations.
6.1.2.2. LV power cables
LV power cables should be of XLPE insulation type

- single-core, stranded copper or aluminium conductor, cross-linked polyethylene
insulated black PVC sheathed overall,
JMED/4NT/3210/000/01/CM
Final Ed. 01-12-19
72
- three-core, stranded copper or aluminium conductor, cross-linked polyethylene

insulated, PVC sheathed, single galvanised wire armoured black PVC sheathed
overall.
If required, there will be also a neutral or protective conductor under the outer sheath of
the cable.
The cable structure will comply with IEC 502 recommendations.
6.1.3. External sheath, identification of cables and marking of conductors
The external sheath of all types of cables shall contain additives that repel rodents; the
name of the manufacturer, the allowable voltage, the cross-section, the number of
conductors and the date of manufacture shall be indicated along the whole length on the
external sheath of the cable.
The letters and characters shall be engraved in relief. The distance between the marking
shall not exceed 200 mm.
The insulation of the three-core cables should be differentiated by colours along their
whole length; in the case where a neutral conductor is foreseen, it shall be of blue
colour.
The external insulation sheath of the protective earthing wire (if foreseen) shall be
yellow/green according to IEC 446.
6.1.4. Cable ends
The cable ends shall be impervious to water, dust and insects, and the ends coming out
of cable drums shall be fixed and protected against mechanical shocks while handling.
6.1.5. Transport and handling
The cables shall be coiled in timber drums (treated against termites) or metal drums
(treated to prevent corrosion) so as to obtain maximum possible length. However, the
drums shall have a maximum diameter of 2 400 mm and a maximum weight of
5 000 kg.

The cable laying works include mainly:
 marking of the cable route,
 handling-over of cable drums at stores,
 supply of civil engineering equipment, decoilers, jacks, rolls, etc…,
 transportation of cables drums, accessories and provision of tools on site,
 trenching works and road crossings,
 setting of cable drums, decoiling and laying of cables,
 laying of protection and sign devices,
JMED/4NT/3210/000/01/CM
Final Ed. 01-12-19
73
 execution of joints and terminals,

 backfilling of trench, reinstatement of site and carting away of waste,
 all necessary civil engineering works, particularly for existing work crossings,
 return to store excess materials,
 tests and measurements after completion of works,
 final inspection,
 commissioning.
6.3. Laying of cables

6.3.1. Laying conditions
Generally, the cables are laid:

 directly in the ground, mainly in rural areas,
 in an underground pipe network, mainly in inhabited areas.
Typical trench sections and details of pipe network are given in the Standard Drawings
(Section 13).
6.3.2. Cable laying in the ground
The cables shall be laid at the following depths:

 MV cables 1.0 m
 LV cables 0.7 m
 Service cables 0.4 m
The depth of the cable trench shall be at least 1.10 m for MV cables, 80cm for LV
power cables and 50 cm for service cables; the bottom of excavation shall be carefully
levelled and free of sharp edges that can damage the external sheath of the cables. The
cable are then placed between 2 layers 10 to 15 cm thick fine soil free of rocks or sand
free of dusts, having thermal characteristics that can give a thermal resistivity of 1.5
kW/m; these backfilled layers shall be carefully compacted.
6.3.3. Underground pipe network
The network shall comprise PVC pipes, equipped with adequate couplings.
The internal diameter of the pipes should be greater than twice the diameter of the cable
placed in the pipe (twice the diameter of the circle circumscribed by the cable in the
case of twisted cable); each three or four-core cable is placed individually.
JMED/4NT/3210/000/01/CM
Final Ed. 01-12-19
74
If necessary, inspection or draw pits shall be constructed along the pipe network
(rectilinear long distance, change in directions…); they should be constructed
according to the specifications of chapter 15.
6.3.4. Laying and pulling of cables
The placing of cables should be carried out very carefully; the cable drums are placed
on uncoiling devices or jacks; the pulling is done preferably manually; nevertheless,
mechanical uncoiling is authorised under the condition that dynamometers are used to
control the mechanical pulling forces.
For laying directly on ground, during the decoiling process, the cable is placed on roller
bearings to prevent dragging on the ground surface or at the bottom of the excavation
trench.
For the laying of cables in pipes, all the precautions should be taken to prevent heating
of cables due to rubbing during the pulling process in the pipes and damage of cables at
the entry of the pipes.
6.3.5. Bending radius
The bending radius should be rigorously adhered to, even during handling in the laying
process.
In the absence of precise indication, the bending radius of a cable should never be less
than 10 times its diameter.
6.3.6. Works crossing
For crossing of existing civil engineering works such as roads, drains or sewer lines,
etc., the works are carried out perpendicular to the axis of the existing works; the cables
are placed in sleeves as described at section 6.3.3 above.
Pipes shall be embedded in a concrete jacket as per typical sections given in “Standards
Drawings”.
For crossing of rivers or watercourses, the pipes shall be preferably in metal,
adequately protected against corrosion, and shall be placed into the bridges or fixed
therein.
6.3.7. Exit from ground
On vertical exit from ground, cables shall be protected from 50 cm below the ground
level up to the entry of the equipment or up to at least 2m above the ground level in
galvanised steel pipes or metallic pre-formed sleeves, well fixed on the pole or to the
external wall surface; if the wall surface is internal, then the length of mechanical
protection outside the ground level is reduced by 0.5 m.
6.3.8. Execution of terminals and joints
The technology pertaining to joints and terminal boxes for cables with synthetic
insulation is detailed in Appendix A.3.4/1.
Joints and terminals are executed very carefully by specialist staff; the supplier‟s
instructions should be strictly followed.
JMED/4NT/3210/000/01/CM
Final Ed. 01-12-19
75
6.3.9. Warning slabs
Concrete slabs of 4cm thickness are placed on top of the layer of selected backfill or on
top of the concrete jacket.
6.3.10. Warning tape
Yellow plastic warning tapes should be placed along the whole length of the trench
excavation, between 20 and 30 cm below the ground level.
6.3.11. Backfilling of trench
Backfilling shall be carried out using excavated material in layers of 15 cm thickness,

each layer being well compacted.
6.3.12. Warning sign devices on ground surface
Underground cable networks are spotted on the ground surface by means of concrete
milestones, shaped parallelepiped or truncated and having the following minimum
dimensions:
 height :: 50 cm
 base : 10 x 10 cm
The milestones are buried straight up the cable or along the axis of the trench enclosing
several cables.
The top surface of the milestone shall be flush with the pavement and project above
ground level by 10 cm in case the footpath is not well defined or non-existent.
The following information are imprinted on the upper face of the milestones, in the
mould during pouring:
 MV milestone : CEB - MV
 LV milestone : CEB - LV
Location of the milestones:
 at every change in direction,
 at every extremity of road crossings, straight up each joint or branch-off,
 every 100m in alignment.
6.3.13. Reinstatement of site
At the completion of cable laying works, the excess excavated materials and the wastes
are carted away; all the necessary reinstate works are carried out (casting of pavement
slabs, resurfacing of roads, etc…..).
6.3.14. Identifying of cables
The identifying of the cables include the serial number of the cable or the feeder, the
service voltage, the type and the cross-section of the cable.
JMED/4NT/3210/000/01/CM
Final Ed. 01-12-19
76
The indication plates are made up of aluminium, pressed printed, or of prefabricated

PVC plates, fixed to the cables by means of notched straps.
The cables are identified at their ends, in inspection or draw pits and every 20 m in the
ground.
6.4. Earthing of cables

6.4.1. MV / LV armoured cables
The metallic sheaths of the cables should be connected to the protective earthing
system at one of their ends.
6.4.2. MV twisted cables
The metallic sheath of the insulated conductors and the earth-wire of the twisted cables
should be earthed at the end of the line and at every joint.
6.4.3. Earthing system installation
For the installation of the earthing system, the provisions of paragraph 4.5.3 are
applicable, except for any contradictions.
However the minimum number of earth plates, earth cross-rods or earth rods carried out
per earthing electrode is limited to one.
6.4.4. Earthing resistance value and measurement
No minimum individual value of earth resistance is imposed; however, it is imperative

to obtain, for MV mix-networks (overhead + underground), a global earthing resistance
below:
 5 ohms in ground of normal resistivity,
 20 ohms in ground of higher resistivity.
The measurement of global values of earth resistance are carried out after the laying of
the underground cables; if the global value measured exceeds the prescribed value, the
earthing system has to be improved by addition of rods or counterweight.
6.5. Measurements and testing - final inspection - commissioning

6.5.1. Measurements et testing
After completion of the works and before commissioning, the following measurements,
testing and verifications are carried out:
 measurement of the insulation resistance of feeders,
 verification of the electrical continuity of the feeders,
 pressure test for MV cables,
JMED/4NT/3210/000/01/CM
Final Ed. 01-12-19
77
6.5.2. Final inspection and commissioning
Before commissioning of the underground cables, a final inspection, which comprises a

general examination of the setting out of the cable is carried out.
the commissioning, form part of an official testing and commissioning report.
JMED/4NT/3210/000/01/CM
Final Ed. 01-12-19
78
7. Transformers
7.1. Standards and recommendations

The transformers should comply with BS Standards and with the latest IEC
recommendations including their complements, namely;
 BS 171 Specification for Power Transformers
 BS 148 Specification for unused mineral insulating oils for transformers
and switchgears
 CEI 71 Coordination of insulation
 CEI 74 Insulating oil stability oxidation tests
 CEI 76 Power transformers
 76.3 General
 76.2 Temperature rise
 76.3 Insulating and dielectric tests
 76.4 Terminals and connections
 76.5 Short-circuit withstand
 CEI 137 Insulated bushings for a.c. voltages greater than 1 000V
 CEI 214 On load tape changer
 CEI 296 Specifications for insulating oil for transformers
 CEI 354 Loading instructions for oil immersed transformers
 CEI 404 Magnetic parts
 CEI 542 Users guide for on load tape changer
 CEI 551 Noise level tests for oil immersed transformers
 CEI 616 Labelling of terminals and connections of power transformers
7.2. Design and manufacture

7.2.1. Power transformers
1) Type of transformers and Operating Conditions

All transformers shall be of the core type and shall be suitable for outdoor
installation.
JMED/4NT/3210/000/01/CM
Final Ed. 01-12-19
79
Transformers with forced cooling shall be capable of remaining in operation at full

load for 10 minutes after failure of the oil circulating pumps or blowers, without
injurious heating.
Where transformers are designed for forced cooling, but are initially supplied only
with natural oil cooling, provision shall be made for adding the cooling plant at a
later date, if required to increase the output of the transformers.
All transformers shall be provided with conservator vessels.
2) Continuous Maximum Rating and Overloads
The continuous maximum rating specified shall apply at the ambient temperatures
given in paragraph 1.3.1 – “Climatic conditions” above.
Means shall be provided to initiate operation and cancellation of the forced cooling
equipment.
All transformers and their ancillary equipment shall comply with the temperature
rise limits specified in the standards here above when operating under ONAN and
ONAF conditions on any tapping position and at the overloads and/or over voltages
implicit by virtue of compliance with the appropriate Code of Practice.
3) Electrical Connections
Transformers shall be connected in accordance with the Groups Symbol specified.
Tappings shall be provided to give an alternative ratio of transformation. When
specified on-load tap-changing equipment shall be provided which shall be comply
with the appropriate standards.
Transformers with alternative ratios of transformation shall be capable of
withstanding the voltage tests specified, for the most severe condition.
Bushing insulators be mounted on transformer tanks so that the HV and LV
connections can be taken away horizontally clear of all obstacles.
4) Duty Under Fault Conditions
Except where modified below, it is to be assumed that the amount of generating
plant simultaneously connected is such that normal voltage will be maintained on
one side of any transformer when there is a short circuit between phases or to earth
on the other side. Any transformer may be directly connected to an underground or
overhead transmission line and switched into and out of service together with its
associated transmission line.
All transformers shall be capable of withstanding for 3 seconds without damage any
short circuit between phases on any terminals and any external short circuit from
any terminal to earth with the neutrals of the transformer directly earthed.
5) Flux Density
Unless otherwise agreed, the magnetic circuit shall be cold rolled grain oriented
sheet steel.
JMED/4NT/3210/000/01/CM
Final Ed. 01-12-19
80
Under exceptional conditions of complete loss of load the primary windings may be
subjected to an increase in voltage of 25 %, which may be sustained for a few
seconds. The transformer under such circumstances shall be not suffer any injurious
heating.
6) Vibration and Noise
Every care shall be taken to ensure that the design and manufacture of transformers
and auxiliary plant shall be such as to reduce noise and vibration to the level of that
obtained in good modern practice.
7) Suppression of Harmonics
The transformers shall be designed with particular attention to the suppression of
harmonic voltages, especially the third and fifth, so as to eliminate wave from
distortion and any possibility of high frequency disturbances, inductive effects or of
circulating currents between the neutral points at different transforming stations
reaching such a magnitude as to cause interference with communication circuits.
8) Magnetic Circuit
The design of the magnetic circuit shall be such as to avoid static discharges and
development of short circuit paths within itself or to the earthed clamping structure
and the production of flux components at right angles to the plane of the
laminations which may cause local heating.
Where the magnetic circuit is divided into packets by cooling ducts parallel to the
plane of the laminations or by insulating material above 0.25 mm thick, tinned
copper strip bridging pieces shall be inserted to maintain electrical continuity
between packets.
The magnetic circuit shall be earthed through a link as specified below. With the
link removed the magnetic circuit shall be insulated from all structural parts so as to
withstand the tests specified and shall subsequently be earthed.
9) Mechanical Construction of Cores
Care shall be exercised in the selection, treatment and handling of the core steel to
ensure that as far as possible laminations are flat and the finally assembled core is
free from distortion. Particular care shall be taken to secure even mechanical
pressure over the laminations, to prevent subsequent settling of the core and to
reduce noise and vibration during operation.
All parts of the cores shall be of robust design capable of withstanding any shocks
to which they may be subjected during lifting, transport, installation and service.
All structural members of the assembled cores shall be of steel.
All castings shall be trimmed and structural steel adequately cleaned and painted
before being built into the structure.
Adequate fitments shall be provided to enable the core and windings to be lifted.
JMED/4NT/3210/000/01/CM
Final Ed. 01-12-19
81
Suitable accommodation, attached to the transformers, shall be provided for the

storage of any removable portions of the lifting arrangements.
Adequate provision shall be made to prevent movement of any part of the
transformer relative to the tank during transport and installation or while in service.
The supporting framework of the cores shall be so designed as to avoid the presence
of pockets which would prevent complete emptying of the tank through the drain
valve, or cause trapping of air during filling.
10) Windings - General
All windings and connections shall be fully insulated and the insulation shall be
free from insulation composition liable to soften, ooze out, shrink or collapse during
service.
Tappings shall be arranged at such positions on the windings as will preserve, as far
as possible, the electromagnetic balance of the transformer at all voltage ratios, but
shall also be positioned with due regard to the impulse voltages which may be
impressed on the windings.
The stacks of windings shall receive adequate shrinkage treatment before final
assembly.
The coil clamping arrangement and the finished dimensions of any oil ducts shall
be such as will not impede the free circulation of oil through the ducts.
No strip conductor wound on edge shall have a width exceeding six times its
thickness.
11) Bracing of Windings
The windings and connections of all transformers shall be braced to withstand
shocks which may occur during transport, or due to switching and other transient
conditions during service.
Coil clamping rings, if provided, shall be of steel or of suitable insulating material
built up from flat laminations. Axially laminated material other than bakelised
paper shall not be used. Where bakelised paper rings are used with the layers of
paper lying in an axial direction, the rings shall only be relied upon to provide the
major insulation between the windings and earth, provided the creepage voltage
stress obtained by dividing the full line voltage by the creepage distance to earth
does not exceed 200 KV/m.
Any metal pieces in contact with laminated rings shall be so designed and secured
that they do not weaken the electrical or the mechanical properties of the rings.
If the transformer winding is built up of sections or disc coils, separated by spacers,
the clamping arrangements shall be such that equal pressure are applied to all
columns of spacers. All such spacers shall be securely located, shall be of suitable
material and shall receive adequate shrinkage treatment before assembly.
JMED/4NT/3210/000/01/CM
Final Ed. 01-12-19
82
12) Internal Earthing Arrangements

All metal parts of the transformer with the exception of the individual core
laminations, core bolts and associated individual clamping plates shall be
maintained at some fixed potential.
The top main core clamping structure shall be connected to the tank body by a
copper strap. The bottom clamping structure shall be earthed by one or more of the
following methods:
- by connection through vertical tie-rods to the top structure.
- by direct metal-to-metal contact with the tank base, maintained by the weight of
the core and windings.
- by connection to the top structure on the same side of the core as the main earth
connection to the tank.
The magnetic circuit shall be earthed to the clamping structure at one point only
through a removable link placed in an accessible position beneath an inspection
opening in the tank cover. The connection to the link shall be on the same side of
the core as the main earth connection and taken from the extreme edge of the top
yoke in close proximity to the bridging pieces referred to above.
Magnetic circuits having an insulated sectional construction shall be provided with
a separate link for each individual section and the arrangement of the connections
shall be subject to approval where oil ducts or insulating barriers parallel to the
plane of the laminations divide the magnetic circuit into two or more electrically
separate parts the ducts or barriers shall be bridged and the magnetic circuit shall
not be regarded as being of sectional construction.
Where coil clamping rings are of metal at earth potential, each ring shall be
connected to the adjacent core clamping structure on the same side of the
transformer as the main earth connection.
All the earthing connections with the exception of those from the individual coil
clamping rings shall have a cross-sectional area of not less than 80 mm².
Connections inserted between laminations may have the cross-sectional area
reduced to 20 mm².
13) Tank Construction
The tanks of all transformers shall be complete with all accessories and shall be
designed so as to allow the complete transformer in the tank and filled with oil, to
be lifted by crane or jacks, transported by road, rail or water without over-straining
any joints and without causing subsequent leakage of oil.
The main tank body excluding tap changing compartments, radiators and coolers
shall be capable of withstanding a vacuum of 70 KN/m2 less than atmospheric
pressure when empty of oil.
JMED/4NT/3210/000/01/CM
Final Ed. 01-12-19
83
Unless otherwise approved, tanks shall be constructed of mild steel plate, the
minimum thickness of which shall be 6 mm for the sides and 10 mm for the bottom
where the longer sides have a horizontal length up to but not exceeding 1.8 metres.
For a horizontal length in excess of 1.8 metres the minimum side plate thickness
shall be 10 mm and the minimum bottom plate thickness 13 mm.
The base of each tank shall be so designed that it shall be possible to move the
complete transformer unit in any direction without injury when using rollers, plates
or rails. A design which necessitates slide rails being placed in a particular position
shall not be used.
Unless specifically approved detachable underbases shall not be used.
The base of the tank shall be of the channel iron construction and it shall be
designed to prevent retention of water.
Tank stiffeners shall be continuously welded to the tank and designed to prevent
retention of water.
Wherever possible the transformer tank and its accessories shall be designed
without pockets wherein gas may collect. Where pockets cannot be avoided pipes
shall be provided to vent the gas into the main expansion pipe. The vent pipes shall
have a minimum inside diameter of 18 mm except for short branch pipes which
may be 6 mm minimum inside diameter.
All joints other than those which may have to be broken shall be welded. Caulking
of defective welded joints will not be permitted. Such defective joints may be re-
welded subject to the written approval.
The under surfaces of the bases of the transformers shall be specially treated with
an approved preservative composition.
14) Tank Lifting and Haulage Facilities
Each tank shall be provided with :
a) Lifting lugs suitable for lifting the transformer complete with oil.
b) A minimum of four jacking lugs, in accessible positions to enable the
transformer complete with oil to be raised or lowered using hydraulic or screw
jacks. The minimum height of the lugs above the base shall be :
- transformers up to and including10 tonnes weight - 300 mm.
- transformers above 10 tonnes weight - 500 mm.
c) Horizontal plates with 50 mm diameter draw holes drilled therein shall be fitted
adjacent to each corner of rectangular tanks at not more than 750 mm from the
base to permit the tank to be hauled in any direction or slewed. On round ended
tanks the draw holes shall be located approximately on the diagonals of the
rectangle formed by the overall boundaries of the tank. At least 100 mm free
working space shall be provided above and below each draw hole.
JMED/4NT/3210/000/01/CM
Final Ed. 01-12-19
84
15) Tank Cover

Each tank cover shall be of adequate strength, and shall not distort when lifted.
Inspection openings shall be provided as necessary to give easy access to bushings,
for changing ratio or winding connections or testing the earth connections at the
link board.
Each inspection opening shall be of ample size for the purpose for which it is
provided, and at least two openings, one at each end of the tank, shall be not less
than 450 mm by 360 mm.
The tank cover and inspection covers shall be provided with lifting arrangements.
Unless otherwise approved inspection covers shall not weigh more than 25 kg each.
The bolt holes in all cover plates shall be provided with washers which will prevent
the collection of moisture in the bolt hole.
The tank cover shall be fitted with pockets for a thermometer and for the bulbs of
the winding temperature indicators. Protection shall be provided where necessary
for each capillary tube.
The thermometer pocket shall be fitted with a captive screwed cap to prevent the
ingress of water.
The pockets shall be located in the position of maximum oil temperature at full
rated power and it shall be possible to remove the instrument bulbs without
lowering the oil in the tank.
16) Current Transformer Accommodation
When specified, provision shall be made for mounting current transformers in the
terminal housings, and this shall include approved terminal boxes, conduit and
wiring or cables for the secondary connections which on each transformer shall be
terminated in the main marshalling kiosk near the ground level.
When specified, provision shall be made for the mounting of current transformers
in the neutral earth connection of the high or low voltage windings of main or
earthing transformers.
Where applicable facilities shall be provided for mounting an external tank leakage
current transformer.
17) Axles and Rollers
If specified, transformers are to be provided with bi-directional plain rollers and the
axles shall be of such dimensions and so supported that under any service
conditions they shall not meet sufficiently to interfere with the movement of the
transformer.
All rollers shall be detachable and shall be made of steel. The bearings shall be
either bronze bushed or of the roller or ball type.
JMED/4NT/3210/000/01/CM
Final Ed. 01-12-19
85
Rollers shall be arranged so that they can be turned through an angle of 90° when
the tank is jacked up clear of the foundation base. Means shall be provided for
locking the swivel movements in positions parallel to and at right angles to the
longitudinal axis of the tank.
18) Conservator Vessels, oils Gauges and Breathers
A conservator complete with sump and drain valve shall be provided in such a
position as not to obstruct the electricity connections to the transformer and having
a capacity between highest and lowest visible levels of not less than 7 1/2 % of the
total cold oil volume in the transformer and cooling equipment. The minimum
indicated oil level shall be with the feed pipe to the main tank covered with not less
than 12 mm depth of oil and the indicated range of oil levels shall correspond to
average oil temperature of from plus 6° C to plus 80 ° C.
If the sump is formed by extending the feed pipe inside the conservator vessel, this
extension shall be for at least 75 mm. The conservator shall be designed so that it
can be completely drained by means of the drain valve provided, when mounted as
in service.
One end of the conservator shall be bolted into position so that it can be removed
for cleaning purposes.
Two oil gauges of approved type shall be provided one at each end of the
conservator. At least one gauge shall be of the direct reading prismatic or reflex
type. Float operated oil gauges shall be of the magnetic type.
Where it is necessary to fit two or more gauges of the prismatic type at one end in
order to cover the full expansion range, they shall be disposed that the oil level is in
view at all parts of the range.
The oil level mark on the gauges shall be to approval. A device shall be fitted to
provide an alarm for low oil level conditions.
Taps on values shall not be fitted to oil gauges.
The oil connection from the transformer tank to the conservator vessel shall be
arranged at a rising angle of from 3-7 degrees to the horizontal and shall consist of
pipes having inside diameters as follows:
- for transformers up to and including 1,000 kVA not less than 25 mm inside
diameter pipes.
- for transformers over 1,000 to 10,000 kVA not less than 50 mm inside diameter
pipes.
- for transformers of over 10,000 kVA not less than 75 mm inside diameter pipes.
A valve shall be provided at the conservator to cut off the oil supply to the
transformer.
Each conservator vessel shall be fitted with a breather in which silica-gel is the
dehydrating agent and designed so that:
JMED/4NT/3210/000/01/CM
Final Ed. 01-12-19
86
- the passage of air is through the silica-gel.

- the external atmosphere is not continually in contact with the silica-gel.
- the moisture absorption indicated by a change in colour of the tinted crystals
can be easily observed.
- all breathers shall be mounted at approximately 1,5 metres above ground level.
Other types of breather may be supplied subject to approval.
19) Filter and Drain Valves, Sampling Devices and Air Release Plugs
Each transformer shall be fitted with the following:
a) One 50 mm valve at the top and one 50 mm valve at the bottom of the tank
mounted diagonally opposite to each other with 1 ½ inch B.S.P. male couplings
for flexible hose connection to oil filtering plant.
b) A drain valve together with such arrangements as may be necessary within the
tank to ensure that the tank can be drained of oil as far as practicable.
c) A drain valve fitted to each conservator.
d) A robust sampling device at top and bottom of the main tank. The sampling
devices shall not be fitted on the filter valves specified under (a) above.
e) Flanged type air release plugs.
All valves opening to atmosphere shall be fitted with blank flanges.
20) Valves
All valves up to and including 100 mm shall be of gunmetal. Larger valves may be
gunmetal or may have cast iron bodies with gunmetal fittings. They shall be of the
full way type with internal screw and shall be opened by turning counter-clockwise
when facing the handwheel.
Means shall be provided for padlocking the valves in the open and closed position.
Provision is not required for locking individual radiator valves.
Every valve shall be provided with an indicator to show clearly the position of the
valve.
All valve shall be provided with flanges having machined faces.
21) Pressure Relief Device
A pressure relief device shall be provided of sufficient size for rapid release of any
pressure that may be generated within the tank, and which might result in damage
to the equipment. The device shall operate at a static pressure of less than the
hydraulic test pressure for transformer tanks. Means shall be provided to prevent
the ingress of rain, or dust.
JMED/4NT/3210/000/01/CM
Final Ed. 01-12-19
87
Unless otherwise approved the relief device shall be mounted on the main tank and
if on the cover shall be fitted with a skirt projecting 25mm inside the tank to prevent
gas accumulation.
If a diaphragm is used, it shall be of approved design and material and situated
above maximum oil level.
One of the following methods shall be used for relieving or equalising the pressure
relief device:
- an equaliser pipe connecting the pressure relief device to the conservator, or
- the fitting of a silica-gel breather to the pressure relief device, the breather being
mounted in a suitable position for access at ground level.
22) Earthing Terminal
Earthing terminals shall be adequately dimensioned to receive the earthing
conductors. Provision shall be made at positions close to each of the bottom four
corners of the tank for bolting the earth terminals to the tank structure to suit local
conditions. A similar terminal shall be fitted to the tank cover.
23) Rating and Diagram Plates
The following plates shall be fixed to the transformer tank at an average height,
where possible, of 1.7 metres above ground level:
a) A rating plate bearing the data specified in the relevant standards.
b) A diagram plate showing the internal connections and also the voltage vector
relationship of the several windings and in addition a plan view of the
transformer giving the correct physical relationship of the terminals. When links
are provided for changing the transformer ratio, then means shall be provided
for clearly indicating the ratio for which the transformer is connected. The
transformer ratio shall be indicated for each tap.
The above plates shall be of stainless steel or of other material capable of
withstanding continuous outdoor service, and should all be suitably mounted to
prevent vibration rattling or corrosion.
24) Joints and Gaskets
Unless otherwise approved, oil resisting synthetic rubber gaskets shall not be used,
except where the synthetic rubber is used as a bonding medium for cork or similar
material.
25) Cooling Plant - General
Radiators and coolers shall be designed so that all painted surfaces can be
thoroughly cleaned by hand and subsequently painted on site by suitable brushes or
sprays.
Radiators and coolers shall be so designed as to avoid pockets in which moisture
may collect.
JMED/4NT/3210/000/01/CM
Final Ed. 01-12-19
88
26) Radiators Connected Directly to the Tank

Radiators connected directly to the tank shall be detachable and shall be provided
with machined or ground inlet and outlet branches. Plugs shall be provided at the
top and bottom of each radiator for draining and filling.
Radiators for transformers of 1,000 kVA and under shall be an integral part of the
tank.
Valves shall be provided on the tank at each point of connection to the tank.
27) Coolers
Where separate radiator tanks are provided, the conservator vessels shall be
mounted thereon.
All coolers shall be suitable for mounting on a flat concrete base.
Valve mountings shall be provided on the tanks of all transformer to enable all the
cooling equipment to be located at either end of the tanks. The mountings not in use
shall be blanked off without valves.
The oil circuit of all coolers shall be such as to allow for maintenance of each
cooler independently. Arrangements shall be to the approval.
28) Oil piping and Flanges
The necessary oil piping shall be provided for connecting each transformer to the
coolers. The oil piping shall be with machined flanged joints. Cast iron shall not be
used.
An approved expansion piece shall be provided in each oil pipe connection between
the transformer and the oil coolers.
Drain valves shall be provided in order that each section of pipework obtained
independently.
29) Blowers and Ducts
The blowers for use with forced air cooling shall be motor driven and shall be
suitable for continuous operation and capable of dealing with the maximum output
and head required in service.
The blowers shall be capable of withstanding the stresses imposed when brought up
to speed by the direct application of full line voltage to the motor.
The blowers and coolers shall be designed so that they operate with a minimum of
noise or drumming. In order to reduce the transmission of noise and vibration, the
blowers shall be either mounted independently from the coolers or, alternatively, an
approved form of anti-vibration mounting shall be adopted. It shall be possible to
remove the blower complete with motor without disturbing or dismantling the
cooler structure framework.
Blades shall be of galvanised steel unless otherwise approved.
JMED/4NT/3210/000/01/CM
Final Ed. 01-12-19
89
Galvanised wire-mesh guards with a mesh not greater than 25 mm shall be provided
to prevent accidental contact with the blades. Guards shall be provided over all
moving shafts and couplings.
30) Cooler Control
Each motor or group of motors shall be provided with a three-pole electrically-
operated contactor and with control gear of approved design both for starting and
stopping the motor by hand and also automatically from the contacts on the winding
temperature indicating device. Overload and single-phasing protection shall be
provided but no-volt releases shall not be fitted. This equipment shall be
accommodated in the marshalling kiosk.
Where small motors are connected in groups, the group protection shall be arranged
so that it operates satisfactorily in the event of a fault occurring on a single motor.
The control arrangements shall be such that motors totalling more than 15 kW shall
not be started simultaneously when the cooling plant motors are started
automatically or by hand by means of a single switch operation.
31) Voltage Control
Where specified, each transformer shall be provided with voltage control equipment
of the tap-changing type or other approved apparatus for varying its effective
transformation ration whilst the transformers are on-load and without producing
phase displacement. The voltage control equipment shall be designed so that it may
be easily adapted to operate by automatic control.
Equipment for local and remote electrical and local hand operation shall be
provided and shall comply with the following conditions:
- it shall not be possible to operate the electric drive when the hand-operating
gear is in use.
- it shall not be possible for any two electric control points to be in operation at
the same time.
- operation from the local or remote control switch shall cause one tap movement
only.
- all electrical control switches and the local operating gear shall be clearly
labelled in approved manner to indicate the direction of tap changing.
- the local control switches shall be mounted in the Marshalling Kiosk.
The equipment shall be so arranged as to ensure that when a tap change has been
commenced it shall be completed independently of the operation of the control
relays or switches. If a failure of the auxiliary supply during a tap change or any
other contingency would result in that movement being completed, approved means
shall be provided to safeguard the transformer and its auxiliary equipment.
Apparatus of approved type shall be provided for each transformer:
JMED/4NT/3210/000/01/CM
Final Ed. 01-12-19
90
- to give indication mechanically at the transformer and electrically at the

remote/supervisory control points of the number of the tapping in use on the
transformer.
- to give an indication at the remote control point that a tap change is incomplete.
- to give an indication electrically at the remote control point of the maximum
and minimum limits of tap position reached while the transformer is in service.
All indicating device shall operate correctly at any voltage between the limits of
80% and 110% of nominal value.
The tap-changing switches and mechanism shall be mounted in the oil tanks or
compartments mounted in accessible position on the transformer tank and shall be
supported from the main tank or its base. "Drop down" tanks shall not be used
unless otherwise approved.
Any enclosed compartments not oil filled shall be adequately ventilated. A metal-
clad heater shall be provided in the driving mechanism chamber and connected in
parallel with the heater in the marshalling kiosk.
The oil in the compartments of the main tap-changing apparatus shall be maintained
under conservator head by means of a 50 mm inside diameter pipe connection from
the highest point of the chamber to the conservator. This connection shall be
controlled by a suitable valve and shall be arranged so that any gas leaving the
chamber will pass into the gas and oil actuated relay.
It shall not be possible for the oil in those compartments of the tap change
equipment which contain contacts used for making or breaking current, to mix with
the oil in the main transformer. This requirement shall not apply where mercury
switches are used to make and break current.
When a conservator is provided and used to maintain oil level in compartments of
the tap change equipment, it shall be clearly separate from the main transformer
conservator. An oil gauge of the prismatic type, a silica-gel breather and a gas and
oil actuated relay shall be fitted to each such conservator.
Each compartment in which the oil is not maintained under conservator head shall
be provided with an oil gauge of approved design.
Limit switches shall be provided to prevent over-running of the mechanism and
shall be directly connected in the circuit of the operating motor. In addition a
mechanical stop or other approved device shall be provided to prevent over-running
of the mechanism under any condition.
Limit switches may be connected in the control circuit of the operating motor
provided that a mechanical declutching mechanism is incorporated.
Thermal devices or other approved means shall be provided to protect the motor
and control circuits.
All relays, switches, fuses, etc., shall be mounted in the Marshalling Kiosk and shall
be clearly marked to indicate their purpose. Switches for the initiation of a tap
change shall bear the inscription "Raise" or "Lower".
JMED/4NT/3210/000/01/CM
Final Ed. 01-12-19
91
The control circuits shall operate at 230 V single-phase.

Tripping contacts associated with any thermal devices used for the protection of
tap-changing equipment shall be suitable for making and breaking 5 A at 230 V a.c
or d.c.
The whole of the apparatus shall be of robust design and capable of giving
satisfactory service without undue maintenance under the conditions to be met in
service, including frequent operation.
A device shall be fitted to the tap-changing mechanism to indicate the number of
operations completed by the equipment.
A permanently legible lubrication chart shall be fitted within the driving mechanism
chamber.
Means shall be provided for ensuring that the tapping or other switches are making
full contact.
32) Automatic Voltage Control
Where specified, approved means shall be provided for automatically maintaining
within adjustable limits a pre-determined voltage at the lower voltage busbars to
which the transformer is connected.
Unless otherwise specified, the equipment shall be suitable for control of up to three
transformers in parallel and shall be so designed that where control of less than
three transformers is initially required it shall be possible to extend the facilities to
cover up to three transformers at a later date.
In addition to the methods of voltage control already specified the following
alternative methods shall be provided:
a) Automatic Independent Control. It shall be possible to select automatic
independent remote control for each transformer irrespective of the method of
control selected for any of the other associated transformers.
b) Automatic parallel control. It shall be possible to select any transformer from
bank for master control.
c) Remote or Local Control. It shall be possible to select remote or local electrical
non-automatic control for each transformer.
Where specified, a voltage regulating relay of an approved type designed to operate
from a nominal energising pressure of 110 volts shall be provided for each
transformer. The no-load voltage level of the relay shall be adjustable between 90%
and 110% of the nominal energising voltage independent of other adjustments.
Unless otherwise specified, the sensitivity of the relay shall be suitable for pre-
determined adjustment at any value between the transformer tap step percentage.
The relay shall be insensitive to frequency variation within 48 - 52 Hz.
Associated with the voltage regulating relay shall be provided a time delay relay,
the setting of which shall be adjustable between the limits of 10 and 120 seconds
equal steps of 10 seconds.
JMED/4NT/3210/000/01/CM
Final Ed. 01-12-19
92
An out-of -step device shall be provided for each transformer which shall be
arranged to prevent further tap-changing if after a definite time interval any
transformer in one group operating on "parallel control" is one tap out of step. The
device shall not operate under any control arrangement other than parallel control.
A device shall also be provided for each transformer to render the automatic voltage
in-operative if the control voltage falls below 80% of the nominal value with
means of restoration of the automatic control with the application of at least 85% of
the normal energising voltage. Unless otherwise specified, the apparatus shall stay
at the tap in use at the instant when the automatic voltage control is rendered
inoperative.
Means shall be provided to indicate at a remote point when the units of a group of
transformers arranged to operate in parallel are operating at a different taps.
Means shall also be provided to indicate at a remote point failure of the voltage
transformer supply to the voltage regulating relay. The alarm shall operate only
when transformer LV circuit breaker is closed and when the tap-changer is on
automatic control. The tap-changer shall remain in the position at which it stands
when the alarm is given, until such time as the control voltage is restored.
33) Temperature Indicating Devices and Alarms
Transformers of 1,500 kVA rating and above shall be fitted with a dial type of oil
temperature thermometer with maximum pointer and two sets of normally open self
re-setting switch contacts which close at a pre-determined setting to initiate an
alarm and to initiate tripping of an associated circuit breaker.
Transformers of 2,000 kVA rating and above shall be provided with devices for
indication of winding hottest-spot temperature, each having a dial type indicator
and pointer to register the maximum temperature reached. These devices shall each
incorporate two normally open self reset electrically separate sets of switch contacts
which close at pre-determined settings, one set of which shall be used to initiate an
alarm and the other pre-set to initiate tripping of an associated circuit breaker.
Transformers having or being suitable for forced cooling, shall have an additional
set of normally open self reset switch contacts on each winding temperature
indicator to control automatically the forced cooling plant.
Means for cooler failure alarm shall be provided on each transformer having or
being suitable for forced cooling.
The capillary connected sensing bulbs shall be positioned in separate oil tight
pockets arranged in the top oil. To simulate indication of the hottest spot
temperature of the winding the temperature indicator heating device shall be fed
from a separate current transformer associated with its loaded winding and mounted
within the tank or bushing turret. The heating device shall be suitable for up to
130% of the transformer rating continuously or 200% for up to 15 minutes. The
temperature indicators and any associated relays and ancillary equipment shall be
housed in the Marshalling Kiosk.
Indication of the winding hottest spot temperature shall be provided on the HV
winding.
JMED/4NT/3210/000/01/CM
Final Ed. 01-12-19
93
The electrically separate alarm and trip switch contacts of winding temperature
indicators and the alarm contacts of oil temperature indicators shall be adjustable to
close between 60° C and 150° C and re-open when the temperature has fallen by
not more than 7° C.
The electrically separate switch contacts used to control cooling plant motors of
mixed cooled transformers shall be adjustable to close between 50° C and 100° C
and re-open when the temperature has fallen by any desired amount between 15° C
and 30° C.
All contacts shall be adjustable on a scale and shall be accessible on removal of the
cover. Alarm and trip circuit contacts shall be suitable for making or breaking 5 A
at 230 V a.c or d.c. Cooler motor control contacts shall be suitable for operating the
cooler motor contactors direct, or, if necessary, through an interposing relay.
The temperature indicators in the Marshalling Kiosk shall be so designed that it
shall not be possible to move the pointers by hand for the purpose of checking the
operation of the contacts and associated equipment.
The working parts of the instrument shall be made visible by the provision of cut-
away dials and glass-fronted covers.
Connections shall be brought from the devices to terminal boards placed inside the
Marshalling Kiosk.
Terminals and links shall be provided in the Marshalling Kiosk for each W.T.I for
checking the output of the current transformer.
A diagram and instruction plate shall be provided in each Marshalling Kiosk.
Information shall be included in the maintenance instructions in the form of either a
graph or table, showing the relationship between current injected into the heater coil
and the corresponding indicator reading for :
- The transformer operating at full rated output and an oil temperature of 60° C.
- The transformer unenergised and an oil temperature of 15° C.
34) Gas and Oil Actuated Relays
Transformers above 1,500 kVA shall be fitted with gas and oil actuated relay
equipment having alarm contacts which close on collection of gas and tripping
contacts which close following oil surge or low level conditions.
Each gas and oil-actuated relay shall be provided with a test cock to take a flexible
pipe connection for checking the operation of the relay.
To allow gas to be collected at ground level, a pipe approximately 5 mm inside
diameter shall be connected to the gas release cock of the gas and oil-actuated relay
and brought down to a point approximately 1.5 metres above ground level, where it
shall be terminated by a cock.
JMED/4NT/3210/000/01/CM
Final Ed. 01-12-19
94
A machined surface shall be provided on the top of each relay to facilitate the
setting of the relays and to check the mounting angle in the expansion pipe and the
cross-level of the relay.
A straight run of pipework shall be provided for a length of five times the internal
diameter of the pipe on the tank side of the gas and oil-actuated relay and three
times the internal diameter of the pipe on the conservator side of the gas and oil
actuated relay.
The surge float contacts shall close at a rate of steady oil flow between the
following limits. As far as possible the limits shall also be met when the relay is
subjected to oil surge conditions produced by rapid opening of a lever operated gate
valve.
Oil Pipe connection internal Operational limits for relay

diameter rising angles of 1° to 9°
mm Steady Oil flow (mm/s)
Up to 25 700 - 1300
25 - 50 750 - 1400
50 - 75 900 - 1600
The gas collection contacts shall operate within the angle limits specified for tests.
The design of the relay mounting arrangements, the associated pipework and the
cooling plant shall be such that mal-operation of the relays shall not take place
under normal service conditions, including switching on or off cooler equipment.
The pipework shall be so arranged that all gas arising from the transformer shall
pass into the gas and oil-actuated relay. The oil circuit through the relay shall not be
in parallel with any circulation oil pipe, nor shall it be teed into or connected
through the pressure relief vent. Sharp bends in the pipework shall be avoided.
When a transformer is provided with two conservators the gas and oil-actuated
relays shall be arranged as follows:
- If the two conservators are connected to the transformers by a common oil pipe,
one relay shall be installed in the common pipe.
- If the two conservators are piped separately to the transformers two relays shall
be installed, one in each pipe connection.
Connections shall be brought from the relay to terminal boards inside the
Marshalling Kiosk.
JMED/4NT/3210/000/01/CM
Final Ed. 01-12-19
95
35) External wiring

Any wiring liable to come in contact with oil shall have suitable oil resisting
insulation. The bared ends of stranded conductors shall be sweated together to
prevent creepage of oil along the wire.
There shall be no possibility of oil entering connection boxes for cables or wiring.
Unless otherwise approved, high temperature insulation shall be provided on all
cabling which is run on the transformer tank. PVC insulation will not be accepted
for this application.
Where the use of conduits is agreed, the runs shall be laid with suitable falls and the
lowest parts of the run shall be external to the kiosk or boxes.
All conduit-runs shall be adequately drained and ventilated. Conduits shall not be
run at or below ground level.
The external cabling on transformers shall be armoured or alternatively protected
from mechanical damage in an approved manner.
7.2.2. Distribution transformers
Distribution transformers shall be of the sealed and oil-immersed type with natural
cooling, suitable for outdoor installation.
Distribution transformers shall be provided with the following fittings:
 oil level indicator
 oil filling hole with plug
 thermometer pocket
 lifting lugs
 earthing terminal for tank
 drain plug with sampler cock
 rating plate
 terminal marking plate
 off circuit tap changer, housed in the main tank, with  2,5 % and  5 % taps.
Transformers of 150 kVA rating and below shall be designed for:
- single pole mounting provided with base channels,
- pole platform mounting with fixing centers not exceeding 500 mm.
Transformers of rating above 150 kVA shall be designed for ground mounting fitted
with uni-directional rollers.
Transformers of 1,000 kVA and above shall be fitted with a dial type top oil
temperature thermometer with maximum pointer.
JMED/4NT/3210/000/01/CM
Final Ed. 01-12-19
96
Distribution transformers shall comply with the provisions of the specification relating
to power transformers wherever these are applicable. The thickness of the tank plates
shall not be less than 3 mm.
Transformers shall be:
- externally hot dip galvanised
- designed with a bolted cover
Transformers shall be equipped with one of the following terminations on MV and LV
side:
 MV side
- there bushings suitable for connection of bare conductors
- three Elastimold plug-in type bushings suitable for the reception of Elastimold
elbow connector
 LV side
- four LV terminals on the side of the tank (for single pole mounted transformers
only)
- four bushings each complete with terminal having an undrilled copper palm
 of 60 x 60 mm for transformers 250 and 500 kVA
 of 60 x 120 mm for transformers  1 000 kVA

- four bushings suitable for direct connection of flat copper bus bar for
transformers > 1,000 kVA
7.2.3. Earthing trransformers
Earthing transformers shall be oil-immersed with natural coling, suitable for outdoor
installation, and shall have a main interconnected star winding.
The neutral point of the interconnected star winding shall be brought out of the tank
through a cable box. Provision shall be made for the installation of a current
transformer in the cable box..
Earthing transformers shall be capable of withstanding for a period of five seconds the
application of normal three-phase line voltage to the line terminals of the
interconnected star winding with one line terminal and the neutral terminal connected
solidly to earth.
Earthing transformers shall be provided with the following fittings:
 conservator vessel with removable end cover and prismatic oil gauge; the feed pipe
extension into the conservator shall not be less than 40 mm
 one thermometer pocket with captive cap
 silica-gel breather
JMED/4NT/3210/000/01/CM
Final Ed. 01-12-19
97
 pressure relief device

 filter valve and combined filter and drain valve with adaptors
 sampling devices
 lifting lugs
 skid type underbase
Earthing transformers shall comply with the provisions of the specification relating to
the main transformers wherever these are applicable. The minimum thickness of the
tank plates shall be 3 mm.
7.2.4. Instructions
Clear instructions shall be included in the Installation, Operation and Maintenance

Manual regarding any special precautionary measures which must be taken during the
erection, operation and maintenance of each transformer. The maximum vacuum which
the complete transformer filled with oil can safely withstand without any special
precautionary measures being taken shall be stated in the Maintenance Instructions.
7.3. Technical characteristics

Transformer capacity designed for 22 kV distribution network have standard values of

20/30 MVA and 36/45 MVA.
Detailed technical characteristics concerning these transformers are given in table
7.3.1-1 hereafter.
Power transformer shall be supplied complete with automatically controlled cooling
plant, all necessary tap change control equipment including an Automatic Voltage
Regulator relay required for voltage control of the transformer.
All control and protective equipment, alarms and indications shall be supplied
completely assembled in a suitable pre-wired panel to be located indoor remote from
the transformer. The panel shall comprise all necessary equipment for:
- tap change control,
- parallel control complete with automatic voltage regulator,
- control of forced cooling equipment.
1 Maximum Continuous Rating

(MVA) 20/30 36/45
under site conditions
2 Indoor/outdoor type Outdoor
3 Type of cooling ONAN/ONAF
JMED/4NT/3210/000/01/CM
Final Ed. 01-12-19
98
4 Magnetic circuit Three-limb core

5 Impedance voltage at 75°C
and normal ratio (%) 10 12,5
6 Number of phases 3 3
7 Rated Voltage
 HV (kV) 66 66
 LV (kV) 22 22
8 Frequency (Hz) 50 50
9 System Highest Voltage
 HV (kV) 72.5 72,5
 LV (kV) 24.2 24
10 Method of connection
 HV Star Star
 LV Star Star
11 Vector Group Yyn0 Ynyn0
12 Total range of variation of
transformation ration
 Increasing ration plus (%) 6 6
 Decreasing ration minus (%) 15 15
 Size of steps (%) 1.5 1.5
13 Type of tap changing equipment
required On load
14 Type of tap changer control Electrical Local and

required
Remote/Manual Local
15 Bushing insulators or cable boxes
for terminals
 HV Phase Bushings
 LV Phase Cable box suitable for the
reception of three single core
polyethylene insulated copper
conductor cables per phase.
Glands for the cables shall be
insulated from the cable box.
 HV neutral Bushing
 LV neutral Bushing
16 Method of system earthing … Effectively earthed
JMED/4NT/3210/000/01/CM
Final Ed. 01-12-19
99
17 Whether first filling of oil to shall

be supplied Yes
18 Whether transformer shall be

transported filled with oil or gas Gas filled
19 Auxiliary supplies available :

 Tap changer and fan motors 400 V- 3 phases - 50 Hz
 Tap changer control 230 V - single phase - 50 Hz
 Tripping 30 V d.c.
 Alarm 110 or 230 V a.c.
 Indication 110 or 230 V a.c/d.c.
 VT for voltage regulator 22,000/110 V
(supplied on 22 kV switchgear
panels controlling the
transformer)
Table 7.3.1-1 : Power transformers– Technical characteristics
Power transformers shall also be equipped with the following fittings:

- oil conservator with filling hole and cap, oil level indicator, shut off valve,
drain/filter valve and removable end plate,
- double float gas and oil Buchholz relay with alarm and trip contacts,
- winding temperature dial type thermometer with resettable maximum pointer and
contacts for automatic operation of forced cooling equipment, alarm and tripping,
- hot dip galvanised removable radiators with top and bottom shut-off valves and
drain plugs,
- tank pressure relief valve,
- oil temperature dial type thermometer with resettable maximum pointer and
contacts for alarm and tripping,
- thermometer pocket,
- oil sealed dehydrating breather,
- jacking and lifting lugs,
- earthing terminal,
- tanking drain/filter valve and sampler plug,
- rating and diagram plates of non-corrosive materials,
- skid type underbase with removable orientable plain rollers,
JMED/4NT/3210/000/01/CM
Final Ed. 01-12-19
100
- over-pressure relay for tank protection,

- over-pressure relay for tap changer protection,
- double float gas and oil Buchholz relay with alarm and trip contacts for tap changer.
The HV bushings shall be fitted with connectors suitable for the reception of hard
drawn stranded copper conductor.
The neutral bushing on both HV and LV sides shall be fitted with connectors as above.
The power transformers shall be suitable for tank leakage protection and adequate
dispositions shall be taken:
1) Glands for single and multicore power and auxiliary cables shall be insulated from
the transformer body in an approved manner including an island layer and
removable earthing connections shall be provided. The design of the island layer
shall be such as to prevent the cable sheath fouling the cable box shell and thus
invalidating the island layer. Gland insulation shall be capable of withstanding a dry
high voltage of 2,000 volts a.c for one minute on each side of the island layer.
2) A suitable material for insulating the transformer base from the general mass of
earth.
7.3.2. Distribution Transformers
Distribution transformers shall have the following characteristics:

 standardised capacities:
- pole mounted transformers 25 - 50 - 100 - 150 – 250 kVA
- ground mounted transformers 250 - 500 – 1 000 – 1 500 kVA
 three phases – 6 600/415 V or 22 000/415 V - 50 Hz
 vector Group Dyn 11
 oil immersed non-gas cushion hermetically sealed
 natural cooled core type double wound construction
 winding of enamelled copper wire (eventually aluminium wire for low capacities)
7.4. Transport and shipping conditions

7.4.1. Drying out
All transformers shall be dried out of the manufacturer's works and the transport and
method of erection thereof so arranged that they may be put into service without further
drying out on site.
JMED/4NT/3210/000/01/CM
Final Ed. 01-12-19
101
7.4.2. Transport
All bushing, insulators, conservator vessels and breathers, radiators, wheels or other
external parts may be removed for transportation purposes provided that they can be
replaced on site without necessitating drying out the transformer.
When agreed the transformers shall be shipped to site filled with nitrogen. A sufficient
number of nitrogen tanks shall be shipped with each unit to maintain the unit under
pressure gauge shall be installed on the tank of the transformer and the pressure and
temperature recorded at the time each unit leaves the factory. The recorded data shall
be supplied with transformers so that it can be compared with the readings taken when
the unit is received at site.
7.5. Installation
Handling, filling and eventually oil treatment operations, as well as transformer
assembly and installation, should be carried out strictly according to manufacturers
instructions and recommendations (see section 7.2.4).
Power transformers should be installed on a concrete base constructed according to
specifications of chapter 15.
7.6. Earthing
7.6.1. Power Transformers
 Transformers without tank leakage protection

 Transformer frame shall be connected to the earthing grid of the substation via
at least 95 mm2 copper conductors at two diametrically opposed points.
 Metal framing of auxilliary boards of the transformer should be likely
connected to the earth grid via at least 25 mm2 copper conductors.
 Transformers with tank leakage protection
 The transformer frame should be connected to only one point of the earth grid
via at least 120 mm2 insulated copper conductors passing through a CT to sense
probable leakage current.
 Every isolated metallic parts of the transformer frame should be interlinked by
at least 16 mm2 conductors and all of them should be connected to the earth
grid via at least 25 mm2 copper conductors downstream of the above
mentioned CT.
 Neutral points of transformers
 Neutral points of power transformers are connected to the earth grid of the
substation via 24 kV isolated copper conductors of minimum 50 mm2 .
 See section 12.6, concerning earth grid of HV/MV substations.
JMED/4NT/3210/000/01/CM
Final Ed. 01-12-19
102
7.6.2. Distribution transformer
 Transformer frame shall be connected at two diametrically opposed points to the

main earthing protective conductor of the distribution transformer via at least 25
mm2 copper conductor (see also section 9.5).
 Earthing of the neutral point of the distribution transformers should be executed
according to the provisions of sections 9.5 and 10.5.
7.6.3. Earthing transformers
All specifiications pertaining to section 7.6.1 above are valid; however,

 the windings of the neutral point are not designed for accomodation of a tank
leakage protection
 neutral point of the windings shall be connected to the earthing grid of the
substation via a 10 kV insulated and at least 25 mm2 copper cable.
7.7. Measurements and inspections - Commissioning

 Verification of auxilliary cables, if it had been dismonthed for transport.

 Verification of the technological state, particularly visual check of the finish (paint,
vannes, bushings, accessories) and detection of possible oil leakage.
 Verification of the connections to the transformer, to its auxilliaries and to the earth.
 Verification of the functioning of the tap-changer and cooling auxillaries (fans,
pumps, startup automations).
 Verification of transformation ratio.
 Measurement of insulating resistance of winding and loo factor (tg Delta) between
windings.
 Verifications of the dielectric level of the oil.
 Any other verification or cheks, recommended by the manufacturers‟ instructions as
stated in section 7.2.4, but not mentionned here above.
Other special tests may be carried out, such as:
 Measurement of noise level.
 Analysis of dissolved gases in the transformer oil.
7.7.2. Distribution Transformers
 Verification of the technological state, particularly visual check of the finish (paint,
vannes, bushings, accessories) and detection of possible oil leakage.
 Verification of MV/LV connections.
JMED/4NT/3210/000/01/CM
Final Ed. 01-12-19
103
 Continuity test of the windings.

 Measurement of insulating resistance of the windings.
 Verification of the proper functioning of the tap-changer
7.7.3. Earthing transformer
Specifications of paragraph 7.7.1 are still valid unless some inconsistency arises.
7.7.4. Testing and commissionning report
Every measurements and inspections carried out on power, distribution or earthing

transformers, as well as commissioning, form part of an official testing and
commissioning report.
Measurements and inspections in 7.7.1, 2 and 3 obove are done before commissioning
the transformers.
JMED/4NT/3210/000/01/CM
Final Ed. 01-12-19
104
8. Equipment for MT network
8.1. General
This chapter deals with electromecanic equipment to be found in MT distribution
network. It particularly deals with the following equipment:
 breaking and isolating devices,
 protective devices against over voltage and over current.

The equipment should comply with:
 the latest IEC recommendations and their complements, namely:
 51 for measuring devices
 129 for sectionaliser and earth short-circuit device
 265/2 for switches
 420 for fused switches
 56 for circuit breakers
 298 to 694 for the whole metallic enclosure
 282 for fuses
 99 for lighting arresters
 529 for classification according to protection level of the casing
 the following standards:
 BS 5227 A.C. metal-enclosed switchgear and control gear of rating
voltage above 1 kV
 BS 5253 A.C. Disconnectors (Isolators) and Earthing Switches of
Rated Voltage above 1 kV."
 BS 5463 Specifications for A.C. Switches of Rated Voltage
above 1 kV"
 ESIS 41-13 Electric Supply Industry Standard (U.K) - Air Break Switch-
Disconnectors 12 kV to 36 kV for use on Overhead Lines".
JMED/4NT/3210/000/01/CM
Final Ed. 01-12-19
105

8.3.1. Autorecloser
8.3.1.1. Utilisation
Autoreclosers are designed to:

- detect over currents passing through them,
- eliminate transient faults on overhead network without affecting continuity of
supply,
- selectively eliminate permanent faults on sections of overhead network according to
the protections assigned to the main feeders,
- see also section 1.7
They are pole mounted, placed either at the beginning of overhead lines supplied by an
underground feeder, or at the beginning of long overhead spurs; they are protected by
surge arresters connected to the supply side.
8.3.1.2. Characteristics
Autoreclosers shall comply with the following characteristics:

 Outdoor type, with pole mounted fittings.
 Three phase with three-pole action.
 Autonomous and compact (with no need for auxiliary supply) in a metallic casing.
 Switching medium: oil, SF6 or vacuum.
 Insulation: dielectric oil or SF6.
 Terminal for frame earthing.
 Internal automatism: hydraulically controlled.
 Reclosing cycle settings: 1 to 4 settings C-O (Closing - Opening) available, with
number of fast opening (1 to 4) on fault.
 Outside setting of autoreclosing function inhibition and resetting.
 Time setting of line isolation from 0,5 to 15 seconds before reclosing.
 Number of trip operation counter clearly visible from outside.
 Manual operating levers for opening and tripping from outside (with a hook stick)
and capability to lock out the autorecloser with contact-position indicator.
 Separate protection devices fore the elimination of phase-to-phase faults and phase-
earth faults.
JMED/4NT/3210/000/01/CM
Final Ed. 01-12-19
106
The protective device against phase-to-earth faults shall have a wide range of time-
current settings to ensure selectivity of the recloser with respect to other protective
devices.
The phase-to-phase fault protective device would be:
- either with series trip coils without minimal trip current adjustment,
- or with an outside adjusting device of this minimal setting and of the time-current
characteristics of tripping.
8.3.2. Sectionaliser
They are used to detect an over-current passing through them and to automatically
disconnect, from the main feeder, the section of the overhead line where the permanent
fault is found, and that during the dead time of an O-C (Opening-Closing) of a
reclosing cycle of a circuit breaker or an autorecloser located upstream in the network.
See also section 1.7
They are also pole mounted and placed at the beginning of overhead lines; they are
protected by three surge arresters connected to the supply side.
Sectionalisers shall comply with the following characteristics:

 Outdoor equipment, with pole mounted fittings.
 Three phase, with simultaneous three-pole control.
 Insulation and switching medium: dielectric oil, SF6 or air.
 Internal automatism: hydraulically or electrically controlled.
 Setting of the time of automatic opening of the apparatus during a series of tripping-
reclosing cycles of the upstream circuit breaker, when the fault current travels
through the sectionaliser: setting of the first to the third dead time of reclosing
cycles with a maximum time-delay of 30 sec.
 Lock out of the arming of the opening device of the apparatus by magnetising
currents of transformers supplied from down the line.
 Internal protection of the fault current detecting coils against over voltage.
 Manual operating levers for opening and tripping from outside (with a hook stick)
with opening position indicator
Two different types of automatic switches are considered:
- self operated compact three pole switch in metal casing in oil or SF6 insulation
medium,
JMED/4NT/3210/000/01/CM
Final Ed. 01-12-19
107
- open three-pole switch with independent electrical control in air as switching

medium.
The first type of compact three-pole switch is preferred for its autonomous action.
8.3.3. Air breaker isolating switch - Off load / On load (ABIS)
ABIS are mainly used for the following:

 ringing of main overhead feeders,
 sectioning of main overhead feeders,
 isolation of overhead spurs on main overhead feeders,
 isolation of a group of overhead distribution transformers.
These switches are of outdoor type and are designed for horizontal or vertical mounting
on single pole or gantry support of MV lines.
The ABIS shall comply with the following characteristics:

 The off-load Air Breaker Isolating Switch shall be of the triple-pole rocking, gang
operated type, each pole having three insulators.
 Unless otherwise stated, the ABIS shall have a rated current of 400 A.
 The insulators shall be of the post type and be manufactured from porcelain.
 Phase unit bases shall be manufactured from mild steel.
 Main fixed and moving contacts shall be self-aligning and be manufactured from
high conductivity copper. The contact surfaces, which shall be silver or nickel
plated, shall be spring-loaded. The spring devices shall be manufactured from
corrosion - resistant material compatible with the contact.
 Flexible shunt cables shall be multi-strands, high conductivity annealed copper
conductors insulated with black PVC, 0.8 mm thick. The leads shall terminate on
compression lugs manufactured from high conductivity electrolytic copper.
 The terminal pads shall form part of the outside insulator assemblies of each pole.
The terminal pads shall be manufactured from electro-tinned brass and shall be
designed to accept two in-line connector clamps suitable for the reception of 15 mm
overall diameter stranded copper conductor.
 The phase coupling connections shall be suitable for mounting with phase centres at
750 mm.
JMED/4NT/3210/000/01/CM
Final Ed. 01-12-19
108
 The operating rod shall be of mild steel tube. The operating rod shall be 7.5 m long
and shall be supplied complete with an insulating insert capable of meeting a wet 1
minute withstand voltage of 2.5 times the rated phase-earth voltage of the switch.
The insert shall be positioned so that its lower end is a minimum of 3 m above
ground level when the operating rod is at its lowest operating position.
The operating rod shall be provided with facilities for length adjustment with a
minimum adjustment of 50 mm.
Sufficient number of guides shall be supplied complete with the operating rod.
 The operating handle shall normally move upwards to the CLOSED position and
downwards to the OPEN position.
The operating handle shall incorporate an over toggle arrangement to ensure
stability of the switch when the operating handle is in either the open or closed
position.
 The operating mechanism shall be of the manual operated type. The mechanism
shall be designed such that the maximum force required at any point of the stroke
does not exceed 320 N.
 The mounting height of the handle at its centre line shall be 1.2 m above ground
level, and in any operating position the grip of the handle is between a minimum of
750 mm and a maximum of 1.6 m above ground level.
 The operating handle and mechanism shall be manufactured from mild steel.
 Provision shall be made for the effective earthing of all metal work in the vicinity
of the handle and for this purpose, a flat surface drilled to accept an M12 nut and
the nut itself shall be provided.
 The operating handle and mechanism shall be provided with clear identification of
OPEN and CLOSED positions with facilities of pad locking in either of these
positions.
 All ferrous metal parts including fasteners and washers shall be dip galvanised.
 A weather-proof nameplate shall be provided on the operating mechanism giving
the following information:
- manufacturer,
- rated voltage,
- rated normal current,
- rated short-time current,
- rated short-circuit making capacity,
- year of manufacture.
 All bearings shall be of the long-life type requiring no lubrication after installation.
JMED/4NT/3210/000/01/CM
Final Ed. 01-12-19
109
8.3.3.3. Special Feature
The above Off-Load ABIS shall have facilities for fitment of a self-contained arc-
extinguishing device thereby converting the Off-load switch into an On-Load one;
facilities shall be provided for the conversion of the manual operating mechanism into a
remote controlled motor operated one.
8.3.4. Fuses and holders
MV fuses are designed principally for individual protection of distribution

transformers. It is thus recommended not to use fuses for group protection of
distribution transformers or for a section of the line.
Fuses and their holders shall comply with the following characteristics:
 Fusing curve: fast, type K (in the NEMA sense).
 The stand mounting of fuses shall consist of one or two insulators fitted on a
metallic brace.
 The protection tube, preferably of epoxy resin reinforced fibreglass, is guaranteed
against sunshine exposition and against temperature fluxing and remaining at the
same time its watertight.
 The fixed and mobile contact areas are of silvered copper. The lateral flanges
pressing against the fixed contacts are of stainless steel.
 The spring assuming the automatic movement of the fuse in case of fusion shall be
also of stainless steel.
 The removing of fuses on live line can be made by use of an arc-quenching hook
stick, from the upper fixed contacts.
 The fixed contacts allow the use of all fuse rating shown in the table below.
 In case of fusion, the hammer hits the opening control mechanism with a minimum
of 150% of the minimal force required to cause the opening.
 The fuse cartridges are rechargeable.
8.3.4.3. Protection of distribution transformers
The fuse rating depends on the transformer rating to be protected and may be different
from one manufacturer to another. Subject to verification with the manufacturers, for
the primary voltage of 6.6 kV and 22 kV, the fuse rating may be obtained from the
table below with a good approximation.
JMED/4NT/3210/000/01/CM
Final Ed. 01-12-19
110
Fuse Rating (A)

Tfo - (kVA)
6,6 kV 22 kV
25 - 1
50 6 2
100 15 5
150 20 6
250 65 10
500 - 20
1000 - 40
1500 - 50
Table 8.3.4-1 : Distribution transformer protection
8.3.5. Surge arresters
Surge arresters are designed to protect electric equipment against high transient over
voltages that may occur in overhead networks.
They are chosen to resist transient over voltages as a result of operations carried out on
the network or of faults occurring on the network and to limit transient over voltages to
a limit less than the basic insulation level of the equipment and installations.
They are placed as indicated previously in section 1.4.1.3.
Surge arresters consist of variable resistances (ZnO)

The outside envelope is in porcelain
They are designed to be placed on pole‟s head; their mounting fittings are available on
delivery.
A device should be installed to signal visually that the equipment has operated.
8.3.6. Ring Main Unit
8.3.6.1. Definition
The term Ring Main Unit (RMU) is used for the overall of different types of compact
equipment indoor or outdoor which forms the MT equipment of a isolating station or of
a distribution station of an insulated cable network.
JMED/4NT/3210/000/01/CM
Final Ed. 01-12-19
111
The overall equipment consists therefore of two cells with isolator switch (to which the
feeder cables are connected) and of one or two isolator switch or fuse switch cells,
which are the outgoing(s) (protected or not) towards the distribution transformer(s) or
towards a distribution station in antenna.
The overall equipment is installed in a hermetic metal casing designed for indoor or
outdoor using.
 Feeder Switches
Each feeder switch shall be designed for manual and non-automatic operation and
shall be suitable for fault making and load breaking. The switch shall be fitted with
the following:
- a spring operated mechanism to ensure a positive switching action,
- double break contacts,
- operating handle with fully interlocked "ON", "OFF" and "EARTH" position,
- position indicators for "ON", "OFF" and "EARTH" positions,
- padlocking facilities for each of the above three positions,
- provision on the cable circuit for high voltage and injection current testing,
- interlocks to prevent the following operations:
 switching to the "EARTH" position when the switch is in the "ON" position
or vice versa,
 opening of test access cover, insertion or withdrawal of test device with the
switch other than in the "EARTH" position,
 switching to the "ON" position with the test cover open,
- vertical front plug-in type cable termination with bottom entry complete with al
jointing materials/accessories and suitable for one three cores maximum 240 sq.
mm 22 kV aluminium cable XLPE insulated.
 Transformer fuse-switch
The fuse-switch shall be designed for manual and automatic three-phase-trip
operation in case of fault. It shall be fitted with the following:
- a spring operated mechanism to ensure a positive switching action,
- double break contacts,
- operating handle with fully interlocked "ON", "OFF" and "EARTH" positions,
- visible means for ensuring that switch fuse contacts are in the "EARTH"
position,
JMED/4NT/3210/000/01/CM
Final Ed. 01-12-19
112
- position indicators for "ON", "OFF" and "EARTH" positions,

- padlocking facilities for each of the above three positions,
- vertical mounting fuse-carrier suitable for and complete with HRC fuse links to
DIN 43.625 specifications,
The opening of the fuse access cover shall automatically disconnect the fuses at
both ends from a "service" to an "isolated" position and shall permit easy re-
fusing,
- interlocks to prevent the following operations:
 switching to the "EARTH" position when the switch fuse is in the "ON"
position or vice versa,
 access for fuse renewal with the switch in the "ON" position,
 switching to the "ON" position with a blown fuse in circuit,
- vertical front plug-in type cable termination with bottom entry complete with all
jointing materials/accessories and suitable for a three cores maximum 35 sq.
mm 22 kV aluminium cable XLPE insulated.
Two different types of RMU have been standardised (see paragraph 9.1 here after).
8.3.6.3. Technical Characteristics
RMU shall have the following characteristics:

 Insulating and switching medium SF6
 Minimum rated current of feeder switches 400 A
 Minimum rated current of fuse switch 200 A
 Breaking capacity of switches 100% In
 Minimum number of breaking operation under rated current 100
8.4. Installation
8.4.1. General
Installation of the equipment shall be done strictly according to the recommendations

and instructions of the manufacturer.
The general layout of pole mounted equipment is represented in the “Standards
Drawings” (Section 5); forms and conception of the different equipment represented
are only indicative.
8.4.2. Installation particulars
 Reclosers shall be installed on the top of a pole; the pole will be strain fitted with
double horizontal anchoring set, the reclosers being connected in the strap of the
double anchoring set.
JMED/4NT/3210/000/01/CM
Final Ed. 01-12-19
113
 Sectionalisers shall be installed in the same way as reclosers here above.

 A set of three surge arresters shall be connected on the source side, before the
terminals of the recloser of the sectionaliser.
 ABIS
 ABIS shall be installed either horizontally on the top of a single pole, or vertically
on single or gantry pole (namely, when combined with an overhead distribution
transformer).
 The operating lever of the ABIS should be fixed to the support at 1.2 m from soil
level.
 A working platform of 70 cm side and 10 cm high, made of reinforced concrete,
should be built at the base of the support; directly below the operating lever.
8.5. Earthing of equipment and support structures

All the provisions of section 4.5 are valid for the equipment installed on overhead line
poles.
8.6. Measurements and inspections after installation – commissioning

8.6.1. Measurements and inspections
Before the end of the work, the following verifications and measurements are carried
out:
 Verification of the general technological state.
 Verification of the connections to the earth and to the equipment.
 Measurement of insulating resistance of equipment.
 Functional checks of equipment.
The verifications, checks, measures and commissioning forms part of an official testing
and commissioning report.
JMED/4NT/3210/000/01/CM
Final Ed. 01-12-19
114
9. Ground mounted distribution stations
9.1. General
9.1.1. Typical underground LV distribution network
The typical layout of an underground LV distribution network, coming from a ground

mounted distribution station, is given in the Standard Drawings (Section 7 - Folio 1).
9.1.2. Composition of distribution stations
In view of the MV distribution network, two types of distribution stations are to be

considered:
 “Branch-off” type
It is the typical “branch-off” transformer station mostly connected on overhead
network. The transformer and LV equipment are installed within a masonry wall or
in a masonry cabin. The primary supply of the transformer is branched on the
overhead line via an insulated cable; the primary protection of the transformer is
ensured by fuses (see section 8.3.4) installed on the branch-off or terminal pole.
The branch-off or terminal pole may be located within the masonry wall.
 “Feeder breaking” type
It is the typical “feeder breaking” distribution station connected on either overhead
or underground isolated cable network, equipped with incoming and outgoing
switches and fuse-switch for the transformer protection system; the MV cells are
usually of compact Ring Main Unit type (see section 8.3.6).
Two types of “feeder breaking” distribution station have been standardised:
- station type 2+2 comprising one incoming cell, one outgoing cell and two
distribution transformer protection cells.
- station type 3+1 comprising 3 incoming or outgoing cells and only one
distribution transformer protection cell.
The Ring Main Unit, the transformer(s) and the LV equipment are installed within a
masonry wall or a masonry cabin; however, the cabin could be located within an
existing building.
For the both above transformer stations, the LV equipment (LV distribution board and
meters mainly) are installed preferably in small masonry enclosures specially made for
that purpose; the LV distribution board(s) could possibly be installed in metallic
cubicle(s), outdoor type, within the masonry wall or externally, on a pavement for
example, but always closely.
The protection of the LV incoming (from transformer) and outgoing feeders are insured
as follows:
JMED/4NT/3210/000/01/CM
Final Ed. 01-12-19
115
 For the public distribution, by means of HCR cartridge fuses, as well for the LV
incoming feeder(s) as for the LV outgoing feeders; the protection devices meant for
incoming and outgoing feeders are grouped on the same frame (see section 9.2.4.2).
 For the private distribution (one client per outgoing feeder), the general LV
protection is ensured by a circuit breaker (see section 9.2.4.4).
The typical single wire diagrams for distribution transformer stations are given in the
Standard Drawings (Section 7 - Folios 2, 3, 4).
9.2. Design, construction and manufacture

9.2.1. Masonry walls and cabins
9.2.1.1. General
The typical masonry walls and cabins are given in the Standard Drawings (Section 7 -
Folios 11 to 18); these are dimensioned to allow at least the installation of a distribution
station type (2+2) or (3+1).
9.2.1.2. Construction specifications
 Foundation: reinforced concrete wall 80cm deep minimum.

 Ground: reinforced concrete raft of 10cm thick, set at 0.15m above the external
ground level; the required ducts for the MV and LV cables towards the equipment
are built and covered by reinforced concrete slabs; the soil should set to fall towards
the door at least 1cm per m.
 Walls: executed in blockwork and plastered with a cement screed (wood float
finish externally and smooth finish internally) and painted with latex.
 Roof (for cabin): reinforced concrete slab, with upward slope for rainwater
discharge and with waterproofing.
 Ventilation for cabins: natural ventilation by way of three openings in claustra
blocks in the walls, covered internally with a metallic grill. Two openings are
placed at the upper side of the cabin, the third one is located at the lower side, close
to the transformer, to ensure a proper air circulation in the cabin.
 Access door: the door is made of galvanised sheeting of 3mm thickness, properly
framed and braced by steel profiles to give sufficient rigidity; the door frame is
made of a U bars embedded in the masonry or concrete by fish tails welded inside
the U bars; the door opens externally, with a hooking device; the door should allow
a free passage of MV/LV equipment and especially the transformer; the door has a
handle on both sides, clasps to allows the temporary padlocking and a standard door
lock.
 The metallic doors and frames are either galvanised, or covered with two primer
coating; they receive after two coats of oil paint.
 Cable entry: all the holes required for the entry of cable should be designed, and
should come out on the external face at least at 0.50m in the ground.
JMED/4NT/3210/000/01/CM
Final Ed. 01-12-19
116
 Earthing: all metallic components of the station should be connected to the earthing
system, even the steel in the reinforced concrete.
 Lighting equipment and socket:
- normal lighting is made up of waterproof fluorescent tubes of 40 W, equipped
with a translucent cover made of insulating material (makrolon, PVC, …); the
light is controlled by a waterproof two-pole switch;
- a wall mounted socket 16A, two-pole waterproof type, is also installed in the
distribution station;
- the electrical wiring for lighting and socket is provided in PVC pipes fixed to
the wall by means of appropriate fittings;
- the lighting and socket circuit is supplied from the LV distribution board and
protected by a small circuit breaker.
9.2.2. MV Distribution boards
The MV distribution boards are generally of the “Ring Main Unit” type i.e. compact
assembly for internal or external use, depending on the circumstance, as described in
section 8.3.6.
9.2.3. Distribution transformers
See Chapter 7.
9.2.4. LV equipment for distribution stations
9.2.4.1. Standards and recommendations
The equipment should comply with BS and I.E.C recommendations, namely:

 CEI 947-1 and 2 LV equipment - circuit breakers
 CEI 947-4-1 LV control equipment - contactors
 CEI 185 Current transformers
 CEI 186 Voltage transformers
 CEI 269 LV fuse-switches
 CEI 337 Control auxiliaries
 CEI 947-3 Switches, isolating switches, switches
combined with LV fuses, in the air
 CEI 439 LV equipment assembled in factories
 CEI 144 Level of protection for envelopes of LV equipment
 BS 88 Specifications for cartridge fuses for voltages up to
and including 100v a.c. and 1500v dc
 BS 4752 – Part 1 Specifications for switch gear and control gear for
voltage up to and including 1000v a.c. and 1200v dc.
JMED/4NT/3210/000/01/CM
Final Ed. 01-12-19
117
9.2.4.2. LV Distribution Board
The LV distribution boards are four-pole (three-phase + neutral), either indoor or

outdoor type, the equipment and the busbars being insulated in the air.
The level of protection is IP00. The distribution board is of open frame type, self-
supporting sectional steel structure.
The frames are usually installed in small masonry enclosures, made for that purpose, or
eventually installed in a outdoor metallic cubicle (IP43 minimum), according to section
9.2.4.3.
Each frame comprises:
 Distributor units each fitted with the following:
- HRC cartridge fuse links porcelain carriers on the phases and withdrawal link in
the neutral. The porcelain carriers which should be of the through grip type
should be suitable for wedge type BS 88 fuse link.
- stud complete with washer and nut, on each phase and the neutral, suitable for
the reception of a cable lug with palm dimensions of 35 mm x 35 mm and a
fixing hole 12 mm diameter.
- an insulating safety shield between adjacent distributor units.
- insulating safety barriers to protect against accidental connection of fuse links
across phases.
- street lighting fuses with terminals suitable for the reception of a 5 mm diameter
stranded copper conductor.
 Bus Bars
One set of phase and neutral heavily tinned copper bus bars supplied in one length.
Two different types of frame are standardised:
 Four-way dwarf type - 400 A - with wedge type fuse link of 83 mm fixing centre,
 Five-way dwarf type - 800 A - with wedge type fuse link of 92 mm fixing centre.
Calibration of LV fuses
 The following ratings have been standardised:
- HRC fuse LV 83mm FC wedge type 100 – 160 – 200 – 315 - 400A
- HRC Fuse LV 92mm FC wedge type 200 – 315 – 400 – 500 – 600 - 800A
 For each LV outgoing feeder, the calibration of fuses is chosen in the above range
according to the state of the feeder load and to the cross-section and the length of
the feeder cable.
The following criteria for the choice must be adhered:
JMED/4NT/3210/000/01/CM
Final Ed. 01-12-19
118
- Fuse rated current = min. (1,1 x max. current flowing through the feeder)
- Current due to single phase fault at the end of the line > 2,5 fuse rated current
Earthing of the metallic parts of the distribution boards :
All metallic parts usually non-conductive are connected to an earthing collecting bar of
25 x 4mm2 located at the bottom of the distribution board. This earthing bar shall be
connected to the protective earthing system of the station.
9.2.4.3. Metallic cubicles for LV distribution boards
The above frame should be eventually housed in a robust galvanised metal or cast iron
shell suitable for tropical outdoor use and having the following features:
- Degree of protection IP43
- Separate section for the root to enable shell replacement without excavating the
root.
- Removable back panel.
- Facilities for cable jointing from the front by removal of the plinth.
- The lowest cable connection should be at least 300 mm from ground level.
- Double front doors of hinged type with possibility of opening to 180° and having
padlocking facility.
- Permanent earthing terminals.
9.2.4.4. LV circuit breakers
The four-pole 415-volt 50 Hz circuit breaker shall be suitable for the control/protection
of distribution transformer secondary circuits and complying with the following
specifications:
 Be designed with the following features:
- temperature compensated thermal overload operation,
- magnetic short-circuit operation,
- fitted with adjustable time delay unit to discriminate from consumer's circuit
breaker on short circuit faults,
- spring - assisted positive operating action,
- adjustable overload and short-circuit settings,
- terminal : vertical copper busbar terminal, with extension if necessary, suitable
for the front reception of cables crimped to bi-metal copper lugs or copper lugs,
- fitted with pole barriers,
- suitable for wall /stand mounting.
 Suitable for the control/protection of the following distribution transformers:
JMED/4NT/3210/000/01/CM
Final Ed. 01-12-19
119
Transformer Circuit Breaker

Capacity nominal rating
250 kVA 400 A
500 kVA 800 A
1000 kVA 1600 A
1500 kVA 2500 A
Table 9.2.4-1 : Circuit breaker - Nominal rating for protection

of distribution transformers - LV side
9.2.5. MV/LV cable links
9.2.5.1. Link between MV distribution board and MV/LV transformer
This link is generally made by MV three-pole underground cable (see chapter 6) or by

MV three-pole overhead cable (see section 3.3) of 35mm2 cross-section for a primary
voltage of 22 kV and 50mm2 for 6.6 kV.
Inside the MV distribution board and at the transformer, the cables are usually
connected by three terminals of one of the types described in appendix A.3.4/1.
The fixings of the cables are meant to resist electro-dynamic efforts due to short-circuit
currents.
9.2.5.2. LV links between Transformer and distribution board
These links are usually made by single core cables, AL or Cu, XLPE type, cross-
section according to table 9.2.5.1 below :
Transformer Phase Conductor Neutral Conductor

Capacity Cable number and Cable number and
(kVA) cross-section cross-section
(mm2) (mm2)
250 1 x 240 Al 1 x 240 Al
500 1 x 500 Cu 1 x 500 Cu
1000 2 x 500 Cu 1 x 500 Cu
1500 3 x 500 Cu 2 x 500 Cu
Table 9.2.5-1 : LV links between transformer and distribution board
JMED/4NT/3210/000/01/CM
Final Ed. 01-12-19
120
The connections to the LV terminals of the transformer, of the main circuit breaker
(possible) or of the LV distribution board are executed respectively according to
sections 7.2.2, 9.2.4.4 and 9.2.4.2.
9.2.6. MV/LV metering
 Metering for public and mixed distribution station

- Public lighting
In some particular cases, a single-phase or three-phase, 4 wires energy meter is
installed in the station for the metering of energy supplied from LV side for
public lighting.
The meter is mounted on an insulated timber support in the metering cabin of
the distribution station.
- Private customer metering
The LV metering for private customer supplied from mixed distribution station
is installed on the customer supply. The metering equipment comprises:
 a three-phase, 4 wire, energy meter used with or without possible current
transformers (“torus” type),
 a “Maximum Demand Indicator” when the “Declared Load” is higher than
30 kW,
 cabling and wiring between the different components.
The meter and the maximum demand indicator are fixed on an isolated timber
support and also installed in the metering cabin of the distribution station.
The possible torus TC are installed on the single-pole cables assuming the link
between the distribution transformer and the customer installation, into the
distribution station, in the nearest to the metering cabin.
 Metering for private distribution station
The energy metering is made from LV side when the client is supplied by only one
transformer of a lower capacity than 1000 kVA. The energy metering is made from
MV side in all other cases.
The metering equipment comprises:
 a three-phase, 4 wire, energy meter, generally electronic and multifunctional
programmable type,
 the current transformers and the possible voltage transformers (if MV
metering),
 a “Maximum Demand Indicator”(if the meter is not of electronic type),
 cabling and wiring between the different components.
JMED/4NT/3210/000/01/CM
Final Ed. 01-12-19
121
The metering equipment is installed in the customer distribution station and

generally in metering cubicles specially provided for that purpose.
9.2.7. Safety, interlocking and earthing
a) General safety conditions

Generally speaking, the protection of persons must be ensured permanently and
completely. Interlocking systems preventing any wrong operation should be
foreseen consequently.
The users must be able to operate and to carry out inspections and maintenance
works safely, without any reduction, even temporarily, of the earthing continuity.
b) Earthing
All metallic parts usually accessible are to be earthed according to the required
specifications (see section 9.6).
c) Working, operating and safety accessories
All necessary accessories and special tools required for working of equipment (e.g.
levers) must be available and easily accessible in all the distribution stations. The
following safety accessories, adapted to the MV distribution board, must also be
available:
- an earthing and putting into short-circuit equipment,
- a pair of insulating gloves, voltage resistant 24 kV,
- an insulated stool 24 kV,
- a fire extinguisher with at least 6kg CO2, with aluminium bottle and sleeve
convent for electrical fires, or equivalent.
9.3. Construction masonry walls and cabins

The masonry walls and cabins are built according to Standards Drawings (Section 7 –
Folio 10 to 13), to the construction specifications taken up in section 9.2.1 and to
general specifications for civil engineering for the installation of electromechanical
equipment (Chapter 15).
9.4. Installation of electromechanical equipment

Transformers and other MV and LV equipment are installed by following closely the
instructions and recommendations of the supplier, as well as those specified in this
manual at sections concerning the relevant equipment.
9.5. Installation of M/LV cables

The MV and LV cables are installed inside the distribution stations in compliance with
the specifications of Chapter 14.
JMED/4NT/3210/000/01/CM
Final Ed. 01-12-19
122
9.6. Earthing systems

All distribution stations must have a protective earthing (or frame earthing) and a
system earthing (or LV neutral earthing).
These two earthing systems are electrically independent and physically separated by a
distance of at least 10m; the table below gives the minimal earthing resistance values to
achieve, in relation to the ground conditions.
Earthing Resistance Ohms
Soil Resistivity Normal High
Protective Earthing 10 30
System Earthing (*) 5 20
(*)values to achieve, all LV neutral earthing electrodes being interconnected
Table 9.2.7-1 : MV/LV distribution stations - Minimal earthing resistance values
The protective earthing and system earthing can be connected, if together the earthing
resistance value obtained is less than 1 Ohm.
 Protective earthing
If and where feasible, the earthing system comprises of a loop of copper conductor,
cross-section 50mm2; the loop is buried around the station and, at the corners of the
foundation, is connected to two plates or four earth cross-rods or rods with adequate
connection devices (see sections 4.5.3 and 5.6.3); the loop, plates, cross-rods or
rods are buried to a depth of 0.5m.
If a loop is not feasible, the same number of plates or rods shall be used and the
loop shall be replaced by another lying arrangement according to the site
conditions.
Inside the distribution station, all non conductive metallic parts of structures and
MV/LV equipment, as well as the metallic screen, the earth conductor or the
messenger of cables, are connected to an earthing copper collecting bar; the links to
the collecting bar are made of either copper bar or copper conductor of minimum
cross-section 16mm2.
This indoor earthing network should be linked at one point or, if feasible and
preferably, at two different points to the outdoor buried system by means of copper
conductor(s) of the same cross-section of that used for the former; the connections
to the equipment and to the collecting bar are made by means of crimping cable
lugs, while connections between copper cables are made by means of compression
lugs or joints.
JMED/4NT/3210/000/01/CM
Final Ed. 01-12-19
123
Not any switching device may be installed on the indoor earthing network;
however, one or two copper terminal(s) (according to the number of links to the
outdoor earthing network), installed into the distribution station, shall allow the
measurement of the earthing resistance.
The steelwork buried in the raft of the cabin or in the slab foundation shall be also
connected to the earthing network.
 System earthing
The LV neutral of the distribution transformers is connected directly to earth; the
earthing system comprises one or several plates, cross-rod or rods, all buried
outside the distribution station at least 10m from any component of the protective
earthing system.
The different components of the system earthing are linked between them by a
copper conductor of 50mm2, while the link between the transformer neutral
terminal and the earthing system is made by 10kV insulated cable, cross-section
50mm2.
The plates or the rods and the conductors are buried to a depth of 0.5m.
 Measurement of earthing resistance
The resistance of the protective earthing and of the system earthing are measured
after the construction of the earthing networks according to the specifications
below; if the measured values exceed the specified ones, the earthing systems shall
be improved by adding rods or counter weights (see section 4.5.3).
9.7. Measurements, tests and inspections after installation –

commissioning
9.7.1. Measurements, tests and inspections
At the end of the work and before commissioning, the following verifications,
measurements and tests are carried out:
 Verification of the general technological state, in particular visual control of
assembly, of finishing, of labelling, etc…
 Verification of the connections to the equipment, to their auxiliaries and to the
earthing systems.
 Insulation measurement of the overall MV and LV equipment.
 Functional tests of all MV and LV equipment.
 Testing of current transformers by primary injection.
 Testing of voltage transformers by primary injection (380 V a.c.).
 Checking of safety and interlocking systems.
 Checking of the fuse calibrations.
JMED/4NT/3210/000/01/CM
Final Ed. 01-12-19
124
 Checking and setting of protections.

 Measurement of the protective and system earthing resistances.
The measures, tests, checks and verifications, and the commissioning, form part of an
official testing and commissioning report.
JMED/4NT/3210/000/01/CM
Final Ed. 01-12-19
125
10. Pole mounted distribution stations
10.1. General
10.1.1. Composition of distribution stations
The pole mounted MV/LV distribution stations, with transformer of 25 up to 250 kVA,
are always installed as branch-off on an overhead network in bare conductors or
insulated cables.
The distribution transformers are always protected on MV side by fuses; the fuses shall
be preferably installed on the branch-off pole, therefore outside the distribution station
structure.
The overhead distribution stations are mounted either on a single pole with a
transformer of 150 kVA maximum, or on two different supports (H pole or gantry),
designed for the supporting of a transformer of 250 kVA maximum.
An overhead distribution station consists of the following equipment:
 one or two concrete pole(s),
 a set of three surge arresters (in case of bare network only),
 a set of three MV fuses (if the fuses are installed on the distribution station structure
- see below),
 the transformer,
 the LV protection fuses,
 the supporting devices for the transformer, the surge arresters and the MV and LV
fuses,
 the MV/LV links and connections,
 the earthing system,
 all the necessary insulating and fixing accessories.
The standards and reference documents are the NFC 11-200 and the IEC
recommendations.
The typical configurations of pole mounted distribution stations are given in the
Standard Drawings (Section 6).
10.2. Design, construction and manufacture
10.2.1. Concrete pole
See section 3.1.
JMED/4NT/3210/000/01/CM
Final Ed. 01-12-19
126
10.2.2. Surge arresters
See section 8.3.5

10.2.3. MV fuses and holders
See section 8.3.4.

10.2.4. Supporting devices for transformers
The supporting device consists:

 either of a vertical metallic channel for the supporting of the transformer to be fixed
on a single pole; the channel supports a cross iron rod allowing the hooking of the
transformer; the channel is also made in such a way to receive, during handling, a
mobile lifting device;
 or of a double metallic transversal frame, made of U sections, for the supporting of
the transformer to be fixed on a double support (H pole); the transformer is directly
installed and fixed on this frame.
The transformer supporting device details are given in the Standard Drawings (Section
6 – Folios 30 to 33).
10.2.5. Distribution Transformer
See Chapter 7.
10.2.6. Protection of LV feeders
10.2.6.1. General
The pole mounted distribution stations are equipped with 2, 3 or 4 LV outgoing

feeders; each feeder are protected against short-circuit and overload by three single-
pole HRC fuse switches; the LV protection fuse switches are installed on the poles
forming the overhead distribution station, as indicated in the Standard Drawings
(Section 6 - Folio 10).
10.2.6.2. LV Fuse Switch
 General specifications
- suitable for control of the low voltage side 22000/415V outdoor pole mounted
distribution transformers,
- operated by means of hook stick at ground level,
- the fuse carrier shall be removable from switch base by means of hook sticks for
replacement of fuse link,
- suitable for mounting on square wooden cross arm 100x100mm,
- the fuse carrier shall be suitable for HRC fuse link of 11mm fixing centre with
bolted section,
- the terminals shall be of the palm type each drilled with a hole for connection of
copper cable lugs with M12x40mm stainless steel bolt and suit.
JMED/4NT/3210/000/01/CM
Final Ed. 01-12-19
127
 Technical Specifications
- Nominal system voltage 240v
- Frequency 50Hz
- Minimum breaking capacity 6kA
- Number of pole 1
- Nominal current 400A
 Standards
The LV switch fuses shall comply with the following standard
- BS88 Specifications for cartridge fuses for voltages up to and
including 1000Va.c and 1500V d.c
- IEC 269 Low voltage fuses
 Calibration of fuses for LV outgoing feeders
The following ratings have been standardised:
- HRC Fuse LV 111mm FC 80 – 160 – 200 – 355 A
For each LV outgoing feeder, the calibration of fuses is chosen in the above range
according to the state of the feeder load and to the cross-section and the length of
the feeder cable.
The selection criteria are the same as those reviewed in section 9.2.4.2, i.e:
- Fuse rated current = min. (1,1 x max. current flowing through the feeder)
- Current due to single phase fault at the end of the line > 2,5 fuse rated current
10.2.7. MV/LV cable links
 MV links
The links are made as indicated in the Standard Drawings (Section … Folios…) by
means of bare cable AAAC and/or round copper bars, in case of overhead bare
network, and by means of insulated cables, in case of overhead insulated network.
 LV links
The LV links between transformer and the LV protection devices are made by
insulated cables, cross-section according to the table 10.2.1 below.
Along the pole(s) of the station, the LV cables shall be installed according to the
recommendations of sections 4.8.5 and 5.9.2 , and also of Chapter 13.
JMED/4NT/3210/000/01/CM
Final Ed. 01-12-19
128
Number and Number and

LV Outgoing
Cross-section of Cross-section of
Feeder
phase neutral
conductor(s) conductor(s)
Fuse Rating
mm2 mm2
(A)
Al Al
80 1 x 50 1 x 54,6
160 1 x 70 1 x 54,6
200 2 x 50 1 x 54,6
355 2 x 70 2 x 54,6
Table 10.2.7-1 : Links between transformer and LV protection devices
10.3. Mechanical calculations

When calculating single poles and H poles, the following loads have to be considered:
 the deed weights of the pole(s), of the equipment and its supports, of the MV and
LV cables, of the insulating devices and of the all accessories,
 the wind load on the pole(s), on the equipment, on the MV and LV cables, on the
insulating devices and on the all accessories,
 the tension in the MV and LV cables,
 an occasional vertical load of 200daN for the weight of two workmen and their
tools.
The methods and conditions for the determination of wind loads and tensions in the
cables to take into consideration for the mechanical calculations are those mentioned in
Chapters 1 and 2; for the equipment, the dynamic pressure to be taken into
consideration is that mentioned in section 2.7.2.2.
The calculations shall take into consideration the load transmitted to the structure by
the MV/LV cables in the worst conditions, that is to say by assuming that all the loads
are exerted on only one side of the structure (by at least one terminal MV line and two
terminal twisted cables).
10.4. Installation of overhead stations
The pole mounted distribution stations consist mainly of equipment which are subject
to installation specifications already given in previous chapters, namely:
 Installation of MV line in Chapter 4.
 Installation of LV line in Chapter 5.
JMED/4NT/3210/000/01/CM
Final Ed. 01-12-19
129
 Installation of transformer in Chapter 7.

 Installation of equipment for MV network in Chapter 8.
All the provisions in these chapters referring to one or several components constituting
a pole mounted distribution station are applicable to the installation of the station,
unless inconsistency arises.
10.5. Earthing systems

As for the ground mounted distribution stations, any pole mounted distribution station
must have a protective earthing (or frame earthing) and a system earthing (or neutral
LV earthing).
Those two earthing systems are electrically independent; the minimal earthing
resistance values to achieve are the same that the ones given in table 9.6.1 before.
 Protective earthing
The earthing system is executed according to the provisions of section 4.5.3,
modified and/or completed as per recommendations below:
- the earthing system consist of two plates or four rods connected between
themselves by a copper conductor, cross section 50mm2.
- all non conductive metallic parts of the distribution station, the earthing terminal
of surge arresters and the metallic screen, the earthing conductor or the
messenger of the cables are connected to the earthing system by one or two
collecting copper conductor(s), minimum cross-section 50mm2, descending
along the pole(s) of the overhead station.
- the links to the collecting conductor(s) are made of copper conductor, minimum
cross-section 16mm2.
- The different connections are the following:
 connection to the equipment by crimping cable lug,
 connection to the collecting conductor(s) and to the underground earthing
system by compression lugs or joints.
 System earthing
The earthing of the LV neutral is forbidden on a common LV/MV support;
consequently, the earthing of the LV neutral of overhead distribution stations
should be executed on the first LV support starting from the station, and for each
LV feeder coming from the station; the earthing of the LV neutral are carried out
according to the provisions of section 5.6.
 Measurements of earthing resistance: see section 5.6.4.
JMED/4NT/3210/000/01/CM
Final Ed. 01-12-19
130

commissioning
earthing systems.
 Checking of the fuse calibrations.
 Measurement of the protective and system earthing resistances.
JMED/4NT/3210/000/01/CM
Final Ed. 01-12-19
131
11. Service lines and cables
11.1. General
This current chapter deals with the connection of customers to the public distribution
network either overhead or underground. This connection can be overhead,
overhead/underground or underground, single-phase (2 wires), or three-phase (4 wires).
It is called “service line” when it is overhead and “underground service cable” when it
is underground.
The principles for the branching installations are given in the Standard Drawings
(Section 8).
11.2. Composition
11.2.1. Overhead service line from overhead network
The overhead branching devices or “service lines” comprise mainly:

 one or two insulated twisted cable(s) 2x16 mm2 or 2x25 mm2,
 one (possible) service pole,
 accessories for the protection and the fixing of the cables on pole(s) and/or on
façade,
 one (possible) dismantle switch fuse to be installed on pole,
 connectors for branching on overhead network,
 one energy meter in a protecting box,
 one general circuit breaker for the limitation and the protection of the customer‟s
installation.
11.2.2. Overhead to underground service line from overhead network
The overhead to underground branching devices can be executed in different ways

which are indicated in the Standard Drawing.
The overhead to underground branching devices comprise mainly:
 one or several branching cables,
- either insulated twisted cable 2x16 mm2 or 4x25 mm2 fixed up between poles,
- or XLPE cable 2x25 mm2 or 4x25 mm2 installed on pole, on façade and in the
ground,
 accessories for the protection and the fixing of these cables in the ground, on
pole(s) and/or on façade,
JMED/4NT/3210/000/01/CM
Final Ed. 01-12-19
132
 one (possible) concrete metering cubicle,

 one (possible) dismantle switch fuse to be installed on pole,
 connectors for branching on overhead network,
 one energy meter in a protecting box,
 one general circuit breaker for the limitation and the protection of the customer‟s
installation.
11.2.3. Branching installations from underground network
The branching installations from underground network are executed according to the
following principles:
- The connections are realised by means of insulated twisted cables fixed up on
façades or overhead and connected, on one hand, to a LV distribution box and, on
the other hand, to the meters of the consumers.
- The LV distribution boxes, equipped with a bus bar, are installed on façades or on
service poles and are supplied by an underground XLPE cable, coming from a LV
distribution pillar.
Refer also to the underground network diagram in the Standard Drawings (Section 7 -
Folio 1).
The branching installations from the underground network comprise mainly:
 one XLPE supplying cable 4x95mm2 installed partially underground and partially
on façade or along a pole,
 accessories for the protection and the fixing of this cable in the ground, on pole(s)
and/or on façade,
 one LV distribution box completely equipped for the connection of the supplying
cable and ten branching cables,
 the branching cables consisting of one or two insulated twisted cables 2x16mm2 or
2x25mm2,
 accessories for protection and fixing of the branching cables on façades and/or on
service poles.
 the meters and their protective boxes,
 the general circuit breakers for the limitation and the protection of the customers‟
installations,
JMED/4NT/3210/000/01/CM
Final Ed. 01-12-19
133

11.3.1. Reference to previous chapters
The characteristics of the major part of equipment for the installation of overhead or
underground service lines or cables are detailed in previous chapters, namely:
 Service pole section 3.1
 LV twisted cables section 3.5
 Accessories for LV lines section 3.7.2
 Underground cables section 6.1
11.3.2. Energy meters
Energy meters shall comply with the following specifications:

System 1-phase 2 wire 3-phase 4 wire
Accuracy Class 2 Class 2
Supply voltage 230 volts 3x230/400v
Frequency 50Hz 50Hz
Rating 10-40A/20-80A 20-100A/40-100A
Register Cyclometer type, single rate
Suspension Magnetic or double jewel
Casing House service type and made of bakelite or
non-metallic material
Terminal Extended type
Data plate Marked in English and with letters CEB
The meter shall conform to BS5685 of 1979 and shall be suitable for tropical climate.
The meters are installed in insulated boxes (polyester reinforced of glass fibres) with
sliding lid, equipped with a translucent Plexiglas window and with a closing screw
allowing the setting of a lead seal.
11.3.3. Circuit breakers for limitation and protection of customers’ installations
The circuit breakers are intended for protection against over currents and short circuits
of wiring installation in domestic premises and of mixed circuit consisting of general
small commercial and industrial equipment. They are to be used indoors but in a
tropical climate.
The circuit breakers shall generally conform to IEC 947-2 or to other equivalent
standard.
JMED/4NT/3210/000/01/CM
Final Ed. 01-12-19
134
The circuit breakers shall be of air-break type, single pole and preferably operating on
the hydraulic magnetic principle. They shall to be used on a 230 ± 6% volts, 50Hz
system and shall have a minimum rated short-circuit capacity of 5KA. Each unit shall
have a fixed current rating and shall have a standard range of tripping equivalent to
type C of IEC specifications.
The circuit breakers shall be designed to surface mounting using non-metallic mounting
attachment that can be fixed with wood screws. The protective cover shall incorporate
means for sealing the unit to avoid access to the terminal whilst leaving the handle free
for operating. The letters “CEB” shall be indelibly marked on a mobile part of either
the cover or the enclosure of the unit.
Standardised circuit breaker current ratings: 5A - 20A - 30A - 40A - 50A - 60A
11.4. Installation of service lines and cables

The specifications for the installation of overhead or underground service lines or
cables are given in other chapters, namely:
 Assembly of LV lines Chapter 5
 Laying of underground cables Section 6.3
 Laying and connecting of cables Section 13.5
11.5. Measurements, tests and verifications – commissioning

11.5.1. Measurements, tests and verifications
After completion of the works and before commissioning, the following measurements
and verifications are carried out:
assembly, of finishing, etc…
 Verification of the connections to the equipment.
 Insulation measurement of the whole branching installation, including the
customer‟s installation.
 Checking of the electrical continuity.
 Checking of fuse and circuit breakers calibrations.
 Functional tests of the meters and circuit breakers.
 Checking and measurement of the earthing resistance of the customer‟s installation.
11.5.2. Commissioning report
official commissioning report.
JMED/4NT/3210/000/01/CM
Final Ed. 01-12-19
135
12. HV/MV substation equipment - MV side

The present chapter deals only with HV/MV equipment of substations concerned with
the distribution system, i.e. with 22 kV side of the substations.
12.1. Outside structures and MV accessories

The equipment should comply with the following standards and recommendations:
 Bus bars
- IEC 114 Aluminium alloy thermally treated for busbars,
of type Al - Mg- Si
 Conductors See paragraph 3.2
 Post insulators
- IEC 273 Characteristics of indoor and outdoor supports
- BS 3297 Post insulators of ceramic material or glass for
nominal voltages greater than 1000 V.
 Ball and socket insulators See paragraph 3.7.1.2
 Steel framework
Framework calculation will be done according to local regulations which are in
practice, or according to the following standards:
- AISC - 1978 (American Institute of Steel Constructors): Manual for Steel
Construction .
- CECM (Convention Européenne de la Construction Métallique)
 European recommendations for metallic construction ECCS-EG-77-2E
 European recommendations for the bolted assembly in the metallic
framework (1985)
- Euronorm 25 - "Steel construction for general use"
12.1.2.1. Metallic framework
a) Calculations
For gantry and framework calculations, the following loads should be taken into
consideration:
JMED/4NT/3210/000/01/CM
Final Ed. 01-12-19
136
- load due to conductors,

- load due to wind, corresponding to a dynamic pressure as defined in 2.7.2
before; for lattice work structures, the dynamic pressure is supposed to act at 1,8
times the projected surface, including the background of the lattice structure,
- vertical occasional overloading of 200 daN for the weight of two workmen and
their tools.
Calculations are made according to official regulations in forced in the corresponding
field; the maximum force to be supported by normal steel A37 is 15 daN/mm².
Maximum sag permissible due to all the loads acting on the gantries is less than
1/2000th of the height for vertical structures.
b) Materials
Materials to be used should be new and of first grade.
Steel sheets and sections should be of soft steel Thomas A 37; tubes for equipment
support shall be seamless and of soft steel; and of class A.
c) Execution
Lengths of sectional steel may be made by shearing. All the sections should be
perfectly straightened and without local corrugation; their extremities are carefully
trimmed to over-ride the burrs which occurred by the shearing. The tubes also are
trimmed.
All iron bending are hot made. Every bolt-assembly holes are either drilled,
punched or bored. Bolts are chosen such that after fitted and screwed, their
extremities do not extend from the nut by more than two threads.
Soldering should be made with appropriate electrodes and by qualified personnel;
besides fixations soldering, the assembly has tight soldering preventing humidity to
have access to the assembled irons.
Special care should be given to the constructions of tubular supports for which the
entablature supporting the equipment should be strictly squared on the shaft.
The execution should comply with the most recent prescriptions for metallic
framework.
d) Protection against corrosion
This is ensured by hot galvanisation according to BS 729 prescriptions.
12.1.2.2. Conductors, connectors and accessories
a) General
The characteristics of the conductors, busbars and branches are determined by:
- rated current,
- short-circuit withstand,
- limitation of tube sag to 1/150th of the span.
JMED/4NT/3210/000/01/CM
Final Ed. 01-12-19
137
All precautions should be taken to prevent vibration of the tubes under wind
pressure.
b) Installation and connection of conductors
Soft linking up conductors of high-tension equipment should not exert any
permanent traction effort on the former.
Tubular conductors set on the equipment and insulating support with zero
embedding moment; the design of the connections is thus chosen accordingly.
c) Fitting
Fitting should be of type and robustness according to the working conditions.
d) Connections
The connectors are made with aluminium alloy; for the connection of aluminium
and copper parts, the design of the connector should be such that bimetallic joints
are obsolete (sufficient contact surface).
Connections of soft cables to equipment are made with a compression connector on
the cable side and bolt-tightened connector, with a security washer, on the
equipment side.
e) Insulators
Types and dimension of column supports (post insulators) should be as far as
possible standardised to a maximum; thus column supports of bus bars and isolating
switches should be identical.
The mechanical characteristics of the column support are determined according to
the following stresses.
- permanent efforts due to wind (dynamic pressure according to 2.7.2) and to
permanent three-phase short circuit; the safety factor should be at least 3,
- dynamic effort due to short-circuits and due to wind; the safety factor should be
at least 1,5.
For ball and socket insulators, refer to section 3.7.1.2.
12.2. Outdoor MV equipment

The material should comply with:

 the latest IEC recommendations and to their complements, namely
 56 HV circuit breaker
 60 HV test techniques
 129 Isolating a.c. switches and earthing switches
JMED/4NT/3210/000/01/CM
Final Ed. 01-12-19
138
 185 Current transformers

 186 Potential transformers
 358 Coupling condensers and capacitive dividers
 694 Common clauses applicable to HV equipment
 99 Lightning arresters
 273 Characteristics of indoor and outdoor insulators
 51 Measuring devices, analogue indicators and their accessories
 211 Maximum power indicators of class 1,0
 258 Electric measure recording apparatus and their accessories
 414 Security rules for electric measure recording and indicating
apparatus and their accessories.
 473 Dimensions of embedded electric recording and indicating
apparatus.
 521 Watt hour meters of class 0,5 ,1 and 2
 255 Electric relays
 to the following standards:
- BS A.C. Disconnectors (Isolators) and Earthing Switches
of Rated Voltage above 1 kV.
- BS 5463 Specifications for A.C Switches of Rated Voltage above 1 kV
12.2.2.1. General prescriptions (applying to all equipment)
 Internal and external insulation should be:

- External: realised by means of porcelain insulator, resisting to temperature
changes,
- Internal: oil paper (converters), SF6 gas or oil (circuit breakers).
 Terminals should be of aluminium plates, the surface and number of fixation holes
of which will be determined by the rated current of the equipment.
 Height of the equipment support framework should be such that the distance from
the soil level of the insulator base is not less than 2,25 m.
 Mechanical toughness
JMED/4NT/3210/000/01/CM
Final Ed. 01-12-19
139
The equipment should resist to the following stresses :

- efforts due to wind in the most unfavourable direction, corresponding to a
dynamic pressure as in section 2.7.2,
- mechanical permanent efforts on the terminals, due to external connections
(static efforts),
- dynamic efforts due to short circuit, transmitted to the equipment terminals via
the external connections; these instantaneous efforts are either horizontal or
vertical.
 Control cubicles and boxes should comply with the following:
- be of robust outdoor type, mechanical protection IP 55,
- to prevent condensation, two armoured resistances should be used; one should
be controlled by thermostat,
- aeration louvers or small elbow pipes should be used; they shall be obstructed
with wire mesh to prevent insects from entering,
- the equipment having electrical contacts shall be mounted under individual tight
covers,
- external cable connection should be made through cable glands mounting on a
removable plate, placed at the bottom,
- a pocket installed in the box should accompany each equipment; it should
contain the schematic cable layout of the control.
 Protection against corrosion:
- all outdoor metallic parts are hot galvanised according to BS 729, including the
frames, reservoirs, cubicles, boxed and accessories,
- galvanism is a primary protection on which should be applied a protection with
paint compatible with zinc,
- aluminium parts, like protective covers, will be anodised by electrolytic means
(with the exception of terminal boxes),
- the axes, bolts, nuts and accessories should be stainless, in mass; for large
diameter bolts (superior than 12 mm), hot galvanisation is allowed.
- every precaution should be taken such that the metals in contact do not give rise
to electrolytic corrosion.
12.2.2.2. Circuit breakers
 Composition of circuit breakers:

- arcing chambers and probable repartition condensers,
- porcelain insulators supporting the arcing chamber,
JMED/4NT/3210/000/01/CM
Final Ed. 01-12-19
140
- operating devices of arcing chambers, including energy stocking devices,

allowing the cycle operation O-CO to be made,
- the steel galvanised framework supporting the pole insulators,
- a control box with auxiliary control, rearming and supervision devices,
- links (mechanical, hydraulic, pneumatic or electrical) between the control box
and operating devices of the arcing chambers.
 General principles for electric circuits:
- the remote closing is made by means of two parallel contacts (double opening
of the closing circuit),
- the remote tripping is made by means of a single contact,
- in any case the auxiliary circuits of the circuit breaker should need, for external
equipment, electrical contacts with a making capacity greater to 10 Amps or a
breaking capacity greater to 1 Amp under d.c. voltage,
- all circuits to be linked to external installation should be grouped in the control
box,
- after closing followed by an opening, the re-closing of the circuit breaker is
forbidden if the order of closing is still present (anti-pumping system); this
device is to be installed per pole in case of single pole control system.
 Security devices, interlocking mechanisms:
- interlocking mechanisms, acting on closing and opening sequences, should be
used if the reserve of energy accumulation devices for these operations are
insufficient,
- an external signal should be triggered via closing contacts when the reserve of
energy accumulation devices is not sufficient to undertake an O-CO cycle.
- functioning of the interlocking devices is to be remote signalled via an
independent closing contact (free of tension),
- interlocking systems affecting opening circuits should act independently and
simultaneously on the circuit of each opening coil.
 Control device - principles:
 the control device is of three-pole type,
 the reserve of stocked energy in the control devices should be able to undertake
an O-CO three-pole sequence, without any other contribution of energy from
outside.
 after the sequence corresponding to an O-CO cycle, the total recharging time
allowing another CO cycle should be less than 3 minutes,
JMED/4NT/3210/000/01/CM
Final Ed. 01-12-19
141
 after the sequence corresponding to a three-pole O-CO - 3 min - CO cycle, the

total recharging time, allowing another three pole CO cycle should be less than
5 minutes,
 the control device should contain all necessary interlocking devices pertaining
to the proper functioning of closing and opening sequences,
 any abnormal functioning should be signalled in the control box via an adequate
device and should be able to be remote signalled via a closing contact free of
tension,
 the two opening coils should act on separate valves, connected to independent
circuits; the security devices forming part of opening coil circuits should also be
double (manometer, limiting switch, etc…).
The following accessories are to be used (non-exhaustive list):
 mechanical position indicator of the circuit breakers chambers,
 operation counter,
 mechanical devices allowing operation of the circuit breaker during
maintenance work.
 Position indicating contacts
- position indicating contacts of circuit breaker opening chambers should be as
far as possible mechanically associated to the position of the opening chamber,
- the number of position indicating contacts is at least ten; they are of double
breaking type and their nominal intensity should be at least 10Amps.
- these contacts are used for external circuits; they are not inclusive of those
responsible for the interlocking of the circuit breaker itself.
 Electrical characteristics
- Nominal voltage 22 kV
- Number of poles 3
- Nominal current 800 amps
- Frequency 50 Hz
- Breaking of capacity 1 000 MVA
- Method of closing Motor operated three-pole
spring closing
- Voltage of closing coil 230 V d.c.
- Voltage of spring charging motor 230 V d.c.
- Voltage of trip coil 30 V d. c.
JMED/4NT/3210/000/01/CM
Final Ed. 01-12-19
142
- Voltage of indicating circuits 230 V a.c/d.c

- Termination 4-bolt connector for stranded
copper conductor
12.2.2.3. Air breaker isolating switches
Refer to sections 8.3.3.2 and 8.3.3.3 above, except that the ABIS shall have a rated
current of 800 A.
12.2.2.4. Current transformers
The current transformers should be of the single-phase type and of the following
design:
 dry type having an inner epoxy resin insulation and an outer porcelain insulation,
 wound primary type with two secondary coils suitable for outdoor installation,
or:
 oil cooled wound primary type with two secondary coils suitable for outdoor
installation.
The current transformers shall have the following electrical characteristics:
 Class to BS 3938
- Protection 5P
- Metering/instruments 1
 VA rating 15
 Rated accuracy limit factor
- Protection 10
- Metering/instrument -
 Short time current factor 100 for 1 sec.
12.2.2.5. Voltage transformers
The voltage transformers should be of the single-phase type, and of the following
design:
 oil cooled type, suitable for outdoor insulation,
or:
 dry type having an inner epoxy resin insulation and on outer porcelain insulation.
The voltage transformers shall have the following electrical characteristics:
JMED/4NT/3210/000/01/CM
Final Ed. 01-12-19
143
 Voltage ratio (V) 22.000/ 3 //110/ 3
 Rated burden (VA) 50

 Accuracy class to BS 3941 3P
 Voltage factor 1,2 continuous
1,5 for 30 sec.
12.2.2.6. Surge arresters
Refer to sections 1.4.1.3 and 8.3.5 above.

12.2.2.7. Earthing resistances
 The solid earthing resistance shall be of the unbreakable, jointless and rustless grid
type assembled in angle-iron framework enclosed by louvred ventilating screens on
vertical faces and flush fitting sheet steel drip proof top canopy and small mesh
base screens on underside.
 The unit shall be provided with lifting gear and mounted on base channels.
 The enclosure shall be galvanised and the enclosing covers/screens be zinc sprayed
prior to final painting.
 The grid banks incorporating both primary insulation and secondary insulation, the
former of Micanite/Porcelain and the latter entirely of porcelain shall be made from
high-grade silicon steel alloy.
 The High Voltage termination shall consist of one cable box suitable for the
reception of 95 sq. mm Aluminium XLPE cable and the low voltage termination
shall consist of a bushed stem complete with connector clamps suitable for the
reception of 130 sq. mm copper cable.
 The resistor shall be equipped with a current transformer, ratio 100/1, class 5P10 on
the LV side and a temperature indicator equipped with two pairs of voltage free
contacts.
The earthing resistance shall have the following electrical characteristics:
- System voltage 22 kV
- Resistance 40 Ohms
- Rating 300 amps for 25 sec.
- Insulation voltage 12 700 volts between phase and neutral
12.2.2.8. Outdoor capacitor banks
a) General
The outdoor 15 MVAr capacitor bank shall be sub-divided into 5 switched steps of
3 MVAr each. The bank should be complete with the following ancillary
equipment:
JMED/4NT/3210/000/01/CM
Final Ed. 01-12-19
144
 a 3-phase SF6 switch to control each step manually and alternatively

automatically via a VAR sensing relay,
 a 3-phase SF6 main circuit breaker to control and protect the whole capacitor
bank against over-current and earth fault,
 a voltage transformer, connected between each 3 MVAr bank star point and
earth to provide an unbalanced protection,
 damping reactors to limit the inrush current of each section of the bank,
 an indoor control panel for the automatic and remote/manual control as well as
for the protection of the whole capacitor bank.
The capacitor bank shall have the following electrical characteristics:
- Rated voltage 22 kV
- Earthing arrangement Effectively earthed
- Frequency 50 Hz
- Fault level 750 MVA
b) Individual capacitor units
 Standards
The capacitor shall be manufactured in accordance with:
- IEC 70
- NEMA CP11
- VDE 0560
- BS 1650
- ANSI C55.1
 Electrical characteristics
- Nominal voltage of network 22 kV
- Highest voltage for equipment 24 kV
- Rated insulation level
 1 minute - 50 Hz 50 kV rms
 Impulse 1,2/50 micro sec 125 kV peak
- Capacitor loss less than 0.1% at rated power
- Dielectric all film
- Liquid dielectric environmentally safe fluid and
non PCB type
JMED/4NT/3210/000/01/CM
Final Ed. 01-12-19
145
- Each individual unit of power capacitor shall be provided with internal

Discharge Resistor for reducing the residual voltage to 50 volt or less within
5 minutes after the capacitor has been disconnected from the source of
supply.
- Admissible overloads
 1,10 nominal voltage permanently
 1,15 nominal voltage 30 minutes/day
 1,30 nominal current permanently
- Unit capacity
Each individual capacitor unit may have any other of the following capacity,
or any other appropriate value provided all units are the same:
100 - 150 - 200 - 250 kVAr under nominal voltage
- Each capacitor unit shall be provided with an externally mounted expulsion
type fuse.
 Capacitor tank
The case of each unit capacitor shall be made of steel with all joints welded and
tested for liquid tightness.
Case finishing shall be made free from maintenance and coated with zinc
spraying to give an excellent protection against corrosion. After the application
mentioned above, it shall then be coated with the final outdoor enamel finish.
 Terminals
Each single-phase capacitor unit shall have two terminals and shall have two
outdoor porcelain type bushings which shall be hermetically sealed to the case.
Gaskets shall not be used for sealing purpose.
 Accessories
Each capacitor shall be fitted with two steel mounting brackets lifting eye and
nameplate. The nameplate should provide the following minimum information:
- rated kVAr
- rated voltage,
- number of phases,
- frequency,
- capacitor BIL,
- type and quantity of insulating liquid,
- dielectric material,
JMED/4NT/3210/000/01/CM
Final Ed. 01-12-19
146
- date of manufacture,
- value of internal discharge resistor.
- serial number,
- identification number or type.
 The bank set-up
The bank shall consist of five steps of 3 MVAr each. Each step shall be arranged
for earthed neutral operation.
 The mounting rack
The capacitor units should be mounted on open type hot dip galvanised steel
racks, factory assembled complete with busbars, damping reactors and base
insulators.
Assembly hardware such as bolts, nuts, washers etc., shall be hot dip galvanised
steel or stainless steel.
A parallel-groove type earthing connector shall be provided on the mounting
racks. The earthing connector shall be suitable for 15 mm diameter stranded
aluminium conductor.
c) 22 kV 3-phase switch
The 22 kV 3-phase SF6 switch controlling each of the 3 MVAr banks should have
the following characteristics:
 Type outdoor
 Voltage ratings
- nominal operating voltage 22 kV
- max. design voltage 24 kV
- impulse withstand voltage 125 kV
 Current ratings
- Continuous current 200 A
- Max. 50 Hz capacitive switching current 150 A
- Rated making current 9 kA (peak)
- Contact arrangement double break
 Operations
1. Electrical closing and tripping by 110 V a.c.
2. Manual by hookstick at ground level
JMED/4NT/3210/000/01/CM
Final Ed. 01-12-19
147
 Design features
The oil switch shall be housed in a hot dip galvanised steel tank and shall be
equipped with the following accessories/parts:
- two porcelain bushing per phase,
- lifting lugs,
- oil level indicator,
- OPEN and CLOSED indicators,
- top cover,
- LV terminal box with cover for control circuit,
- operation counter.
d) 22 kV 3-phase SF6 main circuit breaker
The 22 kV 3-phase SF6 main circuit breaker controlling and protecting the whole
bank shall have the following characteristics:
 Type outdoor
 Voltage ratings
- nominal operating voltage 22 kV
- max. design voltage 24 kV
 Current ratings
- Continuous current 630 A
- Max. 50 Hz capacitive switching current 560 A
- Rated breaking capacity 20 kA (peak)
 Auxiliary supply data
- voltage of closing oil 230 V d.c
- voltage of spring charging motor 230 V d.c
- voltage of trip coil 30 V d.c
- voltage of indicating circuit 230 V a.c/d.c
e) 22 kV single phase voltage transformer
The 22 kV single-phase voltage transformer shall have the following
characteristics:
JMED/4NT/3210/000/01/CM
Final Ed. 01-12-19
148
 Nominal operating voltage 22 kV

 Max. design voltage 24 kV
 Impulse withstand voltage 125 kV
 Earthing arrangement Effectively earthed
 Frequency arrangement 50 Hz
 Rated burden Suitable for the operation of the neutral to
earth unbalance protection
 Nos. of HV bushings 1
 No of LV bushings 2
 Accuracy class 1.0
 Voltage factor 1.2 Continuous
1.5 for 30 sec.
f) 22 kV Damping Reactor
Each step of the capacitor bank should be provided with 3 single-phase outdoor
damping reactors to IEC 289 to limit the inrush current of the bank. These reactors
should have the following characteristics:
 Nominal voltage rating 24 kV
 Nominal current rating 200 A
 Inductance 50 H
 Reactance at 50 Hz short circuit rating for 1 sec. 15 kA r.m.s.
37 kA peak
g) Indoor Control Panel

The indoor control panel which should be of the floor standing type, should be
fitted with all necessary equipment for the automatic or remote manual control as
well as the over-current and earth fault protection of the capacitor bank, and should
have the following features:
 Automatic/remote manual operation
The automatic sequences are to be controlled through a VAr relay, which
automatically operates the capacitor bank switches according to demand.
The remote manual control of the capacitor bank is to be achieved through the
operation of the capacitor manual control switches. In this mode of operation,
the capacitors should be able to be controlled independently and in any
sequence.
The above change-over should be effected through an auto/off/manual selector
switch.
JMED/4NT/3210/000/01/CM
Final Ed. 01-12-19
149
 Supply Failure Scheme

When supply failure occurs, this protective scheme should trip the capacitor
bank in case it was switched in at the time of the supply failure.
When the supply is restored, the scheme should ensure that the capacitors have
discharged before they can be switched in again either automatically or
manually.
An interlock is to be provided to ensure that the 22 kV main breaker cannot be
closed if one or more of the oil switches are closed.
 Unbalance detection/protection scheme
This scheme should detect the internal asymmetrical condition in anyone of the
five steps of the capacitor bank resulting from the failure of one or more
capacitor units.
The scheme should consist of a voltage transformer connected between the star
point of each step of the capacitor bank and earth. The disconnection of
capacitor unit or units in any particular phase should resulting in the operation of
a voltage relay connected to the secondary of the voltage transformer.
 Over-current and earth fault protection
This scheme of protection with appropriate static relays should protect the
capacitor bank against over-current and earth faults and should trip the main
circuit breaker in case of such faults.
 Expulsion switch fuses
The expulsion switch fuses shall have the following electrical characteristics:
- Nominal voltage 12.7/22 kV
- Nominal current 50 A
- Frequency 50 Hz
- Breaking capacity 50 MVA
It shall be supplied complete with:
- fuse link carrier,
- connector clamps suitable for the reception of a 14 mm diameter stranded
copper conductor,
- galvanised angle mounting bracket and fixing bolts,
- porcelain insulator/s suitable for moderately polluted atmosphere and
complying to BS 137.
JMED/4NT/3210/000/01/CM
Final Ed. 01-12-19
150
12.3. Indoor MV switchgear panels

12.3.1. General Requirement
This specification covers 6.6 kV and 22 kV single busbar indoor metalclad switchgears.
The equipment to be provided shall meet the following main requirements:
- ensure service continuity and operating staff safety,
- allow easy and minimum maintenance,
- ensure easy installation and simplified civil works,
- be easily adaptable to future arrangement and extensions.
The switchgear unit shall be laid out in the form of aligned switchboard.
12.3.2. Standards
The required switchgear shall comply with the latest issue of IEC standards, namely:
 298 and 694 Switchgear assemblies
 56 Circuit breakers
 470 Contactors
 185 Current transformers
 186 Voltage transformers
 255 Relays
 695 LV wires
 51 Measuring apparatus
 129 A.C and earthing switch
12.3.3. General arrangements for design and construction
12.3.3.1. Introduction
The switchgear shall be of the indoor type. The panel shall be metalclad according to
IEC 298 standard chapter 3.102.1, 1981 issue.
Particularly, the circuit breaker, current transformer and HV cable connection, busbar
LV devices shall be arranged inside four different compartments fully segregated by
metallic partitions.
Insulating bushing through the partitions shall allow:
- on one side electrical connection between circuit breaker and HV circuit
compartment and on the other side between circuit breaker and busbar
compartment,
JMED/4NT/3210/000/01/CM
Final Ed. 01-12-19
151
- accurate positioning of the fixed insulating contact without adjustment.

The switchgear shall not be assembled up against a wall to enable cable connecting
work to be carried out from panel rear even when busbar is energised. Cable connection
chamber shall be large enough to accommodate specified numbers of cable. Use of
junction boxes or splicing boxes before entering switchgear cable chamber is not
permitted.
Busbar will be located at floor level with easy access from panel front and rear. Access
to busbar will only be possible after dismantling covers using tools.
12.3.3.2. Panels
The switchgear shall consist of separate panels housing a horizontal withdrawable

circuit breaker and shall form an extensible metalclad switchboard. The panel shall be
suitable for floor mounting.
The design of circuit breaker and panels shall be such that circuit breaker service
(connected) or isolated (disconnected) positions shall be indicated by relative position
of the breaker in or out of the panel and directly visible from any switchboard front
location for any operator performing his duty.
Indication of service/disconnected positions only relying on mechanical indicators
(semaphore) or electrical indication (lamp) is not permitted.
Verification of service/disconnected positions through glass window or access door is
not acceptable.
The panels shall be designed in such a way to prevent access to any live part during
service, as well as during maintenance operation. The panels which form part of the
switchboard shall be mounted on appropriate anchoring channels supplied together with
the switchgear.
The switchgear manufacturer shall provide a civil guide drawing for installation.
To minimise civil work, the maximum tolerated panel width in mm shall be as stated in
the following table.
Cubicle Rating Maximum allowable

width in mm
Feeder 630 A/1250 A 750
Feeder 2500A and above 1000
Bus Section 630A/1250A 1500
Bus Section 2500A and above 2000
Table 12.3.3-1 : Metalclad switchgear panel maximum width
JMED/4NT/3210/000/01/CM
Final Ed. 01-12-19
152
The circuit breaker compartment shall be separated from cable and busbar
compartments by metallic shutters.
Resin cast shutters with a metallic earthed frame are nor permitted.
It shall not be possible to open shutters without use of a tool. Busbar and cable circuit
shutters shall be operable individually.
Swtichgear operation shall be made from the front.
12.3.3.3. Earthing of metal parts
All panels shall be interconnected with a copper earth bus running the full length of the
switchboard.
The cross section of this copper bus shall be designed to withstand the rated short
circuit current of the switchgear in compliance with the IEC 298 rules.
The withdrawable circuit breaker truck shall be fitted with a sliding contact to earth
framework in any position. The sliding contacts and the sliding ground shoe contact
shall be made of copper.
In addition, LV auxiliary control connector must also be provided with an earth plug.
12.3.3.4. Circuit Earthing
Provisions shall be made for cable earthing by means of an integral earthing switch of
the quick make type, able to earth the cables when the circuit breaker is in disconnected
position.
In order to shorten maintenance period, it shall be possible to earth simultaneously
different cables.
The earthing switch shall be located in the cable compartment and shall be operated
from the front of the cubicle and be independent of the action of the operator. This
earthing device shall be able to close against the rated short circuit current. Padlocking
facilities shall be fitted to enable the earthing switch to be locked in both positions.
The position of the integral earthing switch shall be clearly visible from the front of the
switchboard.
Mechanical interlocks shall be provided to prevent any maloperation such as:
- closing of earthing switch when the breaker is in service position,
- moving breaker to service position when the earthing switch is in closed position.
Use of keylocks or electrical locks to perform above interlocks is not permitted.
Integral earthing of the breaker transfer type is not acceptable.
Cable insulators shall be of capacitor divider type, connected to neon indicators located
on the panel front (one per phase). Neon indicators will be pluggable type for easy
replacement / maintenance.
JMED/4NT/3210/000/01/CM
Final Ed. 01-12-19
153
12.3.3.5. Busbar Earthing
When specified, busbar earthing will be achieved using a dedicated truck equipped with
earthing switch having the same feature as cable earthing switch. One busbar earthing
truck shall be provided for each substation.
Interlocking facilities shall be provided to prevent:
- insertion of the earthing truck when earthing switch is in closed position,
- removal of the earthing truck when earthing switch is in closed position,
- earthing of live busbars.
In addition, padlocking facilities shall be provided on the truck and earthing switch.
A set of three neon lamps located on the front of the truck shall indicate whether the
busbar is energised or not.
Busbar earthing by circuit breaker transfer is not permitted.
12.3.3.6. Isolating facilities
The circuit breaker shall be withdrawable and shall ensure isolation between busbars
and circuits when disconnected.
In order to prevent access to the live fixed contacts, a set of two safety metallic shutters
shall be positively driven by the circuit breaker during withdrawal, i.e. without any
spring or any effect of gravitation. These shutters shall cover each three-phase group of
fixed contacts on the busbar and circuit side, when the circuit breaker is removed.
They shall be coloured red.
Padlocking facilities shall enable locking of the two shutters in the closed position. The
two shutters shall be labelled with suitable warning symbols.
Shutter design shall be such as not to be operable without use of tools or testing
equipment. However, in order to perform primary injection for the cable tests, access
to the cable fixed contacts shall be possible through a special truck (see paragraph
12.4.3.8 hereafter)
12.3.3.7. Degree of protection
The degree of protection is IP305.

12.3.3.8. Cable Tests
The truck used for busbars earthing paragraph 12.4.3.5 shall also serve as testing
equipment, truck contact terminals being transferred from lower side to upper side.
A door located on the front plate of the truck shall provide access to the cable contacts.
This door shall be suitably interlocked in order to prevent the door being opened when
the cable earthing switch located on the truck is in open position. A set of three lamps
fitted on the truck shall be indicate whether the cables are energised or not.
JMED/4NT/3210/000/01/CM
Final Ed. 01-12-19
154
12.3.3.9. Circuit Breaker Test
The circuit breaker shall have a test position between the service and the disconnected
positions. When in test position, the circuit breaker contacts shall be disconnected from
the circuit and busbar contacts while auxiliary LV control circuit shall remain
operative.
12.3.3.10. Circuit Breaker
Circuit breakers shall be of the SF6 type. They shall require minimum maintenance and
shall have a high electrical type and rating shall be interchangeable. Circuit breakers
shall be of the horizontal withdrawable type and the withdrawable position clearly
visible.
Circuit breaker shall be four wheels truck mounted designed for horizontal withdrawal
and direct on-floor rolling. Use of handling gear or trolley to move circuit breaker is not
acceptable. Design base on vertical withdrawal is rejected. Circuit breaker withdrawal
or insertion shall be as simple and easy as possible, just by pulling breaker out or
pushing breaker in. Use of crank or gear is not acceptable.
Circuit breaker shall be securely fastened in both service and disconnected positions.
Handle used to unfasten circuit breaker shall also be used to perform hand spring
charging. Circuit breaker relative position in regard of switchboard alignment shall
evidence whether circuit is in service or disconnected position.
The circuit breaker shall be of the mechanical and electrical trip-free type. Built-in
interlocks shall prevent any mishandling and provision for keylocking shall be made.
It shall be impossible to:
- insert or withdraw the circuit breaker when it is in closed position,
- close the circuit breaker unless it is located in service or test position.
In addition circuit breaker shall be mechanically interlocked with circuit earth switch.
The enclosures of poles shall be of the sealed for life type, (type 3) as defined in IEC
56, with a permissible rate of leakage less than 0.1 % per year. The life expectancy
shall be at least 20 years. The enclosures shall be made of moulded epoxy resin.
Metallic enclosures are not permitted.
Circuit breaker poles shall be vertically laid.
The poles will be factory assembled and checked in strict conformity with IEC
regulations (accumulation leakage measurement).
By construction gas tightness should be factory checked and enclosure should not be
opened during life expectancy.
Charging mechanism lubrication shall be performed at least every 5000 cycles or five
years, whichever comes first.
The design of circuit breakers shall be enable checking the wear of arcing contacts
without opening the breaker poles.
JMED/4NT/3210/000/01/CM
Final Ed. 01-12-19
155
The mechanical life shall be 10 000 openings.

Circuit breakers shall be equipped with an electrical spring stored energy operating
mechanism, including at least:
- 1 electrical motor, recharging the mechanism as soon as the breaker is closed or
opened,
- 1 anti pumping relay to prevent the closing coil being fed continuously.
Operating mechanism using solenoid is not permitted.
In addition, circuit breakers shall be fitted with a built-in operation counter.
On the front plate of the circuit breaker, indication and control devices shall be
provided as follows:
- mechanical indication of the circuit breaker position, positively driven in both open
and close positions,
- mechanical indication of both spring charged and spring discharged conditions,
- provision shall be made for local manual tripping and closing of the breaker and at
the front of the cubicle a plate shall bear all the indicating and control devices
necessary to carry out normal service operations,
- local manual spring release,
- emergency hand operated local spring charging device.
The circuit breaker shall be equipped with suitable number of auxiliary switches. They
shall be positively driven in both positions and be mounted in such a way as to facilitate
maintenance and inspection. The equipment which constitutes the contact surfaces shall
be treated against corrosion.
12.3.3.11. Tripping and closing
The electrical tripping and closing devices shall be suitable for operation from a power
supply of 30 V d.c. and 230 V d.c. respectively, but shall operate satisfactorily over a
voltage range of 80% to 110% of nominal voltage for the closing circuit and between
50% to 120% for the tripping circuit, and under battery boost charge conditions.
12.3.3.12. Busbars
The busbars compartment shall be located at floor level.

When panels are assembled together, busbar compartment shall form a continuous non-
partitioned trunking.
Busbars temperature rise shall meet the appropriate IEC recommended value. As
required busbar may be insulated with flame retardant material having an oxygen index
not exceeding 25%.
The busbar compartment shall be separated from the other compartments by metal
enclosures.
JMED/4NT/3210/000/01/CM
Final Ed. 01-12-19
156
Busbar design shall be such as to limit the number of bar interconnections and
bushings. Bars should be integral one piece from one panel to adjacent panel and
busbar interconnections should be made on circuit breaker bushing.
Provision shall be made to allow for thermal expansion of the conductors due to the
normal load and short circuit currents.
Busbar inter-panel bushings are not allowed.
12.3.3.13. Cable termination facilities
The switchgear shall be designed so as to connect the cables at the rear of the
switchboard; provision shall be made for a passage of at least 500 mm in width, in
order to facilitate cable and jointing operation. In addition, the connection point shall be
located at 1 000 mm above the floor level so that cable jointers can easily carry out
cable terminations.
The bottom of this compartment shall be metallic and shall be fitted with a bottom plate
suitable for receiving cables and cable terminations of the specified types. This bottom
plate shall be equipped with conical rubber glands and cable clamps.
It shall be possible to gain access to the cable termination once the back plate of the
cable comportment has been removed. Should this be the case, a mechanical flag
located at the rear of the cubicle shall indicate whether the circuit earthing switch is
closed or not. In addition, after removal of the back plate, the position of the earthing
switch shall be clearly visible.
12.3.3.14. Current transformers
As far as the rated primary short circuit current and more generally the primary
electrical characteristics of the circuit are concerned, the current transformers shall
withstand the same current and voltage as the relevant switchgear. Shorter duration is
acceptable for low rated normal current. The current transformers shall be fitted on the
circuit side for feeder panels and inside bus riser for bus section panel.
Current transformers shall be resin cast type and shall comply with the specified ratio.
The accuracy class and the output to each current transformer shall be selected so as to
ensure a satisfactory operation of the associated relays, instruments and meters.
The current transformers shall be labelled individually.
12.3.3.15. Voltage transformers
Voltage transformers shall be of the disconnectable or withdrawable type.

They shall be protected on the primary side by high voltage fuses. It shall be possible to
replace the fuses easily while the panel is energised. This operation shall be performed
from the rear of the panel.
When cable voltage transformers are required, they shall be located at the rear of the
cubicle just above the cable compartment. When busbar transformers are required, they
shall be located in the bus section panel, on each side of the busbars.
Voltage transformers shall be of the resin cast type.
JMED/4NT/3210/000/01/CM
Final Ed. 01-12-19
157
It shall be possible to padlock the voltage transformers in the connected and

disconnected positions.
Metallic shutters normally closed and positively driven by voltage transformers rotation
shall open to enable fuses to be replaced when the transformers are in disconnected
position. These shutters shall cover VT's access once they are connected.
Auxiliary contacts shall be connected in series in the secondary circuits so as to open
these circuits so as to open these circuits when the voltage transformers are in
disconnected position.
12.3.3.16. Low Voltage Auxiliaries
Each cubicle shall be fitted with a low voltage compartment to accommodate all low
voltage equipment. All protective relays, instruments, meters shall be located in this
compartment and, when necessary, indication shall be visible from the front. The
circuit breaker truck shall have a test position in which it shall be possible for the
protective relays to operate the breaker. Interlocking facilities shall be provided to
prevent insertion of the breaker if the low voltage connector has not been plugged in.
On front of the panel, indication and control devices shall be provided as follows:
 Circuit breaker control switch.
 Local/remote selector switch (when required).
 Test terminal blocks on relaying circuits; these test terminal blocks shall be provided
to check that the protective relays are operating correctly. When testing the relays, a
special plug shall be provided to short circuit the CT secondary circuit or to open the
VT secondary circuit. As many test terminal blocks as CT's and VT's set shall be
provided for relaying circuits only.
 All panels shall be fitted with a set of three voltage indicating neon lamps; these
indicators shall be located at the front of the cubicle and shall clearly show whether
the circuits are live or not. These indicators shall be actuated by capacitive dividers
located in the cable compartment.
 Indicating lamps for the position of the breaker:
- red light for close.
- green light for opened.
 Terminal rows on top of each cubicle to accommodate external cable connections
and inter-panel bus wiring.
In addition, panels shall be fitted with heating resistors wired for 230 V a.c. operation.
Small wiring, used inside the low voltage compartment for connections of auxiliary
devices shall have a cross section of not less than:
- 2,5 square mm for circuit connected to current transformer,
- 1,5 square mm for other circuits.
JMED/4NT/3210/000/01/CM
Final Ed. 01-12-19
158
Low voltage wiring shall be self-extinguishable, insulted with black PVC, 1 000 V
grade, according to IEC 695 2-1.
Small wiring shall be suitably labelled at each end so that maintenance checks made on
wiring can be carried out easily. Marking shall be both ends depending in accordance
with IEC 391 paragraph 8.1.2.B.
12.3.3.17. Circuit Labels
Each cubicle shall be fitted with a circuit label of a suitable size, which shall clearly
indicate the function of the panel.
Cubicle labels shall be installed at top front and rear of each cubicle.
12.3.3.18. Paint
All metal parts shall be suitably protected against corrosion. A final coat of heavy duty
finishing paint shall cover the whole of the external part of the switchboard. Colour
shall be Grey RAL 7030.
12.3.3.19. Ratings Plate
A rating plate, which shall be fixed inside the L.V. compartment, shall have the
following information:
- rated nominal voltage,
- rated service voltage,
- rated normal current,
- rated frequency,
- rated short circuit current,
- rated making current,
- short time withstand current,
- power frequency withstand voltage,
- rated control voltage.
12.3.4. Particular Panel Arrangements and Electrical Characteristics.
12.3.4.1. Feeder Panel
a) Each Panel shall be floor-mounted, metal clad cubicle pattern complete with:
1. One triple pole 630 amp horizontal draw out SF6 circuit breaker with
individually sealed pole and designed for 1 22 kV 3-phase 3 wire 50 Hz
effectively earthed system, having a rupturing capacity of 25 kA and fitted with:
2. One mechanical ON/OFF indicator
3. One 230 V d.c. motor charged spring closing mechanism
4. One 230 V d.c. closing coil
JMED/4NT/3210/000/01/CM
Final Ed. 01-12-19
159
5. One 30 V d.c. shunt trip coil

6. One 230 V d.c. emergency shunt trip coil wired separately to terminal block. (if
required)
7. One close/trip control switch
8. One set of red/green/amber indicating lamps rated 230 V a.c./d.c. for
ON/OFF/Auto-trip indications complete with labels.
9. One set of neon lamps for the indication of live cable to be situated near the
cable compartment.
10. One push button for indicating lamp test.
b) One set of insulated busbars rated at 1200 amps.
c) Three current transformers ratio 150-300/1 amps class 5P10 accuracy 15 VA burden
for protection with additional secondary of class 1 accuracy 15 VA burden for
metering.
d) One two-phase voltage ratio 22.000/ 3 //110/ 3 Volts class 1 rated output 50 VA
for indication.
The voltage transformer is to be connected on the cable side of the circuit breaker.
e) One triple pole static type Inverse/Definite non-directional Over-current and Earth
fault relay fitted with instantaneous high set elements.
f) One static type sensitive earth fault relay. The relay shall be of the definite time
type.
g) One master tripping relay.
h) One 96 mm dial flush pattern moving Iron Ammeter scaled 0 - 400 amp and one
ammeter selector switch.
i) One 96 mm dial flush pattern moving iron Voltmeter scaled 0 - 25 kV.
j) One maximum Demand Indicating meter scaled (0 - 15 MVA) C.T. ratio 300/1 amp
and V.T ratio 22.000/ 3 //110/ 3 Volts.
k) One recording kWh meter

C.T ratio 300/1 amp and V.T ratio 22.000/ 3 //110/ 3 Volts.
l) Two test terminal blocks.

m) One set of instrument fuses.
n) One vertical rear cable chamber with bottom entry complete with disconnected type
cable termination and cable gland. Both the fixed part and the moveable connector
complete with all jointing material/accessories suitable for the reception of one three
core 240 sq. mm Aluminium/XLPE insulated cable to IEC 502 should be supplied.
JMED/4NT/3210/000/01/CM
Final Ed. 01-12-19
160
Jointing instructions should also be provided. The cable termination is to be located

at a minimum height of one metre from ground level to allow for cable jointing and
maintenance.
o) Identification label on each supervisory cable at each connection point.
12.3.4.2. Generation Panel
Idem 12.4.4.1 except that:

a) 5. is not required,
c) transformers ratio is 300/1,
d) - f) - i) - j) - k) are not required.
12.3.4.3. Capacitor Bank Panel
Idem 12.4.4.2 except that: c) transformers ratio is 300/600/1.

12.3.4.4. Incoming Transformer Panel
Each panel shall be floor-mounted, metal clad, cubicle pattern complete with:
a) One triple pole 1200 amp horizontal draw out SF6 circuit breaker with individually
sealed pole and designed for a 22 kV 3-phase 3 wire 50 Hz effectively earthed
system, having a rupturing capacity of 25 kA and fitted with:
6. Not required
7. One set of red/green/amber indicating lamps rated 230V a.c/d.c. for
ON/OFF/Auto-trip indications complete with labels.
cable compartment.
b) One set insulated busbars rated at 1 200 amps.
c) Three current transformers ratio 400-800/1 amps class 5P10 accuracy 15 VA burden
for protection with additional secondary of class 1 accuracy 15 VA burden for
metering.
d) One two-phase voltage transformer ratio 22.000/ 3 //110/ 3 class 1 rated output
50 VA for indication.
JMED/4NT/3210/000/01/CM
Final Ed. 01-12-19
161
The voltage transformer is to be connected on the cable side of the circuit breaker.
Fault Relay fitted with instantaneous high set elements.
f) One static type Transformer Tank Leakage Relay. The relay shall be of the
instantaneous type.
g) One six pole auxiliary relay for transformer protection. (Buccholz alarm and trip,
winding temperature alarm and trip, oil temperature alarm and trip).
h) One master tripping relay.
i) One 96 mm dial flush pattern moving Iron Ammeter scaled 0 - 1000 amps and one
ammeter selector switch.
j) One 96 mm dial flush pattern moving iron Voltmeter scaled 0 - 25 kV.
k) One Maximum Demand Indicating meter scaled (0 - 30 MVA) C.T ratio 800/1 amp
and V.T ratio 22.000/ 3 //110/ 3 Volts.
l) One Recording kWh meter

C.T ratio 800/1 amp and V.T. ratio 22.000/ 3 //110/ 3 Volts.
m) Two set of instrument fuses.

n) One set of instrument fuses.
o) One vertical rear cable chamber with bottom entry complete with disconnectable
type cable termination and cable glands. Both the fixed part and the moveable
connector complete with all jointing materials/accessories suitable for the reception
of three single-core 240 sq. mm copper XLPE insulated cable to IEC 502 per phase
should be supplied. Jointing instructions should also be provided. The cable
termination is to be located at a minimum height of one metre from ground level to
allow for cable jointing and maintenance.
p) The following equipment shall be supplied loose with each panel: one 500/1000
Volt outdoor current transformer ratio 150-300/1 amp class 5P10 accuracy, 15 VA
burden for tank leakage protection.
q) Identification label on each supervisory cable at each connection point.
12.3.4.5. Outgoing Transformers Panel

a) the circuit breaker is rated 630 amp,
a) 6. idem 12.4.4.1 a) 5. (required),
c) transformers ratio is 150-300/1,
d) is not required,
j), k), l) are not required,
JMED/4NT/3210/000/01/CM
Final Ed. 01-12-19
162
m) only one test terminal block.

12.3.4.6. Auxiliary Transformers Panel

a) the circuit breaker is rated 630 A,
a) 6. is not required
c) transformers ratio is 50/1,
d) is not required,
f) g) are not required,
j), k), l) are not required,
m) only one test terminal block,
o) the connector shall be suitable for the reception of one three-core 95 sq. mm
Aluminium XLPE insulated cable,
p) is not required.
12.3.4.7. Bus Coupler Panel.
Each panel shall be floor-mounted, metal clad and cubicle pattern complete with:
6. One set of red/green/amber indicating lamps rated 230V a.c./d.c. for ON/OFF
Auto-trip indications complete with labels.
b) One set of insulated busbars rated at 1 200 amps.
c) Three current transformers ratio 1200/1 amps class 5P10 accuracy 15 VA burden
for protection.
d) Two three-phase voltage transformers ratio 22.000/ 3 //110/ 3 volts class 1 rated
output 50 VA for metering and indication.
JMED/4NT/3210/000/01/CM
Final Ed. 01-12-19
163
The voltage transformers are to be connected one on each side of the circuit
breaker.
f) One master tripping relay.
g) Two 96 mm dial flush pattern moving iron Voltmeters scales 0-25 kV and one
voltmeter selector switch.
h) Two test terminal blocks.
i) One set of instrument fuses.
j) Identification label on each supervisory cable at each connection point.
12.3.4.8. Inter Switchboard Coupler Panel
Each panel shall be floor-mounted, metal clad and cubicle pattern. The Inter
Switchboard Coupler panel shall be linked to the off-load Isolating Link Panel (see next
section) by means of cables.
The inter swithboard Coupler panel shall be complete with:
6. One set of red/green/amber indicating lamps rated 230V a.c./d.c. for ON/OFF
Auto-trip indications complete with labels.
cable compartment.
b) One set of insulated busbars rated at 1 200 amps.
c) Three current transformers ratio 1200/1 amp class 5P10 accuracy 15 VA burden for
protection.
d) One three-phase voltage transformers ratio 22.000/ 3 //110/ 3 Volts class 1 rated
output 50 VA for metering and indication.
JMED/4NT/3210/000/01/CM
Final Ed. 01-12-19
164
f) One master tripping relay.
g) Two test terminal blocks
h) One set of instrument fuses.
i) Identification label on each supervisory cable at each connection point.
j) One vertical rear cable chamber with bottom entry complete with terminals and
cable glands for the reception of three single core 300 sq. mm copper XLPE
insulated cable to IEC 502 per phase. The cable terminations complete with jointing
instructions should be supplied.
There shall be interlocking between the Inter Switchboard Coupler panel and the off-
load Isolating Link Panel. (see next section)
12.3.4.9. Off-load Isolating Link Panel
Each panel shall be floor-mounted, metalclad and cubicle pattern. The Off-load
Isolating Link Panel shall be linked to the Inter Switchboard Coupler Panel (see
previous section) by means of cables.
The Off-load Isolating Link Panel shall be complete with:
a) An off-load 1200A isolating link on a horizontal four-wheel withdrawable truck
designed for direct on-floor rolling.
b) One set of insulated busbars rated at 1200 amps.
c) One set of neon lamps for the indication of live cable to be situated near the cable
compartment.
d) One vertical rear cable chamber with bottom entry complete with terminals and
cable glands for the reception of three single-core 300 sq. mm copper XLPE
insulated cable to IEC 502 per phase. The cable terminations complete with jointing
instructions should be supplied.
There shall be interlocking between the Off-load Isolating Link Panel and the Inter
Switchboard Coupler Panel. (see previous section).
12.3.5. Protection Relays
12.3.5.1. General
The relay shall be suitable for horizontal mounting, horizontal draw out in flush
mounting case finished in eggshell black and tropicalised.
12.3.5.2. Static definite time, non directional, over-current and earth fault relay
The relay shall be of the static definite time non directional with two poles arranged for
over-current protection and one pole arranged for earth fault protection, each pole
incorporating its own timer element. If required, the relay shall also be fitted with an
instantaneous high set over-current element.
JMED/4NT/3210/000/01/CM
Final Ed. 01-12-19
165
The relay shall be suitable for the following:

 Current setting range
- Over-current 50% to 200%
- Earth Fault 10% to 40%
- Time settings 0.1 - 3.00 seconds
- Rated Current 1 amp
 Auxiliary contacts
- Type self test
- Number required 2 pairs of normally open
- Rating 5 amps at 30 V. d.c.
- Indication hand reset flag indicator
 Instantaneous High set Over-current Element (if required )
- Current setting 200 - 400 - 800%
 Auxiliary supplies available
- Tripping 30 V d.c.
- Alarm 230 V a.c.
- Indication 230V a.c./d.c.
12.3.5.3. Static inverse/definite time, non directional, over-current and earth fault relay
The relay shall be of the static inverse/definite time non-directional with two poles
arranged for over-current protection and one pole arranged for earth fault protection,
each pole incorporating its own time element If required, the relay shall also be fitted
with instantaneous high set elements.
 Choice of standard/long time inverse time curves and definite time ranges by
switched selection.
 Over-current 50% to 240%
 Earth Fault 5% to 40%
 Definite Time Range 0.1 - 3.00 sec - (in steps of 0.05 sec)
 Inverse time multiplier range 10% to 100%
 Instantaneous element (if required) 100% to 100%
JMED/4NT/3210/000/01/CM
Final Ed. 01-12-19
166
- Type self test

- Rating 5 amps at 30 V. d.c
- Tripping 30 V d.c. (range 25 V to 40 V)
- Alarm 230 V d.c.
- Indication 230V a.c./d.c.
12.3.5.4. Static definite time, directional, over-current and earth fault relay
The relay shall be of the static definite time directional with two poles arranged for
over-current protection and one pole arranged for earth fault protection, each pole
incorporating its own timer element.
 Current setting range
- Over-current 50 % to 200 %
- Earth Fault 10 % to 40 %
- Time settings 0.1 - 3.00 seconds
- Rating Current 1 amp
- Type self reset
- Rating 5 amps at 30V d.c.
- Alarm 230 V a.c.
- Indication 230 V a.c./d.c.
12.3.5.5. Static tank leakage relay
The tank leakage relay shall be of the static instantaneous type. The relay shall be
suitable for the following:
JMED/4NT/3210/000/01/CM
Final Ed. 01-12-19
167
 Current setting range 1 - 10%

 Rated current 1 amp
 Auxiliary contacts type : self reset
number: 3 pairs of normally open
 Indication hand reset flag indicator
- Alarm 230 V a.c.
- Indication 230 V a.c/d.c.
12.3.5.6. Master tripping relay
The master tripping relay shall be of the instantaneous type and shall be suitable for the
following:
 Rated Voltage 30 V d.c.
 Auxiliary Contacts
- Type self reset or hand reset (as required)
- Number
 normally open four or eight pairs (as required)
 normally closed two pairs
- Rating 5 amps at 30 V d.c.
12.3.5.7. Static six pole auxiliary relay
The six pole auxiliary relay shall be of the instantaneous type for transformer control:
Buccholz alarm and trip, winding temperature alarm and trip, oil temperature alarm and
trip.
 Rated Voltage 230V
 Number of poles 6
 Auxiliary contacts per pole
- Type self reset
- Number 2 or 4 pairs normally open (as required)
JMED/4NT/3210/000/01/CM
Final Ed. 01-12-19
168
- Tripping 30V d.c.

- Alarm 230V d.c.
- Indication 230 V a.c/d.c.
12.4. Installation of equipment

12.4.1. Assembly of framework and installation of equipment
All metallic structures are assembled with threaded bolts and nuts, blocking washer and
galvanised nuts; the structures are supplied shaped, holed, chambered etc…; no
machine finishing, which may destroy the galvanisation, are allowed on site.
For the installation itself, plans and notices for assembling should be strictly followed.
All the metallic parts should be maintained during the assembly in such a position that
no stress is made to the fixing bolt.
After assembly the stem of the bolts should extend beyond the nut of a distance
corresponding to at least two threads.
All the structures after assembly should have no sign of assembly such as galvanisation
scratch, torsion, bending; any part showing such signs of defectiveness should be
systematically replaced.
Adjustment of the main framework shall be made by proper means, such as levels,
theodolite, etc …, by respecting the data given in the assembly plans and notices.
The foundations are made according to general specifications of the Civil Engineering
(Chapter 15).
12.4.2. Installation of MV conductors
Bare conductors and their fittings, consisting of MV busbars, are assembled according
to the prescriptions of section 4.7 and 4.8, unless any contradictions arises.
Soft conductors linked to MV equipment are placed such that they do not exert any
permanent traction effort on the former.
Tubular conductors are set up with zero embedding moment on the equipment and
isolating support and such as to prevent vibrations in winds.
12.4.3. Installation of electromechanical equipment
The assembly, fixing, linking up and adjustment of electromechanical equipment are

undertaken strictly according to plans, notices and particular recommendations of the
manufacturers.
12.4.4. Identification and painting
After the installation, metallic structures which are not galvanised should be painted;
live parts and earthed parts of the MV equipment should also be painted to
conventional colours.
Signal plates of high lifetime materials will be used for identification:
JMED/4NT/3210/000/01/CM
Final Ed. 01-12-19
169
 of bays (three for each bay)

 of equipment,
 of bus bars (at each extremities),
 of bus bars phases.
12.5. Earthing grid

12.5.1. Standard and recommendations
The equipment and installations should comply with the following standards and
recommendations:
 IEC recommendations
 VDE 0141 Limit values of touch and step voltage
 BS - CP 1013 Code and Practice for grounding
Calculations of earthing grid will be made according to the methods recommended in
ANSI/IEEE - Standard 80 - 1986 (IEEE guide for safety in AC Substation grounding).
12.5.2. General design
The earth grid will be designed to ensure an effective protection of the personnel
against electric chocks and over-voltages:
 the total earthing resistance should be less than 1 Ohm, anywhere in the earthing
network and in every season,
 the earth grid will be designed for an earth fault current of 300A-10 seconds,
 the step and touch voltages, corresponding to a maximum fault current, should not
be more than 125 V, anywhere in the earthing network,
 after the earth fault current had flown to earth during the time period mentioned
above, the maximum temperature of the copper earth conductors should not be
more than:
- 300º C for buried network,
- 200º C for the connections of equipment to the internal loops.
12.5.3. Composition
The earth grid will consist of:

 the buried earth grid (base network),
 various internal and external earth loops (buried or not) and the corresponding
connections,
 limitation system of the potential gradient.
JMED/4NT/3210/000/01/CM
Final Ed. 01-12-19
170
12.5.3.1. Buried grid (base network)
 The laying depth should be at least 1 m; backfilling shall be carried out using
excavated material in layers 15 cm thickness, each layer being well compacted, and
all the necessary reinstate woks shall be carried out at the soil surface.
 The base network will be made with buried bare stranded copper conductor, of at
least 50 mm² cross-section.
 The network will be meshed, with a maximum distance between mesh of 10 m, and
will be uniformly spread on the station area.
 The network will be connected at some places to earth electrodes, to achieve the
required value of earthing resistance.
 The connection to the earth loops will be made around every 20 m.
12.5.3.2. Internal and external loops (protective network)
For the connection of indoor and outdoor equipment to the base network, separate earth
loops shall be made; all metallic parts of the structures and equipment will be
connected to these earth loops.
 Internal loops: they should be of bare stranded copper conductor, connected to at
least two points to the base network, and laid on the perimeter of the buildings; the
minimum cross-section of the conductors would be 95 mm².
 Outdoor loop: they should be made of buried bare stranded copper conductor, also
connected to at least two points of the base network; the minimum cross-section of
the conductors should be 50 mm² and the laying depth should be at least 1, similar
to the base network.
 Connections:
Connections to the earth loop of all non-conducting parts of the substation should
be made with bare stranded copper conductor; the minimum cross-sections of
which will be:
- for HV/MV equipment 95 mm²
- for power transformers 95 mm²
- for LV switchboard and other metallic enclosures 25 mm²
- for cable trays, wiring boxes, protective conductor of LV cables 16 mm²
- for doors, fencing and all other metallic parts 50 mm²
The connection of surge arresters, of the neutral point of the transformers and of the
earthing transformers to the earth loops are made with insulated cables; the
following minimum sections and insulating level should be taken into
consideration:
JMED/4NT/3210/000/01/CM
Final Ed. 01-12-19
171
- neutral of transformers 24 kV - 50 mm²

- earthing transformers 10 kV - 25 mm²
- surge arresters base 10 kV - 50 mm²
12.5.3.3. Limiting of the step voltage
A buried earthing network of stranded copper conductor shall be made near HV/MV
outdoor equipment, in order to reduce the step voltage to 125 V during the maximum
short-circuit current occurrence; the minimum cross-section of the conductor should be
95 mm². This network will be connected to the buried earth network.
12.5.3.4. Particular location of earth electrodes
Earth electrodes should necessarily be located at the following places:

 neutral point of transformers,
 earthing resistances,
 surge arresters,
 earthing switch of HV/MV isolating switches.
12.5.4. Connections
 Buried connections shall be made with crimped joints (hydraulic press crimped.
 Connections to the earth loops shall be made with compression joints.
 Connections to the framework and equipment supports shall be made by looping of
cables of the external network (external loops), by means of compression joints,
allowing also the connection of protective earthing conductors of electromechanical
equipment.
 Connection to equipment with crimped cable lugs.
12.5.5. Measuring terminal
Easily accessible terminals allowing measurement of the resistance of the earth grid shall
be installed at different places into the substation.
12.5.6. Fencing
The metallic fencing, inside and around the substation, will be connected to the buried
earthing network about every 15 m, at every corners and access doors.
An additional conductor should be buried outside the fencing, at a depth of 0,5 m and at
least 1m from the former, in order to limit the step voltage.
The access doors will be connected to the fencing by stranded copper flexible
connections.
JMED/4NT/3210/000/01/CM
Final Ed. 01-12-19
172

commissioning
earthing system.
 Verification of control and protection wiring.
 Functional tests of all MV and LV equipment, namely:
- testing of local control and remote control,
- testing and recording of opening and closing time of MV circuit breaker, per
pole,
- checking of synchronism of the poles for MV isolating switches, load switches
and circuit breakers.
 Checking of security system, interlocking and signalling.
 Testing of current transformers by primary injection.
 Testing of voltage transformers by primary injection (380 V a.c.).
 Functional tests of protections, alarms, indicating apparatus, measuring instruments
and associated automatisms.
 Setting of protections.
 General verification of the connections to the earthing system.
 Checking of continuity of the earthing circuits.
 Measurement of the global earthing resistance at different places of the substation.
 Measurement of step and touch voltages at different places of the substation.
JMED/4NT/3210/000/01/CM
Final Ed. 01-12-19
173
13. Power and control cables
13.1. General
The present chapter deals with power, control and sign cables installed particularly in
substations and distribution stations.

Cables should comply with the latest IEC recommendations and to their complements,
namely:
 28 Standards for copper resistance
 60 HT testing techniques
 183 Guide for the choice of HT cables
 228 Conductors for insulated cables
 230 Surge test techniques for cables and their accessories
 287 Calculations of permanent admissible currents in cables
 391 Identification of insulated conductors
 446 Identification by colours of insulated cables
 502 1 to 30 kV power cables with extruded insulation.
 540 and 811 Test methods for the insulation and screens of electrical cables.
The following standards are also of application:
 BS 6346 Specification for PVC insulated cables for electricity supply
 HN 335 34 EDF specifications
13.3. Functional specifications

13.3.1. Working Conditions
The working conditions are given in section 1.3.

13.3.2. Permanent current
The maximum permanent admissible current and the cross-section of the conductors of
each cable will be determined taking into account the maximum power to be
transported, the ambient temperature and the laying conditions, such as proximity with
other cables, temperature and soil resistivity.
JMED/4NT/3210/000/01/CM
Final Ed. 01-12-19
174
13.3.3. Short-circuit withstand of power cables
The cross-section of the cables should be such that the maximum short-circuit current
may travel through the cables without damage, during the operation time of the
upstream protections set up to protect the cables and associated loads.
The minimum short-circuit period is of 1 sec.
The same prescriptions are still valid for cable protective screens during earth faults.
13.3.4. Volt drop
The cross-section of the cables should be such that the voltage at the loaded end of the
cable should not be below the fixed limits during the transit of the maximum charge or
during the start up of motors.
13.3.5. Nominal voltage
 MV power cable 12,7/22 kV class

 LV power cable 0,6/1 kV class
 Control and sign cable
- Operating voltage greater than 60 V 1 kV class
- Operating voltage less than 60 V 0,5 kV class
13.3.6. Minimum cross-section of conductors
Minimum cross-sections of cable conductors are:

 4 mm² (twisted wires) for power cables and cables connected to converters (CT,
VT,); however, for connecting to CT with 5 Amp. secondary output and a length of
cable of more than 20 m, use of a minimum of 6 mm² conductors will be made.
 2,5 mm² (twisted wires) for control cables;
 1,5 mm² (twisted wires) for all sign cables with an operating voltage greater than
60V.
 1 mm² (twisted wires) for sign cables with an operating voltage less than 60 V.
Multi-core control and sign cables would comprise at least 20% of spare conductors;
the number of conductors will not be more than 36.
13.3.7. Standardisation
For evident reasons of standardisation, different types of cables and different conductor
cross-sections should be reduced to a minimum.
Power cables may be used in parallel to satisfy this condition (a maximum of three
cables are authorised).
JMED/4NT/3210/000/01/CM
Final Ed. 01-12-19
175

13.4.1. MV Power cables
MV power cables shall be of XLPE insulation type :

- single-core, stranded copper or aluminium conductor, semi-conductor screened,
earth screened, and PVC overall insulated,
- three-core, stranded copper or aluminium conductor, semi-conductor screened,
cross-linked polyethylene insulated, semi-conductive core-screen, copper tape earth
screened, armoured with galvanised steel wires or tape and PVC overall insulated.
The structure of the cables shall comply with IEC 502 recommendations.
13.4.2. LV Power cables
LV power cables shall be of XLPE insulation type :

- single-core, stranded copper or aluminium conductor, cross-linked polyethylene
insulated black PVC sheathed overall,
- three-core, stranded copper or aluminium conductor, cross-linked polyethylene
insulated, PVC sheathed, single galvanised wire armoured black PVC sheathed
overall.
If required, a neutral or protective conductor shall be comprised under the outer sheath
of the cable.
The cable structure will comply with IEC 502 recommendations.
13.4.3. Control and Sign cables
Control and sign cables shall be multi-core stranding, copper conductor, PV insulated,
PVC sheathed, armoured with a single layer of galvanised steel wires and black PVC
sheathed overall.
The cable will comply with BS 6346.
13.4.4. Outside cover, cable identification and conductor marking
The external sheath of all types of cables shall contain additives that repel rodents; the
name of the manufacturer, the allowable voltage, the cross-section, the number of
conductors and the date of manufacture shall be indicated along the whole length on the
external sheath of the cable.
The letters and characters shall be engraved in relief. The distance between the marking
shall not exceed 200 mm.
The insulation of the three-core cables should be differentiated by colours along their
whole length; in the case where a neutral conductor is foreseen, it shall be of blue
colour.
JMED/4NT/3210/000/01/CM
Final Ed. 01-12-19
176
The external insulation sheath of the protective earthing wire (if foreseen) shall be
yellow/green according to IEC 446.
13.4.5. Transport and handling
The cable ends shall be impervious to water, dust and insects and the ends coming out
of cable drums shall be fixed and protected against mechanical shocks while handling.
The cables shall be coiled in timber drums (treated against termites) or metal drums
(treated to prevent corrosion) so as to obtain maximum possible length. However, the
drums shall have a maximum diameter of 2 400 mm and a maximum weight of
5 000 kg.
13.5. Laying and connection of cables.

13.5.1. Laying of cables
13.5.1.1. Laying conditions
Generally, the cables are laid:

 directly in the soil,
 in an underground pipe network,
 in cable conduits,
 on cable trays.
Unless stated otherwise, cables are laid in accordance with the following provisions:
 generally, cables would never be exposed directly to solar radiation,
 control cables and power cables are to be laid separately and strictly according to
their bending radius,
 the cables should be laid of one length,
 if necessary, cables should be protected by covers to prevent any damage,
 power cables and control cables will be laid in different trays or in different pipes;
all necessary precautions should be taken to prevent magnetic induction on low
voltage control cables,
 control cables will be laid on two layers maximum and on one layer for power
cables,
 filling factor for cables laid in pipes would be of a maximum of 0,5.
13.5.1.2. Laying in the ground
All the specifications relative to chapter 6 are valid; inside substations, cables shall
always be mechanically protected by concrete slabs.
JMED/4NT/3210/000/01/CM
Final Ed. 01-12-19
177
13.5.1.3. Concrete conduit
Conduits will be dimensioned such as to have 20% spare after installation of cable trays
and/or laying of cables.
They are generally recovered with concrete slabs or striated metal plates.
They are to be made according to Civil Engineering general recommendations in
Chapter 15 hereafter.
13.5.1.4. Underground pipe network
It will consist of tarred galvanised metallic pipes, concrete pipes or PVC pipes, fitted
with adequate joints; the pipe network will be made according to chapter 6.
As general rule, the cables are laid in pipes for road crossings.
If necessary, draw / inspection pits would be built along the pipe network; they will be
also made according to chapter 15.
13.5.1.5. Cable trays
Cable trays will consist of metal sheets or of sectional steel; they will be of "ladder"
type or "perforated duct" type and will have a maximum width of 600 mm, an
admissible charge of 2000 N/m and a support spacing limited to 1500 mm.
They would be sufficiently rigid and will be dimensioned to support the weight of a
layer of power cables, or of two layers of control cables, plus 25% of the maximum
cable weight to be placed. Furthermore, the cable trays will be dimensioned such as to
support, in all security and without permanent buckling, the weight of the assembling
personnel during the laying up of the cables. In normal situations, the sag should not
exceed 3 mm.
All the cable trays, supports, consoles, wedges and other accessories, will be hot
galvanised and covered with a translucent coating. All bolts and nuts will be hot
galvanised. The cuts will be carefully burned and coated with two layers of paint
compatible with the initial protection.
Cable trays of the "ladder" type will be used in closed rooms, may be in cable trenches
or in outdoor zones not prone to high degrees of pollution or to direct sunlight; they
will consist of riveted metallic extrusions and the gap between the bars will be at least
300 mm.
Cable trays of "perforated duct" type will be placed everywhere the ladder type is
proscribed; the thickness of the metal before galvanisation will not be less than 1,5 mm;
vertical linings will be of a maximum height of 45 mm and will be fitted with a border
along the higher part; they will be fitted with rigid metal sheet covers, fixed by ad-hoc
locks.
All cable trays will be fixed rigidly on steel supports or frames; cable trays placed on
above the other will have a maximum spacing of half their width, but at least of
150 mm. Vertical layouts will be made with perforated cable trays fitted with covers or
with sectional steel, horizontally laid and distanced at least 500 mm between them.
JMED/4NT/3210/000/01/CM
Final Ed. 01-12-19
178
Generally, single-core cables will be fixed to the trays with isolated ties, distanced
according to cable manufacturer recommendations; they will be fixed such as to resist
short-circuit electrodynamics stresses.
Cable trays will consist of modular elements having all the accessories and pieces to
change direction, level and width.
13.5.2. Connection of cables
13.5.2.1. Terminals for MV cables
MV cables are connected to equipment via terminals, designed for indoor or outdoor
use, as detailed in appendix A 3.4/1.
The terminals will be executed very carefully by specialist staff according to the
manufacturer instructions.
Cable screening will be directly earthed at both extremities.
13.5.2.2. Terminals for LV cables
 Power Cables: compression lugs.

 Control cables: crimping lugs.
 Watertightness is assured by heat shrinkable sheathes or tubes.
13.5.2.3. Watertightness and sealing
All outer connections should be watertight (IP55); thus appropriate sealing methods
should be used to satisfy this condition.
Generally, each cable entry in outdoor panel or switchboard will be fitted with a cable
gland of conic tightening and with joint; only cable glands of stainless steel are
accepted for metallic enclosures.
13.5.3. Cables exit from ground - wall crossing
For cables exit from the ground, specifications as given in section 6.3.7 are to be
applied.
Wall, partitions, ceiling crossings, etc … will be done with tubes or cuffs sealed in the
wall, according to the number of cables to be laid.
Openings will be closed such that it is airtight, dust tight, watertight and fire resistant.
13.5.4. Identifying of cables and conductors
Cables will be fitted at each end and every 20m with an identification plate indicating
the cable number as per the list of cables; the plates are manufactured with a long
lasting material.
Each conductor of control cables will be identify according to IEC 391
recommendation; the marking will be heat resistant (802) and will be readable during
their probable life time of 30 years; self-adhesive labels are not allowed.
JMED/4NT/3210/000/01/CM
Final Ed. 01-12-19
179
13.6. Inspection and testing after installation- commissioning

13.6.1. Inspection and testing after installation
After completion of the works and before commissioning, the following measurements,
tests and verifications are carried out:
 verification of the connections to the equipment,
 verification of the general technological state, particularly visual check of
installation, fixations, protections, identifying, etc…,
 pressure tests and insulation measurements for HT/MT cables after execution of
terminals at both ends,
 insulation measurements of LV cables after execution of terminals.
The measurements, tests and verifications, and the commissioning, forms part of an
JMED/4NT/3210/000/01/CM
Final Ed. 01-12-19
180
14. Tests and inspections during and after installation
14.1. General
The present recommendations are to be applied for verifications, tests and
measurements on every electrical and electromechanical parts of MV/LV distribution
network, MV/LV distribution station and HV/MV substation, during and after the
installation of the equipment.
They are not restrictive and confirm or complete the recommendations of the former
chapters.
14.2. Tests and inspections during installation

 Routine classical visual inspections related to conformity of materials and
installation.
 Punctual measurements of earthing resistance with eventual improvement until
reaching the specified values.
 Verification of insulating distances.
 Verification of ground clearances, clearances to obstacles, etc…
14.3. Tests and inspections before commissioning

 Final classical visual inspections related to conformity of materials and installation.
 Continuity test of all circuits and verification of proper tightening of the connectors,
including earth circuits.
 Verification of proper cable identifying and phase correspondence.
 Verification of control and protection circuit wiring.
 Measurements of insulating resistances.
 Measurements of resistances, reactances and impedances of MV lines.
 Pressure tests on MV cables according to IEC 502 recommendations.
 Verification of proper mechanical functioning of equipment.
 Tests on voltage and current transformers.
 Verification of proper functioning of protections, alarms, controls, signs.
 Setting of protection relays.
 Verification of locking mechanisms.
 Visual verification of oil levels.
 Dielectric test of oils.
JMED/4NT/3210/000/01/CM
Final Ed. 01-12-19
181
 Setting of off-load position of transformers.

 Verification of proper functioning of tap-changer of transformers.
 Verification of fuse ratings.
 Measurements of earthing resistances for MV lines, distribution stations (protective
earthing and system earthing) and HV/MV substations.
14.4. Inspection after commissioning

 Verification of voltage level on the LV network, near the MV source, and
adjustment of transformer tapings accordingly.
 Verification of phase balancing (based on the load).
 Adjustment of control devices of street lighting.
 Verification of proper functioning of meters.
14.5. Particular specifications

14.5.1. Measurement of insulating resistances
 Equipment to be used :
Rated Voltage Megger to be used
220/400 V 500 V
6.6 kV 2500 V
22 kV 5000 V
Table 14.5.1-1 : Measurement of insulating resistances – Equipment to be used.
 Minimal insulating values to be measured with the megger for different equipment:
Minimal Resistance M
Rated Voltage
Transformer
Cubicle Cables
(at 40 C)
110, 220 V (CC ou CA) 10 M For each feeder :
400 V 100 M 10 M
R insulation (M) 
10 x voltage (kV)
6.6 kV 100 M 50 M Length (km)
22 kV 200 M 200 M
Table 14.5.1-2 : Measurement of insulating resistances – Minimal values
JMED/4NT/3210/000/01/CM
Final Ed. 01-12-19
182
 Measurement of insulating resistances of underground cables should be made

before backfilling of the trenches.
 For MV cables, insulating resistances would be measured before and after
execution of the joints and terminals.
14.5.2. Dielectric test of oils
The present paragraph does not concern transformers of hermetic type.

For breathing transformers and low volume oil breakers, dielectric level of the oils will
be measured with a spinter meter. Minimal value to be obtained for new oil is 40 kV for
1 minute with VDE electrodes (mushroom type diameter 25 mm), with an electrode
inter-distance of 2,5 mm.
JMED/4NT/3210/000/01/CM
Final Ed. 01-12-19
183
15. Civil engineering works associated in the construction of

networks and stations
15.1. General
The present specifications are applicable to all Civil Engineering works associated in
the construction of electromechanical materials and also for the construction of small
buildings like masonry walls or cabins for MV/LV distribution stations.
These specifications are complementary to those of chapters 4 and 5 pertaining to the
foundation construction for MV/LV line poles and of chapter 9 pertaining to the
construction of masonry walls or cabins. However, in case of any contradiction the
specifications of chapter 4, 5 or 9 will take precedence on the present specifications.
15.2. Construction materials in general

15.2.1. Standards
For the execution of civil engineering works, reference shall be made to British
Standard Specifications.
However, the following norms can also be considered:
 Belgian Norms (N.B.N.), specially recommended for the preparation and use of
concrete.
 American Standards Association (A.S.A.)
 French Standards edited by l'AFNOR (N.F).
 German Norms (D.I.N).
 Italian Norms (U.N.I).
All the standards should equally satisfy the safety norms in force in Mauritius.
15.2.2. Quality and workmanship
The construction materials shall be of good quality and shall satisfy the latest standards.
They should not, in any case, show shortages/defects that will affect the stability, life
span or appearance of construction. They shall be used efficiently and as per standards
in force.
15.3. Ground preparation

15.3.1. General levelling and clearing
15.3.1.1. General
 All debris and wastes, vegetation and topsoil found on the site shall be removed and
carted away.
JMED/4NT/3210/000/01/CM
Final Ed. 01-12-19
184
 All the roots in a radius of 2m from the axis of trees to be cut shall be removed up to
the depth required and carted away.
 The spot levels shall be obtained with the help of a 3 m staff with a tolerance of
more or less 3 cm.
 In the event where backfilling is required, the backfilling material shall be non-
clayey 0/5 sand and free of organic matter.
15.3.1.2. Compaction
Backfilling shall be carried out in layers of maximum thickness of 15 cm.

Compaction shall be carried out by mechanical means at appropriate moisture content.
The degree of compaction shall satisfy the following values:
 25 % CBR value (OC line).
 95 % modified Proctor.
 Plate load test: OC line shall be obtained
15.3.1.3. Shaping of slopes
All slopes shall be shaped according to plans and topped with a minimum layer of
15 cm thick of fertile soil.
This topsoil shall be obtained from the site to be levelled or brought from elsewhere in
case of scarcity.
In the inclined plane, topping with fertile soil shall be carried out as follows:
 50 cm wide horizontally at the foot of slope;
 50 cm wide horizontally at the top of slope;
If required, the fertile soil shall be held in position immediately by laying strips of turf
(25% of surface area) and by planting grass (75 % of surface area).
15.3.2. Demolition
If before start of works, demolition of existing works (superstructures and/or

foundation) is deemed necessary, the following prescriptions are applicable:
 All obsolete foundations found in the construction zone shall be completely
removed and carted away, even if buried, invisible and unspotted before start of
works.
 In general, it is not necessary to demolish systematically all underground
constructions; but only those that cannot be re-utilised or those that shall obstruct
new construction works.
 The materials obtained from demolition works shall be carted away.
 No dusts/pipes shall be blocked or demolished without prior authorisation from
concerned Authorities.
JMED/4NT/3210/000/01/CM
Final Ed. 01-12-19
185
 All excavation works shall be backfilled according to backfilling and compaction

specifications.
 If use of explosives is inevitable, regulations pertaining to official permissions,
storage, security, etc… shall be followed.
15.4. General technical specifications for civil engineering works

15.4.1. Different types of works
Civil engineering works especially comprise:

 bases for foundation in general,
 bases for foundation of pole for LV/MV lines,
 bases for frame support equipment,
 bases for power transformers and there accessories,
 bases for circuit breakers and miscellaneous equipment,
 firewalls for transformers,
 small building/cabins,
 handling tracks,
 running track and circulation ground,
 cables ducts,
 road crossing works,
 fencing/boundary walls,
 minor miscellaneous works,
 site works (sewer, drains, earth grid, etc...).
15.4.2. Calculation and working plans
Before start of works, calculation notes including working plans and other necessary
details for the completion of the works shall be established.
Thus, for substations, the following plans and documents shall be established (but not
limited to):
 topographical survey of the site,
 general layout,
 foundation and cable duct layout (scale : 1:100),
 plan view, sections and details of foundation for structures, frames and bases for
equipment;
JMED/4NT/3210/000/01/CM
Final Ed. 01-12-19
186
 plan view, sections and elevations of buildings,

 formwork plan and reinforcement details,
 site drainage plan,
 plan for access road,
 all necessary calculation notes and specially those of foundations,
 plan and details of boundary walls or fences.
15.4.3. Nature of ground
 If the nature of the ground is unknown, all necessary soil tests shall be carried out
(by specialised and well-known firms) to determine the foundation design and
shape, and also to determine the type of concrete and cement to be used.
 The soil investigation/tests comprise at least:
- Static cone penetration tests (minimum of 3 tests per site and a minimum of one
test for every 600 m2);
- Chemical analysis of underground water and natural soil.
In clayey soils, oedometer tests shall be carried out to evaluate the degree of
consolidation.
 The bearing capacity of soil depends on the admissible degree of consolidation.
The factor of safety against soil failure shall be taken as not less than 3.
 The soil stresses to be considered for calculations and working plans shall be
indicated in each working plan.
15.4.4. Measurement of water table depth
To determine the level of water table in the soil, as well as its variation, a vertical pipe
should be placed in the soil to a minimum depth of 5 m.
The methodology of the water level measurement shall be such that it will allow
recording of the variations for a given period.
15.4.5. Types of foundation
The foundations can be as follows:

- mass concrete,
- pad foundation + column,
- foundation blocks linked with ground beams,
- piles,
- anchoring in rock.
JMED/4NT/3210/000/01/CM
Final Ed. 01-12-19
187
15.4.6. Site facilities
 The temporary facilities, their maintenance and their operation shall be in

accordance to regulations in force in Mauritius.
 Site facilities include:
- the sheds , offices and stores,
- limited laboratory equipment for tests and measurements,
- temporary fencing.
15.4.7. Setting out of foundations
 Setting out
The setting out of each construction shall be based on reference axes of the platform
given in plans and on the two major axes of the foundation.
The levels of each construction given in the plans have to be respected.
On no account shall any setting out be started from a fence/boundary wall or any
unfixed feature.
 Permanence of reference marks:
The permanence of reference marks for alignment and for the levels of principal
reference axes of the platform and of each construction shall be ascertained during
the whole duration of the works.
The reference marks of each construction shall be fixed outside the latter; these
reference marks shall be brought inside each construction as soon as possible on
metallic plates fixed in the concrete.
The corner stones for reference axis shall be made in reinforced concrete, a
minimum of four numbers with 20 x 20 cm at the top, a pad foundation and to a
depth depending on existing soil type to give a permanent stability (minimum
0,80 m).
At the top of the concrete block, a stainless steel plate 10 x 10 cm x 5 mm thick shall
be fixed.
15.4.8. Earthworks
15.4.8.1. Work conditions
The optimum conditions for foundation construction have to be ensured. The

excavation works shall remain and kept dry until completion of the foundation works
including the backfilling.
If required, the following shall be considered:
 lowering of water table,
 adequate pumping system,
JMED/4NT/3210/000/01/CM
Final Ed. 01-12-19
188
 evacuation of pumped water,

 diversion of piping system or water courses,
 embankment to prevent flooding of excavation works in rainy season.
15.4.8.2. Excavation works
Before start of excavation works, information about the presence/existence and location
of pipe networks, cables or underground construction shall be obtained.
 Excavation works for foundations:
- the works comprise timbering/strutting, propping, shoring drainage, loading,
transporting , unloading and tipping,
- excavated materials to be eventually used for backfilling shall be stacked on site
in such a way so as not to impede progress of other activities,
- construction encountered in excavations shall be demolished and the debris
carted away,
- underground pipes shall be localised manually and the excavation works in
proximity of such pipes shall also be carried out manually,
- no pipe shall be isolated, diverted or interrupted without prior approval of
concerned Authorities,
- excavation works carried out mechanically shall be stopped 20 cm above the
level indicated on the plan and the last layer shall be removed manually,
- over-excavation works carried out by error shall be backfilled with lean
concrete and in no case with excavated soil.
 Excavation works for underground pipes and cables lying.
- all the prescriptions for excavation works for foundation are applicable,
- the trench width shall be wide enough to allow easy placing and assembly of the
pipes or cables,
- the hard materials such as stones or rocks edges etc… shall be removed before
placing of pipes or cables,
- if for any reason whatsoever, the level inside the excavation is required to be
raised, the raising can be done with sand compacted at 95% modified Proctor.
15.4.8.3. Backfilling and compaction
 General :
Materials used for backfilling purposes shall be free from stones, clay and organic
matter or putrescibles. The soil used shall not contain materials bigger than 6.5 cm
in excess of 15%; fertile soil, turf, etc… cannot be used for backfilling. After
backfilling, the backfilled zones shall be clean evenly and their level shall not
exceed by  6 cm with reference to levels shown in plans.
JMED/4NT/3210/000/01/CM
Final Ed. 01-12-19
189
 Filling material for foundations:

The filling shall be constructed in layers not exceeding 15 cm, each layer being
compacted. A degree of compaction of 95% of maximum obtained with modified
Proctor Test shall be attained. To ensure good compaction and to avoid dust, the soil
shall, if necessary, be suitably wetted. Construction can be outbalanced by
symmetric backfilling, which should be avoided.
 Filling material for underground pipes and cables:
Backfilling can only be done after:
- prescribed verifications and tests,
- removal of temporary supports.
The filling shall be free of stones or sharp objects up to 10 cm below the crown
cables or pipes.
Backfilling shall be carried out on both sides of the cable or pipe simultaneously.
Successive layers of a maximum thickness of 15 cm shall be compacted to a
minimum of 85% modified Proctor Test.
15.4.9. Concrete
15.4.9.1. General
 If the concrete is mixed on site, a mixer, a material stacking bin, batching and
mixing plant shall be provided on the site. Manual mixing is strictly prohibited.
The concrete prepared in the central plant shall be placed not later than 30 minutes
after conveying and not later than 100 minutes it has left the central plant.
 All the materials shall conform to the requirements of the standards in force.
 The present recommendations are applicable to all type of concrete with normal
grading (normal aggregates) that are used on site, i.e.:
- reinforced concrete,
- mass concrete including blinding layer.
 The present recommendations are applicable for both in-situ concrete and premixed
concrete. The recommendations are not applicable for concrete for road
works/resurfacing of roads.
 Concrete design is carried out as per applicable standard.
15.4.9.2. Materials used in concrete - quality criteria
a) Cement
 The following cements can be used, and they shall satisfy the compositions and
quality criteria of the corresponding standards:
JMED/4NT/3210/000/01/CM
Final Ed. 01-12-19
190
Denomination Grade
Full Abbr. 30 40 50
Portland Cement P P 30 P 40 P 50
Portland Cement or blast furnace slag cement PL PL 30 PL 40 PL 50
Portland Cement / pozzolana PPz PPz 30 PPz 40 PPz 50
Portland Cement / iron PF PF 30 PF 40 PF 50
Portland blast furnace cement 35/65 HK HK 30 HK 40 HK 50
Low heat Portland blast furnace cement 60/85 HL HL 30 HL 40
Per-metallurgic Cement LK LK 30
Super sulphated Cement S S 30 S 40
Table 15.4.9-1 : Composition and quality criteria for cements
 Other cements can be used for particular applications are:

- high alumina cement,
- sulphate resisting Portland Cement characterised by absence of tricalcium
aluminate (C3A),
- white cement for architectural purposes.
 Quality control:
- It is recommended to carry out conformity tests particularly when cement is
delivered in bulk. The sampling and tests are carried out in accordance with
the applicable standards Tests can include:
 determination of fineness,
 determination of resistance to fire,
 determination of insoluble residue,
 determination of S03 content,
 determination of magnesium content,
 quick determination of main contents,
 determination of setting time and of stability,
 compression and tensile strength tests.
JMED/4NT/3210/000/01/CM
Final Ed. 01-12-19
191
- Frequency of quality control: 1 series of tests per 1000 tons and at each
delivery.
b) Sands
 Both natural and artificial sand can be used provided that the prescriptions of
applicable standards are complied with.
 Sand of special quality or source can also be utilised to obtain architectural
finishes on concrete surface (for e.g. white sand).
- It is recommended to carry out conformity tests; these tests are carried out in
accordance with the applicable standards and can include:
 carrying out sieve analysis,
 determination of fineness modules,
 determination of mud content (particle site  7.4),

 determination of organic matter content.
- Frequency of quality control:
 conformity tests - every 100 tons and at each delivery,
 cleanliness: permanent basis.
c) Aggregates
 Aggregates shall conform to the requirements of applicable standards.
 Well-defined type and source of aggregate can be utilised to obtain architectural
finishes on concrete surface or for technical reasons (for e.g. use of calcarous
aggregates in concrete exposed to high temperatures).
 The maximum size of the aggregate can be limited by the density of the
reinforcement.
 The aggregates shall be clean and free of noxious/harmful/deleterious substance
during their use that may affect the resistance or attack reinforcement. If
required the aggregate shall be cleared.
 Quality Control:
- It is recommended to carry out the following conformity tests:
 grading of aggregates,
 determination of organic matter content,
 determination of mud content (particles  74 ).

JMED/4NT/3210/000/01/CM
Final Ed. 01-12-19
192
 conformity tests: every 1000 tons and at each delivery,

 cleanliness: permanent basis.
d) Mixing water
 The prescriptions of applicable standards shall be complied with; there are
completed by the following provisions.
 Do not use:
- acidic water (ph  6),

- water containing see salt > 3,5 %,
- water containing magnesium sulphate or calcium sulphate > 3 %,
- water containing sugar,
- water containing fats,
- water containing suspensions which after a settlement period of 2 hours has
a deposit  2 ml/l.
- If the water source is from a public distribution point (approved source), no
quality control is required.
- The following chemical tests shall be carried out for water from other
sources:
 determination of organic matter content,
 determination of sugar content,
 determination of salt content,
 determination of magnesium/calcium sulphate content.
- Moreover, a visual inspection on the water cleanliness shall be carried out
and the water odour shall be also verified.
 chemical analysis: every month,
 visual inspection: permanent basis.
e) Admixtures
In case where admixtures are used, the following prescriptions shall be complied
with:
 the admixtures shall comply with the specifications of applicable standards,
 all the tests prescribed shall be done as per standards applicable,
JMED/4NT/3210/000/01/CM
Final Ed. 01-12-19
193
 use shall be made in proportion strictly in accordance with the manufacturer‟s

instructions,
 admixtures can only be used upon agreement with the cement manufacturer.
f) Curing compounds
 Authorised products:
- the product shall conform with the applicable standard,
- the compound should not loose the diluant of the resin which forms the film
prematurely,
- the anti-evaporation compound shall contain a colouring matter (clear or
white) through which the degree and spreading efficiency can be followed,
- the compound shall mix easily in hard water,
- the curing compound shall not have noxious effects on the finishing works
that will be applied at later stages, as for e.g. painting works.
 Quality control
- it is recommended to carry out conformity tests according to applicable
standards,
- visual inspection on the diffusion and durability are equally required.
15.4.9.3. Concrete mix proportions
General stipulations:
 The concrete mix proportions are defined taking into account the quality of concrete
required, the minimal prescriptions imposed here after, the chemical composition of
water table and the characteristics of sand and aggregates used for the preparation
of concrete.
 Mix proportion of reinforced concrete:
- The compaction of concrete achieved shall be the highest possible.
Water W
- The ratio  should be a minimum and in all cases a minimum of
Cement C
0,5 shall be considered.
- The crushing strength at 28 days is very important: it must attain 250 kg/cm2 on
a cube 20 x 20 x 20 cm at 28 days.
- The minimum cement content is 350 kg/m3.
- The maximum cement content is 380 kg/ m3.
- The mix proportion per m3 of concrete for reinforced concrete is not fixed in
advance; its mix approaches as far as possible the following:
JMED/4NT/3210/000/01/CM
Final Ed. 01-12-19
194
 840 l of coarse 4/16 or 4/32 or crushed 8/16 or 8/22,

 420 l of sand,
 350 kg of cement.
- The maximum size of course aggregates shall not be greater than one quarter of
the minimum thickness of concrete element/section to be cast and should be less
than 32 mm.
- In the case of reinforced concrete, the biggest aggregate should easily pass
through the reinforcements.
 Mass concrete (or unreinforced concrete):
This concrete contains in principle 275 kg of cement per m3. The breaking strength
of a cube on 28 days shall not be less than 200 kg/ cm2.
 Blinding layer and backfilling with concrete:
Under reinforced concrete works, a minimum layer of 7 cm thick of lean concrete is
placed (200 kg of artificial Portland Cement of class 210-325).
The lean concrete shall be placed 10 cm in excess of the sizes of the strip
foundations/pad foundations whatever be the thickness.
15.4.9.4. Preparation and placing of concrete
 The installation for the preparation of concrete shall be conceived to allow batching
by weight of aggregates, water and cement. After batching, the materials are
thoroughly mixed until a homogeneous mix with prescribed consistency is
obtained.
The fresh concrete shall be transported/delivered without excessive shocks in
watertight containers. It shall not be poured for a height not exceeding 1m . The
concrete shall be placed not later than 30 minutes after its mixing (site preparation)
or 30 minutes after delivery (preparation in central plant). If the transportation lasts
more than 15 minutes, lorry-mixers shall be used or special transport fitted with
mixing devices. In cases where premixed concrete is used, the time taken between
the departure from the central plant until completion of its placing shall not exceed
100 minutes.
The concrete shall not be allowed to be placed when,
- the time between mixing and placing is exceeded,
- the setting has started,
- the homogeneity has been lost during transportation,
- the consistency exceeds imposed limits.
 Placing of concrete shall be carried out rapidly without interruption.
The concrete shall be vibrated in the formwork by means of internal vibrators
whose frequency shall be at least 7000 cycles per minute.
JMED/4NT/3210/000/01/CM
Final Ed. 01-12-19
195
A concrete pump can be used; in this case, a larger proportion of sand and cement
or incorporation of special product may be necessary.
The fresh concrete shall be protected from the sun and rainfall. In hot climate, it
should be kept wet for one week.
After striking of formwork, ties or nails shall be cut at 2 cm below the concrete
surface and the holes filled up with mortar.
 Finish of fresh concrete:
- If no cover or surface dressing is foreseen, the surfaces of horizontal concrete
slabs and the likes shall be simply smoothed.
- If a cover or topping is foreseen, the surfaces shall be roughened with a wire
brush or by engraving criss-cross lines.
 Post-treatment of fresh concrete:
- The prescriptions of applicable standards shall be complied with.
- To protect fresh concrete, the following methods can be used:
 water proofing membrane (PVC films),
 hessian bags kept moist,
 curing compound.
- During the use of curing products, the recommendations of applicable standards
and those of the manufacturer and supplier shall be strictly complied with.
 Testing
- Nine metallic well-planed 20 x 20 x 20 cm moulds, together with their lids,
shall be available on site.
The internal sides of the moulds should be slightly oiled/greased; it is filled with
concrete in four layers; after its complete filling the concrete is stricken off
flush with a trowel and the cover plate is placed on the mould.
Compression tests are carried out at 7 days on 3 cubes and at 28 days on three
other cubes; the 3 remaining cubes are kept on site under the same conditions
the concrete is placed on site.
- To control the consistency of concrete, an Abrams' cone, vibrating table, etc …
shall be made available on site.
- In principle, a set of 9 cubes shall be made for every 30 m3 of concrete placed.
15.4.9.5. Inadequate concrete quality - Remedial action to be taken
Two cases can be encountered:

a) the demolition of the members is not required, but special technical remedial
actions are necessary
JMED/4NT/3210/000/01/CM
Final Ed. 01-12-19
196
b) the demolition of the defective members is necessary.

15.4.10. Formwork
15.4.10.1. General
 The type of formwork is determined by the required appearance, coating and/or the
finishing to be applied later. Unless stated, all apparent concrete surface shall have
smooth finish.
 The calculations for the stability of the formwork and its supports are carried out
taking the prescriptions of applicable standards in force into consideration.
 It is to be observed that, during stability calculations, not only profile, and thickness
are determined but also, the connections/joints and fixing positions (bolt, nuts, etc)
should equally be calculated.
 The construction of formwork include the supply of timber metal or other materials
and accessories, but also preparation, propping, scafolding, fixing, adjustment and
striking works.
 The formwork set up should be able to resist deformations or damage during
placing of reinforcement, concreting and its tightening.
 The formwork shall be watertight to avoid loss of laitance.
15.4.10.2. Materials for formwork
Depending on the type of finish required, use can be made of:

 ordinary timber (normal formwork).
 bakelite multiplex timber board (normal smooth formwork).
 Plywood (normal smooth formwork). The gluing material shall be water resistant
(phenol for example)
 Metal formwork - minimum thickness 2 mm (neutral and smooth finish formwork)
All materials used in formwork construction, including their accessories, should be in
good condition without wear and tears or damages; they should be stored in protected
areas (against sun and rainfall) when not in use.
To facilitate striking and maintenance of formwork, release agents that ease striking
can be utilised. Generally, the product is mineral oil. The product used shall not stain
or contain material that will damage the concrete or contain volatile elements.
15.4.10.3. Preparation and stripping of formwork
 The formwork shall be constructed in such a way that the contact surface with the
concrete is regular, clean and watertight.
In general, unless indicated, the apparent concrete shall have smooth surface, and
non-visible concrete shall have normal finish. The joints shall be well prepared.
JMED/4NT/3210/000/01/CM
Final Ed. 01-12-19
197
 The formwork is placed according to plans. They shall be firmly propped, braced
and anchored.
To facilitate placing of concrete, the clamping and its control, necessary openings in
sufficient numbers are made in the main formwork.
At the bottom of the member to be cast, temporary openings are made for cleaning
purposes before concreting.
 Releasing agent:
These products are applied before placing any reinforcement in the formwork.
The ultimate surface finishes shall have to be considered (in compatibility of
product with their finishes like paints, tiling etc…)
 Before concreting, the constructed formwork shall be cleared completely of all
extraneous materials. (sawn wood, nails, binding wires etc….). Bottom surfaces
shall be cleaned through temporary openings made for that purpose.
 Propping, as well as the form and adjustment of the formwork are verified.
Accuracy of fixing and placing of reinforcement with reference to the surface of
formwork are also verified.
 Stripping formwork:
Formwork shall be removed carefully and in such a way so as not to put the security
of structure at stake and to prevent damage to the concrete.
No props shall be removed before the concrete achieves sufficient strength to
support all dead loads and any other loads that can be imposed taking factor of
safety into consideration.
 After stripping, the concrete surface to which any formwork materials have adhered
shall be cleaned.
All the assembly set up or binding wires shall be cut to a minimum depth of 2 cm;
the holes or honeycombing shall be filled and rendered with a cement rich mortar
and an epoxy or resin.
15.4.11. Reinforcement
15.4.11.1. General
By "reinforcement" it is meant all the reinforcing rods and/or binding wires with
accessories and spacers as installed in the formwork before concreting.
15.4.11.2. Reinforcement materials
The steel bars for reinforcement shall comply with the applicable standards; unless
indicated, the steel bars to be used shall be:
- Plain mild steel bars BE 22
- Yield deformed steel bars BE 22 - BE 40 - BE 50
- Steel fabric reinforcement BE 50
JMED/4NT/3210/000/01/CM
Final Ed. 01-12-19
198
15.4.11.3. Fixing reinforcement
 The reinforcement shall be placed on secured supports, away from the ground
surface. All necessary precautions shall be taken to avoid damage to the rods and to
prevent accumulation of substances that can affect the adhesion of concrete to the
reinforcement bars.
 The reinforcement shall be clean. It is not necessary to remove the rusts, but it
should be brushed and cleaned carefully before fixing, in such a way to remove all
traces of soil or surface rust and particularly oil or grease.
 All the bars shall be cut and bent cold.
 The reinforcement shall be worked according to shapes and dimensions as per
drawings; they shall be secured against displacement and kept in position during
concreting.
Lapping of rods shall be executed with a lap length enough to obtain the required
strength.
Lap length of adjacent bars shall be equal to at least 40 times the diameter.
 The bars shall be fixed by means of binding wires tightly tied at intersections;
assembly by welding is not allowed.
The reinforcement shall be kept apart from the formwork by using appropriate
mortar, asbestos cement or plastic spacers (timber and steel are excluded).
The spacers shall be fixed on the reinforcement such that they are kept in position
during concreting.
The number and distribution of spacers depend on their strength and on importance
of the reinforcement itself; however a minimum of one spacers per m2 of formwork
or per linear metre of lateral side of a column or beam has to be placed.
The minimum distance (unless indicated in plans) between the end of reinforcement
and the formwork shall be at least equal to the bigger of the following dimensions:
- the diameter of the biggest bar,
- the larger nominal size of aggregate in the concrete,
- in all case, a minimum cover of 25 mm shall be used.
These distances or concrete covers shall be equally respected for both top and
bottom surfaces of the concrete members.
 After fixing and before concreting, the reinforcement shall be cleared and kept free
of deleterious materials.
 During concreting, care should be taken not to displace the reinforcement by
contact with equipment used for supplying or for compacting the concrete (for e.g.
vibration pokers, funnel, hopper etc….)
JMED/4NT/3210/000/01/CM
Final Ed. 01-12-19
199
15.4.12. Protection of constructions in contact with the soil
 Two coats of cold bituminous paint shall be applied to concrete surfaces in contact
with soil.
 Two coats of cold bituminous paint shall be applied to masonry works which are in
contact with soil, after rendering with a hydro phobic cement screed of thickness
2 cm.
The mix for the mortar for rendering shall be 1000 l sand + 350 kg cement.
The coatings of bituminous paint shall be applied with a brush; the second coat is
applied after the drying of the first coat, the final quantity of bitumen shall be a
minimum of 500 gm/m2.
 Rendering works can only be carried out if the following preparation works on the
supports are carried out:
- carting away and replacing of efflorescent bricks,
- removal of impurities (grease, dusts, soot, etc…),
- removal of nail, wrongly fixed features, etc…
 The works that are in progress or just completed shall be protected from sun rays
and wind.
15.4.13. Pocket bases
15.4.13.1. Implantation
 During concreting, all the pocket bases shall be fixed according to plans. They shall
be fixed rigidly to prevent any displacement.
 The position of pocket bases is verified before concreting is carried out.
15.4.13.2. Construction of pocket bases
 Simple pocket bases:

- These anchoring holes are constructed by means of appropriate formworks. If
necessary, they can have a border cut off to facilitate placing of the sealing
concrete. The surface of the formwork shall give a rough finish.
- After removal of formwork, all the anchoring holes shall be protected against
clogging and water penetration by sealing the opening by means of one or
several bricks and mortar or by any other possible means.
 Circular pocket bases :
- The boxes, supplied by the manufacturers of equipment or frames to be
mounted, are fixed before concreting.
- All necessary steps shall be taken to prevent clogging and penetration of water.
JMED/4NT/3210/000/01/CM
Final Ed. 01-12-19
200
 Keys or anchor plates:

- These are made up of metallic parts, with extensions of pipes or sheath of
asbestos cement, concrete or steel.
- These anchorage systems shall be in conformity with the preceding provisions.
15.4.13.3. Filling and sealing
 Preparation: if necessary, the top surface of the foundation shall be cleared; the
pocket bases shall be cleaned and completely emptied.
 Filling of pocket bases:
- all the pocket bases shall be filled; the mortar shall be compacted by means of a
flat-ended steel rod. .
- the anchor bolts shall be tightened after hardening of the mortar and the level of
equipment verified; if necessary, readjustment shall be carried out.
- unless mentioned otherwise, the filling shall be carried out with mortar rich
concrete 0/10 or 0/20 with a cement content of 350 kg/m3 or with a cement
mortar with a ratio cement/sand = 1/3 and/or even by means of a non-shrinking
mortar.
- during filling, it shall be ensured that the space for adjusting is clean and allows
free movement.
 Sealing:
After adjustment of the structures or equipment, the empty space between the
supporting plate and the foundation bottom shall be filled up with mortar similar to
the one used for the filling here above.
15.4.13.4. Placing and sealing of metallic accessories
The metallic or plastic accessories, such as anchor bolts, rails, angle irons, plates,
nosing, sleeves, etc… shall be embedded in concrete.
They shall be rigidly fixed in formworks and should not be displaced during concreting.
After removal of formwork, the apparent surfaces shall be cleared and shall be free of
all concrete or laitance.
15.4.14. Diamond shapes
After fixing of the support structures, the top surface of the base shall be diamond
shaped. To facilitate flow of water, the top surfaces shall be constructed to a slope of at
least 10 %.
Cross-falls shall be provided at the foot of uprights to prevent accumulation of water.
The height above ground level shall be equal to or greater than 10 cm; the formwork
shall be smooth.
JMED/4NT/3210/000/01/CM
Final Ed. 01-12-19
201
In all the cases, the adjusting parts of the support structures shall have a minimum
concrete cover of 3 cm.
The diamond shapes shall have the same dimensions that the top surface of the concrete
base. The height and dimension of the diamond shapes shall be identical for similar
supports.
The concrete used to construct the diamond points shall have cement (230/325) content
of 350 kg/m3 and coarse aggregates passing the 26 mm sieve.
15.4.15. Foundation for power transformers
15.4.15.1. General
The layout to be adopted for the construction of bases for power transformers or similar
equipment depends on the handling mode envisaged and on the construction
arrangements of equipment.
The construction arrangements can be the following:
 The transformers do not possess rollers but a sash that can also slide on the concrete
base.
 The transformers are equipped with variable number of flanged rollers depending
on the weight. In this case, the load beams are equipped with fixed rails, which
possibly run along the whole length of the access road.
 The plans and documents from Manufacturer shall indicate the layout to be
adopted, order and load distribution to enable design works.
15.4.15.2. Longitudinal concrete beam
Depending on whether the equipment possess or do not possess rollers, the top level of
the longitudinal concrete beam is different.
In the first case, the top level of the rails is at the level of:
a) the borders of the access road + 10 cm, if the rails do not continue along this route.
b) the borders if the rails continue along the access road.
In the second case (without rollers), the top level of the beams is the same as the level
of the borders of the access road + 2cm.
The rails, if any, are of the type 36, 46 or 50 kg/m. They should be chosen in good
working condition and, after fixing, shall be coated with bituminous paint.
15.4.15.3. Oil retaining structure
The dimensions of the oil retaining structure depend on the volume of oil in the
transformer.
The structure is enclosed by a low reinforced concrete or masonry wall.
The enclosure shall be completely impervious to oil and the bottom shall be filled with
6/8 cm hardcore filling.
JMED/4NT/3210/000/01/CM
Final Ed. 01-12-19
202
A suitable system to evacuate water or oil has to be provided (screen, slope, sump).
15.4.15.4. Firewall
 The main aim of this protection is to prevent propagation of a possible fire outbreak
from a transformer to the neighbouring equipment and also to enable fire-fighters
team to come closer to the source of fire.
Moreover, it is intended to prevent the projection of inflamed matter or flying
objects, due to a bushing explosion for example, on the neighbouring high voltage
bay.
In principle, these walls contribute to abate sound propagation resulting from the
operation of transformers installed in proximity of inhabited areas, operation that
can provoke an unacceptable discomfort for the people who live in the vicinity.
 The walls can be realised in the following ways:
- in reinforced concrete cast in-situ,
- in reinforced concrete frame, filled with masonry,
- pre-cast, concrete column with sliding grooves + pre-cast slabs sliding between
the columns (maximum weight per slab 200 kg); metallic frame can not be
considered.
15.5. General site landscaping and services

15.5.1. Landscaping
In general, the flat surfaces shall be covered with turf (if nature of the ground allows) or
left simply clean, levelled and covered with stones obtained locally.
15.5.2. Sewer network
15.5.2.1. General
 The present recommendations are also applicable for the construction of a new
network in addition to up grading or extension of an existing network.
 The sewer network shall be constructed according to plans approved by the
concerned Authorities and shall conform to the regulations in force.
 Any existing pipeline cannot be deviated, cut, interrupted or demolished without
prior authorisation from concerned Authorities.
 During earthworks for sewer network, damage to existing works shall be avoided.
 The connection works with main sewer line shall conform to prescriptions in force.
15.5.2.2. Earthworks
Excavation works, backfilling and earthworks shall be carried out in conformity with
prescriptions given earlier.
JMED/4NT/3210/000/01/CM
Final Ed. 01-12-19
203
15.5.2.3. Pipes and accessories, couplings, bends, tees, etc.
 They are placed either on a 10 cm thick layer (bedding) of sand or on a lean

concrete support of width ( + 30cm) and of a minimum thickness of 5 cm; their
lateral fixing is made with the same concrete on at least a quarter of their
circumference
 It is required to connect conveniently the pipes and their couplings. The joints are
constructed with cement mortar or by means of special mastic according to the
instructions from the pipe manufacturers. The pipes are spigot socket type. The
jointing with cement mortar is intended for non-aggressive waters. The mix
constituents of the mortar shall be 1 volume of PN cement + 2 volumes of sand +
adequate quantity of water.
 The pipeline can only be backfilled after leakage test is carried out. This test
comprises filling the pipes with clean water between two consecutive manholes
under a given pressure for 2 hours. Leakage should be found neither at the joints
nor along the pipeline.
 Pipes crossing block walls or concrete walls shall be doubled with sleeves of
suitable diameter to avoid the negative effects of being squeezed by the walls. The
sleeves shall be carefully fixed in the walls. An impervious plastic flex shall be
placed between the ring and the pipe.
 The evacuation of rainwater shall be carried out by means of PVC or earthenware
pipes for pipelines not exceeding 200 mm or more. The main collector pipes shall
be constructed with reinforced concrete centrifuged circular or ovoid pipes.
15.5.2.4. Inspection chambers
 Ordinary inspection chambers:

These are constructed generally with concrete blocks or ordinary bricks.
The wall thickness varies depending on the depth of the chamber. In no case, shall
the thickness be less than 20 cm. The chamber shall be built on a lean concrete strip
footing of a minimum thickness of 10 cm with a cement content of 200 kg /m3.
The internal and external surfaces of the walls shall be rendered with hydrophobic
cement mortar of thickness 1,5 cm through the whole height. The bottom of the
inspection chamber shall be benched to facilitate evacuation of water.
The rendering on the external surface of the walls shall be coated with two layers of
cold bituminous paint. When the wall and the bottom slab of the chamber are made
up with reinforced concrete, the concrete strength shall be 350 kg/cm2, unless
stated.
Depending on their importance, the chambers shall have internal sizes of 40 x
40 cm or 60 x 60 cm. It shall be covered with a reinforced concrete cover slab with
a handling ring or by a cast iron cover slab placed on a cast-iron frame as per
known commercial models. All chambers subject to traffic loads shall comprise
cover slabs that can take a load of 4 T placed at its centre.
JMED/4NT/3210/000/01/CM
Final Ed. 01-12-19
204
 Main inspection chamber (manhole):

The main collecting manhole shall have internal dimensions, 80 x 80 cm or 100 x
100 cm depending on its importance. This manhole collects water from buildings,
rainfalls and drains. From this manhole the pipeline will carry the water towards the
main sewer line. It is constructed with the same materials and according to the same
prescriptions as for the ordinary chambers.
The cover slab shall be made up of a double impervious cover, of known
commercial quality, whose top part is made up of cast iron and the bottom part is
steel painted with a coating of polyvinyl chloride of minimum thickness 4/10 mm.
Metallic stepladders shall be fixed in the masonry of one wall.
15.5.3. Drainage network
The surface drainage of a station is carried out by means of drainpipes placed below
cable ducts and linked with the sewer network. The switchyard of the station shall have
a slope (max. 2 cm) outward. An open concrete drain shall be constructed around the
station to connect and evacuate the water outside the station switchyard, possibly to
absorption pit.
15.5.4. Cable ducts
15.5.4.1. Purpose
Generally in a substation, power supply and system control cables are most of the times
placed in preferential passages called "cable ducts". These passages, which are partially
underground, allow grouping of cables linking the different equipment and possibly
different buildings among themselves. The present specifications concern the
construction of these cable ducts.
The different types of cable ducts that can be considered are:
 pre-cast reinforced concrete cable ducts,
 cable ducts in block work with the slab and cover slab in reinforced concrete,
 Concrete cable ducts cast in-situ.
The cable duct network can possibly be completed by particular works like crossing
sleeves, draw pits, and entries in buildings, diversions, etc…
15.5.4.2. General
 The earthworks shall comply with specifications given earlier.

 Drainage in cable ducts with the objective of evacuating water that can accumulate
in cable ducts: the bottom slab shall have a maximum slope of 3 % and/or have open
joints at the low points; a connection with the general drainage system can be
envisaged.
JMED/4NT/3210/000/01/CM
Final Ed. 01-12-19
205
15.5.4.3. Description and placing / construction
 Pre-cast reinforced concrete cable ducts:

These pre-cast cable ducts shall be constructed in reinforced concrete vibrated, with
smooth finish formwork and with minimal reinforcement.
The works shall be free of defects such as cracks, broken edges, honeycombing etc.
They shall be manufactured in U form, the internal dimensions being a minimum of
40 x 40 cm; wall thickness is 10 cm and the maximum length of each member is
1 m.
Lying is effected on a layer of concrete 8 cm thick or on compacted sand bedding
according to the nature of the soil.
 Reinforced concrete cable duct cast in-situ:
This type of cable duct shall be constructed in case of technical requirement
(dimensions, loads to sustain, particular passages, etc…).
For these types of works, the recommendations for concrete, formwork and
reinforcement given earlier are applicable. The thickness of the walls shall not be
less than 8 cm.
 Masonry cable ducts:
This type of cable duct can substitute in-situ cast cable ducts. This shall be
constructed on a reinforced concrete slab (of minimum thickness 12 cm).
The low walls shall be constructed in heavy blockworks or bricks of good quality.
Thickness of the wall depends on the depth of cable duct but should not be less than
9 cm.
A smooth concrete ring (5cm thick) that will enable accurate placing of cover slabs
shall be constructed on top of the blockwork.
Masonry works in contact with ground surface shall be rendered (1.5 cm thick
screed).
The recommendations regarding concrete given earlier and regarding masonry
hereafter are applicable.
 Cover slabs:
The cover slabs shall be constructed in reinforced concrete, in such a way to allow
easy lifting by two persons (rings, holes with hook and eye key, etc….). The weight
of the slabs shall not exceed 30 kg. They should be smooth and plane without
notches and fissures, and should have sharp edges. Their surfaces shall be free of
honeycombs and air bubbles.
The transverse sliding of the cover slabs on the cable duct is prevented by 1 cm
high hammer along the top surface.
JMED/4NT/3210/000/01/CM
Final Ed. 01-12-19
206
 Loading on cable ducts:

Normal cable ducts and their cover slabs are designed to resist a point load of
200 kg. Special cable ducts (those crossing roads/access roads) are designed and
built to resist a point load of 4 T.
Access road crossings to transformers shall be carried out either in reinforced
concrete sleeves of same cross-section as the cable ducts or by means of tubes
embedded in reinforced concrete. They are designed to resist transformer loads
during their transportation.
15.5.5. Fencing works
15.5.5.1. General
The fencing comprise pre-cast reinforced concrete posts holding plasticised wire mesh
and a smooth finish ground beam between the posts. The wire mesh fencing is held
tight by means of straining wires. The fencing, if required, may incorporate a double
leaf metallic gate including a small service door (1m wide).
15.5.5.2. Description of materials and installation
 Posts:
The reinforced concrete posts shall be of a minimum height of 2.7 m above the
ground level (anchorage in foundation: 50 cm; minimum foundation dimensions: 40
x 40 x 60 cm or diameter of 45 cm and depth of 60 cm). Each angle post shall be
propped by 2 braces 2.2 m long inclined at 45 C.
The distance between the posts is 3 m. The ordinary posts have a x-section of 12 x
12 cm, angle and reinforcing posts shall have a minimum cross-section of 13 x 13
cm.
Reinforcing posts are placed in alignment at a minimum spacing of 50 m. They are
placed at equal distance between the different angle post and propped by two
bracings. The angle posts (even for obtuse angles) are propped by 2 bracings (13 x
13 cm). The braces are fixed in notches provided in the angle posts or reinforcing
posts and are embedded with cement mortar.
The holes for the passage of straining wires in the concrete posts shall be fitted with
plastic pipes.
 Wire mesh:
The height of the wire mesh fencing shall be at least 2.00 m; it is placed
continuously on the external face of the posts.
The galvanisation of the wire mesh fencing shall be in pure zinc with a minimum
coating of 250g/m2. The wire mesh shall be in diamond form 5 cm mesh size and
plasticised. Its approximate weight shall be 2.25 kg/m2.
The tightening of the fencing is carried out carefully and the number of straining
wires is 4; unless specified by the suppliers, their thickness is 3 mm diameter and
they are plasticised. The fencing is tied with plasticised wires of minimum diameter
1.8 mm.
JMED/4NT/3210/000/01/CM
Final Ed. 01-12-19
207
At least one barbed wire shall be placed on top of the fencing. It shall be galvanised
and plasticised.
 Gate:
The fencing is incorporated, if necessary, with a metallic double leaf gate, which is
made up of a reinforced square hollow section (60 x 60 mm - thickness 2-3 mm
depending on width of gate) metallic frame and bars of square hollow section (30 x
30 mm - 1.5 mm thickness), fixed at 15 cm centre to centre.
The gate is provide with clamping/locking devices in open/closed positions; the
doors are fixed to the reinforced concrete pillars or to the metallic uprights, firmly
anchored to the soil, in order to avoid any overturning; devices shall be provided in
the pillars/posts to enable horizontal adjustment.
The gate shall be supplied with all the fittings. All the metallic parts shall be
galvanised and painted with one coat of zinc chromate and two coats of finish paint.
Each door shall be fixed to the pillar through copper hinges (minimum 100mm²)
fixed by bolts.
 Concrete ground beam:
A ground beam 40 cm high (out of which 10 cm is in the ground), at least 5 cm
thick and approximately 1.5 m long is placed at the bottom of the fencing. These
ground beams are interconnected by small posts, cast in the ground with lean
concrete.
15.6. Complementary specifications for the construction of masonry

walls and cabins for LV/MV distribution stations
15.6.1. Preliminary note
For earthworks, concrete, formwork, reinforcement, cement and bitumeous painting,

the prescriptions pertaining to foundation given earlier are applicable.
15.6.2. Calculation notes and working plans
The plans and documents necessary to carry out the works consist of:
 the topographic layout,
 the plan of façades,
 the plan view and the sections (scale 1:50) showing clearly all the installations,
 the plan view and the sections of cable ducts,
 the roof plan of slab,
 the calculation note for foundations,
 the calculation note for concrete superstructure,
JMED/4NT/3210/000/01/CM
Final Ed. 01-12-19
208
 the plan view and the sections for formwork and reinforcement for foundations and
ground floor slab,
 the plans of doors and other openings,
 the layout plan and schematic drawings of electric installations (lighting/switch).
15.6.3. Walls
The materials used for the construction of walls shall be incombustible; the walls shall
be construction as follows:
 in masonry blockwork / solid bricks,
 in reinforced concrete,
 in concrete,
 in pre-cast concrete,
 with concrete superstructure fill with blockwork / solid bricks.
The wall shall have a minimum thickness, excluding rendering, as follows:
 station in masonry solid bricks 22 cm
 station in masonry block 20 cm
 station in reinforced concrete 8 cm
 station in pre-cast concrete 20 cm
 station with concrete superstructure fill with solid bricks 11 cm
 station with concrete superstructure fill with blockwork 15 cm
The masonry shall be carried out in conformity with the specifications of the most
recent standards.
The bricks are plastered with mortar of cement content 250 kg; if necessary, a damp
proof course sheeting to prevent rising of humidity shall be placed above ground level.
15.6.4. Wall finishes
 External rendering:
All external walls shall be rendered with hydrophobic cement.
 Internal rendering :
Some internal walls shall receive mortar with smooth finish. The minimum
thickness acceptable is:
- 15 mm for vertical surfaces,
- 10 mm for horizontal surfaces.
They shall be carried out with mortar and in two stages.
JMED/4NT/3210/000/01/CM
Final Ed. 01-12-19
209
15.6.5. Paint
 General:
Painting shall be applied in three coats. Each coat shall be uniformly painted with
brush and possibly sealing and pumicing between each coating for non-rendered
surfaces.
All necessary surface preparation shall be carried out. All paint and rendering shall
be applied in coatings. Each paint coat shall be of minimum thickness of 30
microns after drying.
 Materials, works and applications
- Masonry, concrete and internal or external rendering:
o brushing and dust removal on dry surface,
o polishing of pronounced surface roughness, fins and other concrete
projections.
o filling of noticeable cavities with cement and/or plaster and possible
pumicing,
o application of a latex insulating coat whose characteristics shall be in
conformity with finishing paint coat; this insulating coat shall be chemically
neutral,
o application of one coat of latex paint or similar paint diluted with 10% water,
o application of a second coat of latex paint or similar paint diluted with 5%
water.
- Steel structures:
o cleaning of supporting metalwork, including metallic wire brushing to
removal rust,
o pumicing with sand paper or steel wool,
o rubbing down with hard brush or cloth,
o washing with white spirit followed by drying with cloth,
o pumicing down the protection paint coat initially applied in the workshop
and retouching damaged areas with the same paint used in the workshop,
o if no antirust paint exists, application of two coats of anti rust primer of 80
microns thickness,
o application of 1 coat of under coat of 40 microns thickness (measured after
drying),
o application of 1 coat of gloss enamel finish of 40 microns thickness
(measured after drying).
JMED/4NT/3210/000/01/CM
Final Ed. 01-12-19
210
- Metallic doors and sash frames (external and internal surface of windows, doors and
frames):
o cleaning with white spirit,
o retouching with based paint,
o filling and pumicing,
o application of 1 coat of under coat,
o pumicing,
o application of 1 coat of matt enamel finish and 1 coat of gloss enamel finish.
Thickness of each coat measured after drying shall not be less than 40 microns.
15.6.6. Roof slab
The roof slab shall comprise:

 a reinforced concrete slab,
 two layers of water proofing membrane placed on 25 mm thick screed; each layer of
waterproofing membrane shall be at least 3 mm thick they shall be of bituminous
glass fibre or similar, lapped and fixed to the slab by means of coats of hot
bituminous primer,
A slope of 1.5 cm/m shall be provided. The finishing coat shall be protected against
sunrays. All precautions shall be considered to avoid penetration of water between the
roof slab and walls/ parapet.
JMED/4NT/3210/000/01/CM
Final Ed. 01-12-19

TRACTABEL-Distribution System Study PDF

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

TRACTABEL-Distribution System Study PDF

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Central Electricity Board

Distribution System Study

1. Basic data for design and construction of MV/LV networks ........................................ 1

1.1. General design guidelines............................................................................................................. 1

1.3. Local operating conditions ............................................................................................................ 3

1.7.5. Data for calculating load due to wind ......................................................................... 11

2. Design of overhead lines .......................................................................................... 19

2.1. Planning and construction of MV and LV lines ........................................................................... 19

2.3. Topographical work for MV lines ................................................................................................. 20

2.7.2. Calculation of pole loading ......................................................................................... 32

2.9. Sagging chart for overhead lines ................................................................................................ 33

2.10. Other tools included in the GIPSY software ................................................................................ 33

3. Equipment characteristics for MV/LV lines ............................................................... 34

3.1. Line supports ............................................................................................................................... 34

3.5. LV insulated twisted cables (overhead and service lines) .......................................................... 40

3.7.1.2. Insulators .................................................................................................. 44

4. Construction of MV lines .......................................................................................... 54

4.1. Description of works .................................................................................................................... 54

4.4. Foundation construction .............................................................................................................. 55

4.7.3. Assembly and installation of fittings for twisted cables .............................................. 61

5. Construction of LV Lines .......................................................................................... 66

5.2. Description of works .................................................................................................................... 66

5.4. Tree lopping ................................................................................................................................ 67

5.5. Foundation Construction ............................................................................................................. 67

5.9. Pulling, tensioning and fixing of conductors and cables ............................................................. 69

5.10.3. Testing and commissioning report ............................................................................. 70

6. MV/LV underground cables ...................................................................................... 71

6.1. Cable characteristics ................................................................................................................... 71

6.3. Laying of cables .......................................................................................................................... 73

7.1. Standards and recommendations ............................................................................................... 78

7.2. Design and manufacture ............................................................................................................. 78

7.6. Earthing 101

8. Equipment for MT network ..................................................................................... 104

8.1. General 104

8.2. Standards and recommendations ............................................................................................. 104

8.3. Design and manufacture ........................................................................................................... 105

8.3.4.2. Characteristics........................................................................................ 109

8.6. Measurements and inspections after installation – commissioning .......................................... 113

9. Ground mounted distribution stations ..................................................................... 114

9.1. General 114

9.4. Installation of electromechanical equipment ............................................................................. 121

9.5. Installation of M/LV cables ........................................................................................................ 121

9.6. Earthing systems ....................................................................................................................... 122

10. Pole mounted distribution stations ......................................................................... 125

10.1. General 125

10.4. Installation of overhead stations ............................................................................................... 128

10.5. Earthing systems ....................................................................................................................... 129

11. Service lines and cables......................................................................................... 131

11.1. General 131

11.2. Composition .............................................................................................................................. 131

11.5. Measurements, tests and verifications – commissioning.......................................................... 134

12. HV/MV substation equipment - MV side ................................................................. 135

12.1. Outside structures and MV accessories ................................................................................... 135

12.3.3.15. Voltage transformers .............................................................................. 156

12.5.6. Fencing ..................................................................................................................... 171

13. Power and control cables ....................................................................................... 173

13.1. General 173

13.2. Standards and recommendations ............................................................................................. 173

13.3. Functional specifications ........................................................................................................... 173

14.1. General 180

14.2. Tests and inspections during installation .................................................................................. 180

14.3. Tests and inspections before commissioning ........................................................................... 180

14.4. Inspection after commissioning ................................................................................................. 181